Contents

Dell Symmetrix VMAX 100K V8.1.2 Storage Online Help PDF

1 of 896
1 of 896

Summary of Content for Dell Symmetrix VMAX 100K V8.1.2 Storage Online Help PDF

EMC Unisphere for VMAX VERSION 8.1.2

Online Help REV 01

Copyright 2011 - 2016 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published in the USA.

Published February, 2016

EMC believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change without notice.

The information in this publication is provided as is. EMC Corporation makes no representations or warranties of any kind with respect to the information in this publication, and specifically disclaims implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Use, copying, and distribution of any EMC software described in this publication requires an applicable software license.

EMC2, EMC, and the EMC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

For the most up-to-date regulatory document for your product line, go to EMC Online Support (https://support.emc.com).

2 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction to Unisphere for VMAX 19

Chapter 2: Getting Started 21

Operating as the initial setup user 22

Touring the interface 23

Using the Home Dashboard 27

Using the system selector 29

Discovering storage systems 30

Exporting data 30

Refreshing console information 30

Refreshing storage system information 31

Setting preferences 31

Searching for storage objects 32

Filtering lists of objects 33

Exiting the console 35

Getting help 36

Chapter 3: Administration 37

Setting system preferences 38

Displaying login messages 41

Database backup 42

Backing up the database server 42

Viewing database backups 43

Deleting database backups 43

Alert settings 44

Alerts 44

Alert policies 72

Pool threshold alerts 74

Performance thresholds and alerts 76

Compliance alert policies 80

Runtime checks 83

Security 85

Understanding user authorization 85

Viewing user sessions 87

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 3

Authentication 87

Authorization 90

Local Users 93

Link and launch 101

Creating link-and-launch client registrations 101

Editing link-and-launch client registrations 101

Deleting link-and-launch client registrations 102

Viewing link and launch client registrations 102

Chapter 4: Storage Management 103

VMAX provisioning 104

Provisioning VMAX storage (HYPERMAX OS 5977 and higher) 104

Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) 106

Provisioning VMAX storage (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) 109

Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) 110

Reference workloads 114

Storage groups 118

Managing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) 118

Creating storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) 120

Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) 121

Adding volumes to storage groups 122

Copying volumes between storage groups 123

Moving volumes between storage groups 124

Removing volumes from storage groups 125

Expanding storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) 127

Modifying storage groups 130

Moving storage groups to EMC CloudArray 132

Protecting storage groups 133

Converting storage groups to cascaded 141

Changing Storage Resource Pools for storage groups 141

Associating FAST policies and storage groups 142

Disassociating FAST policies and storage groups 144

Reassociating FAST polices and storage groups 145

Adding or removing cascaded storage groups 146

Deleting storage groups 146

Setting host I/O limits 147

Managing VP compression on storage groups 149

4 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing storage groups 149

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 166

Understanding FAST (HYPERMAX OS 5977) 166

Understanding FAST (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) 177

Understanding Workload Planner 200

Volume management 209

Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) 209

Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) 209

Creating volumes 211

Deleting volumes 222

Duplicating volumes 222

Assigning Symmetrix priority 224

Changing volume configuration 224

Expanding existing volumes 226

Mapping volumes 227

Unmapping volumes 228

Setting optimized read miss 228

Setting volume status 230

Setting volume attributes 231

Setting volume identifiers 232

Setting volume names 232

Setting replication QoS 233

Managing Meta Volumes 236

Disk groups 246

Renaming disk groups 246

Removing disks from disk groups 246

Deleting disk groups 246

Viewing disk groups 247

Viewing disk group details 248

Viewing disks in disk group 249

Viewing disk details 249

Virtual Provisioning 252

DATA volumes 252

Thin pools 258

Thin volumes 272

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 278

Migrating regular storage group volumes 278

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 5

Migrating regular volumes 279

Migrating thin storage group volumes 280

Migrating thin volumes 280

Terminating a VLUN migration session 281

Viewing VLUN migration sessions 282

External Storage 283

Viewing external storage 284

Rescanning external storage 285

Understanding ProtectPoint 285

Understanding FAST.X 289

Filtered results table 290

Understanding Federated Tiered Storage 294

Understanding storage templates 297

Creating storage templates 297

Exporting storage templates 299

Importing storage templates 299

Deleting storage templates 299

Viewing storage templates 300

Viewing storage template details 301

Reservations 303

Reserving volumes 303

Adding volumes to reservations 304

Removing volumes from reservations 304

Releasing reservations 305

Viewing reservations 305

Viewing reservation details 305

Understanding Optimizer 307

Managing Optimizer 307

Starting/Stopping Optimizer 308

Enabling/Disabling Optimizer 309

Locking/Unlocking Optimizer 309

Approving Optimizer Swaps 310

Viewing Optimizer swap/move lists 311

Viewing Optimizer swap/move history 311

Chapter 5: Host Management 313

Hosts 314

6 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Creating hosts 314

Adding initiators to hosts 315

Removing initiators from hosts 316

Modifying hosts 316

Renaming hosts/host groups 317

Setting host/host group flags 318

Deleting hosts/host groups 318

Viewing hosts/host groups 318

Viewing host/host group details 319

Viewing host initiators 321

Host/Host group flags 321

Host Groups 323

Creating host groups 323

Adding hosts to host groups 324

Removing hosts from host groups 324

Modifying host groups 325

Renaming hosts/host groups 326

Setting host/host group flags 326

Deleting hosts/host groups 326

Viewing hosts/host groups 327

Viewing host/host group details 328

Viewing hosts in host groups 329

Masking views 330

Creating masking views 330

Renaming masking views 330

Deleting masking views 331

Viewing masking views 331

Viewing masking view connections 331

Viewing masking view details 333

Initiators 335

Masking volumes 335

Unmasking volumes 336

Setting initiator port flags 336

Setting initiator attributes 336

Renaming initiator aliases 337

Replacing initiators 338

Removing masking entries 338

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 7

Viewing initiators 338

Viewing initiator details 339

Port groups 342

Creating port groups 342

Deleting port groups 343

Adding ports to port groups 343

Removing ports from port groups 344

Renaming port groups 344

Viewing port groups 345

Viewing port groups details 345

Viewing ports in port group 347

Viewing port details 348

Virtual servers 349

Adding a new virtual server 349

Adding storage to a VM 349

Removing a virtual server 350

Removing storage from a VM 350

Changing the password on a virtual server 351

Viewing virtual servers 352

Viewing the details of a virtual server 352

CU images 354

Mapping CKD volumes 354

Unmapping CKD volumes 354

Assigning alias addresses 355

Removing alias addresses 356

Assigning alias ranges 356

Removing alias ranges 357

Assigning alias counts 357

Removing alias counts 358

Viewing CU images 358

Viewing CU image details 359

Host aliases 361

Masking volumes 361

Creating host aliases 362

Adding initiators to host aliases 362

Removing initiators from host aliases 362

Unmasking volumes from host aliases 362

8 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting host aliases 363

Renaming host aliases 363

Viewing host aliases 363

Viewing host alias details 364

Host Cache Adapters 365

Viewing host cache adapters 365

Chapter 6: Data Protection 367

Monitoring protection 368

Protection Dashboard: 368

Local Replication 371

TimeFinder/Clone 371

TimeFinder/Snap 387

TimeFinder SnapVX 400

TimeFinder/Mirror 415

Device Groups 425

Creating device groups 425

Adding volumes to device groups 426

Removing volumes from device groups 426

Enabling consistency protection 426

Disabling consistency protection 427

Renaming device groups 428

Deleting device groups 428

Viewing device groups 429

Viewing device group details 429

Remote Replication 433

Managing remote replication sessions 433

SRDF 433

Properties panel 442

Related Object panel 445

Related Object panel 447

Related Object panel 449

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 476

Migrating regular storage group volumes 476

Migrating regular volumes 477

Migrating thin storage group volumes 478

Migrating thin volumes 478

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 9

Viewing VLUN migration sessions 479

Viewing VLUN migration session details 479

Replication Groups and Pools 481

SRDF/A DSE Pools 481

TimeFinder Snap Pools 485

SRDF Groups 488

Understanding RecoverPoint 509

Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint 510

Viewing RecoverPoint sessions 511

Viewing RecoverPoint session details 511

Viewing RecoverPoint tagged volumes 512

Viewing RecoverPoint tagged volume details 512

Protecting storage groups using RecoverPoint 514

Viewing RecoverPoint volumes 516

Viewing RecoverPoint clusters 518

Viewing RecoverPoint cluster details 518

Viewing RecoverPoint splitters 519

Viewing RecoverPoint appliances 520

RecoverPoint systems 521

RecoverPoint consistency groups 524

RecoverPoint copies 526

RecoverPoint replication sets 529

RecoverPoint links 530

Open Replicator 533

Creating Open Replicator copy sessions 533

Managing Open Replicator sessions 534

Activating Open Replicator sessions 535

Restoring Open Replicator sessions 535

Renaming Open Replicator sessions 536

Removing Open Replicator sessions 536

Setting Open Replicator session background copy mode 536

Setting Open Replicator session donor update off 537

Setting Open Replicator session front end zero detection off 537

Setting Open Replicator session pace 537

Setting Open Replicator ceiling 538

Terminating Open Replicator sessions 538

Viewing Open Replicator sessions 538

10 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing Open Replicator session details 539

Open Replicator session options 540

Open Replicator flags 542

Understanding Federated Live Migration 544

Setting up/Running Federated Live Migration 545

Creating a FLM session 547

Chapter 7: Performance management 551

Common Tasks 552

Exporting Performance settings 552

Importing Performance settings 552

Exporting Performance Viewer settings 553

About exporting and importing Performance settings 553

Saving dashboards and charts 554

Filtering performance data 555

Changing the time range 555

Monitor view 558

Managing dashboards 558

Viewing dashboards 560

Creating a dashboard or template folder 561

Creating a dashboard with charts 561

Copying a dashboard 561

Editing a template dashboard 562

Editing a dashboard 562

Deleting a dashboard 562

Running a report from the dashboard 563

Saving a dashboard as a template 563

Saving dashboard changes 563

Managing EMC Views 564

Navigating from a heatmap to an analyze view 564

Scheduling a report from the dashboard 564

Using EMC summary dashboards 565

Analyze view 570

Navigating in the Analyze tab 570

Viewing information in the Analyze view 571

Creating a dashboard from an Analyze view 571

Creating a template dashboard from an Analyze view 571

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 11

Viewing a Real Time trace 572

Real Time Analysis views 572

Root Cause Analysis views 575

Trending & Planning views 589

Charts view 605

Using the UI elements in the Charts view 605

Creating charts 607

Customizing charts 608

Customizing the Charts view 610

Plan view 612

Using projection dashboards 612

Reports view 615

Viewing performance reports 615

Creating performance reports 615

Creating queries using the Create Query wizard 616

Copying performance reports 617

Editing performance reports 618

Scheduling performance reports 619

Cancelling a scheduled report 619

Running performance reports 619

Deleting performance reports 620

Settings 621

System Registrations 621

Performance Thresholds and Alerts 623

Real Time Traces 626

Databases 628

Metrics 632

Metrics 634

Array metrics 634

BE Director (DA) metrics 639

BE Emulation metrics 641

BE Port metrics 642

Board metrics 643

Cache Partition metrics 644

Core metrics 647

DATA Volume metrics 648

Database metrics 650

12 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Database by Pool metrics 656

Device Group metrics 657

Disk metrics 664

Disk Bucket metrics 666

Disk Group metrics 667

Disk Group tier metrics 669

Disk Technology metrics 671

DSE Pool metrics 673

DX Emulation metrics 674

DX Port metrics 675

EDS Director metrics 676

EDS Emulation metrics 677

External Director metrics 678

External Disk metrics 681

External Disk Group metrics 682

FAST VP Policy metrics 683

FE Director metrics 684

FE Emulation metrics 687

FE Port metrics 688

FE Port - FE metrics 689

FE Port - SG metrics 690

FICON Emulation metrics 691

Host metrics 692

Host IO Limit by FE metrics 693

Host IO Limit by SG metrics 694

IM Director metrics 695

IM Emulation metrics 696

Initiator metrics 697

Initiators by Port metrics 698

IP Interface metrics 699

iSCSI Target metrics 700

Masking View metrics 701

Metas metrics 702

Other - Pool Bound Volume metrics 710

Pool by Storage Group metrics 718

Port Group metrics 719

RDF Director metrics 720

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 13

RDF Emulation metrics 722

RDF Port metrics 723

RDF/A Group metrics 724

RDF/S Group metrics 729

SAVE Volume metrics 734

Snap Pool metrics 742

Spare Disk metrics 743

SRP metrics 745

Storage Group metrics 746

Storage Group by Pool metrics 754

Storage Group by Tier metrics 755

Thin Pool metrics 756

Thin Volume metrics 759

Tier by Storage Group metrics 765

Virtual Pool Tier metrics 766

Volume metrics 768

Chapter 8: Databases 777

Understanding Database Storage Analyzer 778

Viewing databases 779

Viewing database details 780

Launching Database Storage Analyzer 781

Chapter 9: System Management 783

Monitoring storage systems 784

System Dashboard: 784

Viewing storage system details 787

Setting system attributes 791

Setting CPU I/O resource distribution 794

Understanding eNAS 795

Discovering eNAS control stations 795

Managing File Storage 795

Provisioning storage for file 797

Launching Unisphere for VNX 800

Managing file storage groups 801

Managing file masking views 802

Viewing file systems 803

14 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing file system details 803

Viewing file system storage pools 804

Viewing file system storage pool details 805

Managing file storage alerts 807

Audit log 811

Viewing the system audit log 811

Viewing Symmetrix audit log details 811

Filtering audit log records 812

Hardware management 814

Converting directors 814

Associating directors with ports 815

Setting director port attributes 815

Associating directors and ports 817

Disassociating directors and ports 818

Enabling and disabling director ports 818

Performing system health checks 818

Naming storage systems 819

Locating VMAX systems 819

Replacing failed drives 820

Viewing hardware components 823

Managing jobs 840

Making configuration changes safely 841

Understanding task persistence 841

Previewing 842

Scheduling jobs 843

Running jobs 843

Rescheduling jobs 843

Renaming jobs 843

Reordering tasks within a job 844

Grouping jobs 844

Un-grouping jobs 844

Stopping jobs 844

Deleting jobs 845

Viewing the job list 845

Viewing job details 847

Understanding licenses 849

Licenses 849

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 15

Unisphere for VMAX licensing 849

Installing licenses 849

Removing host-based licenses 850

Viewing Symmetrix entitlements 850

Viewing host-based licenses 852

Viewing license usage 852

Understanding access controls 854

Opening access controls 854

Creating access groups 854

Adding access ID to access groups 855

Removing access IDs from access groups 856

Deleting access groups 856

Viewing access groups 856

Creating access pools 856

Modifying access pools 857

Deleting access pools 857

Viewing access pools 858

Modifying access types 858

Creating access control entries 858

Deleting access control entries 859

Viewing access control entries 859

Viewing access control entry details 859

Viewing access groups 860

Viewing access group details 861

Viewing access IDs 861

Viewing access pools 862

Viewing access pool details 862

Viewing access pool volumes 863

Viewing access types 863

Access types 864

Understanding dynamic cache partitioning 866

Enabling/Disabling dynamic cache partitioning 866

Creating dynamic cache partitions 866

Assigning dynamic cache partitions 867

Deleting dynamic cache partitions 867

Running in analyze mode 868

Viewing dynamic cache partitions 868

16 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing dynamic cache partition details 869

iSCSI 871

Viewing the iSCSI dashboard 872

Creating an iSCSI target 875

Creating an IP interface 877

Adding an IP route 878

Deleting an iSCSI target 878

Deleting an IP interface 879

Removing an IP Route 879

Attaching an IP interface to an iSCSI target 880

Attaching an iSCSI target to an IP interface 882

Detaching an IP interface from an iSCSI target 883

Disabling an iSCSI target 883

Enabling an iSCSI target 883

Setting port flags 884

Viewing the iSCSI directors list 885

Viewing the iSCSI director details 886

Viewing the IP interfaces list 887

Viewing the IP interfaces details 888

Viewing the iSCSI targets list 891

Viewing the iSCSI target details 892

Viewing the IP routes list 893

Viewing the IP routes details 894

Viewing the iSCSI ports list 895

Viewing the iSCSI ports details 896

Unisphere for VMAX Online Help 17

18 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Introduction to Unisphere for VMAX

Unisphere for VMAX is a web-based application that allows you to configure and manage VMAX storage systems. You can use Unisphere to:

Manage user accounts and roles

Perform configuration operations (create thin volumes, mask volumes, set storage attributes,

set volume attributes, and set port flags)

Manage volumes (change volume configuration, set volume status, and create/dissolve meta

volumes)

Perform and monitor replication and backup operations:

TimeFinder SnapVX

TimeFinder/Snap

TimeFinder VP Snap

TimeFinder/Clone

TimeFinder/Mirror

Symmetrix Remote Data Facility (SRDF)

Open Replicator for Symmetrix (ORS)

ProtectPointTM

Manage advanced storage features, such as:

Fully Automated Storage Tiering (FAST)TM

Fully Automated Storage Tiering for virtual pools (FAST VP)

Service Level provisioning

Workload planning

FAST Array Advisor

Enhanced Virtual LUN Technology

Auto-provisioning Groups

Virtual Provisioning

Federated Live Migration (FLM)

Federated Tiered Storage (FTS)

Embedded NAS (eNAS)

FAST.X

Monitor alerts, including the ability to configure external alert notifications

Monitor storage system performance data:

Monitor performance and capacity over time

Chapter 1: Introduction to Unisphere for VMAX

19

Drill-down through data to investigate issues

View graphs detailing system performance

Set performance thresholds and alerts

View high frequency metrics in real time

Perform root cause analysis

View storage system heatmaps

Execute scheduled and ongoing reports (queries), and export that data to a file

Utilize predefined dashboards for many of the system components

Customize your own dashboard templates

Execute scheduled export of performance dashboards

Monitor and troubleshoot database performance issues using Database Storage Analyzer

Chapter 1: Introduction to Unisphere for VMAX

20 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Getting Started

This chapter contains the following:

Operating as the initial setup user 22

Touring the interface 23

Using the Home Dashboard 27

Using the system selector 29

Discovering storage systems 30

Exporting data 30

Refreshing console information 30

Refreshing storage system information 31

Setting preferences 31

Searching for storage objects 32

Filtering lists of objects 33

Exiting the console 35

Getting help 36

Chapter 2: Getting Started 21

CHAPTER 2

Operating as the initial setup user When Unisphere for VMAX is first installed, there is a single user called the Initial Setup User (ISU). This user can perform administrative tasks only on storage systems that do not have defined roles (authorization rules). Once an Administrator or Security is assigned to a storage system, the ISU will no longer be able to access or even see the system from the Unisphere console. Therefore, it is recommended that users not operate in this role for too long.

The main tasks of an ISU are:

Local Users on page 93

Authorization on page 90

Chapter 2: Getting Started

22 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Touring the interface The Unisphere for VMAX interface consists primarily of dashboards and views. Dashboards provide a high-level view of your storage environment, and views provide a low-level view of the various storage objects (groups, volumes, etc.). While dashboards provide some management functionality, most of your management tasks will start in the views.

The following example shows a typical view. In this case, the Volumes list view for a storage group.

Title bar: Clicking on this displays a drop down menu. The menu options available are: Help, About, Export, Settings and Logout. The drop down menu also displays information about the user who is logged onto Unisphere.

Opens the search dialog.

Menu bar: Note: Depending on your storage operating environment, some of the following options may not apply. Home The Home menu provides access to the following operations:

View the Home Dashboard, from which you can view how the well the storage

systems are performing, including capacity usage, response time, compliance, and alerts.

View and manage Administration settings, including:

Alert policies, thresholds, and notifications

Authentication options (local directory, Windows OS/AD, LDAP-SSL)

System preferences

User authorizations

Link and launch client registrations

View, acknowledge, and delete alerts for all visible storage systems

View/Export storage system capacity information

System selector

The system selector displays a list of all managed storage systems. It allows you to toggle the interface between two modes, All Symmetrix and individual systems. Selections you make in the list provide the context for subsequent operations. For

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Touring the interface 23

more information, refer to Using the system selector (page 29).

Storage The Storage menu provides access to the following operations, depending on the storage environment:

View and manage storage groups (Enginuity version 5874 - 5876)

Provision storage to hosts

View and mange service levels (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

View and manage Storage Resource Pools (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

View and manage volumes

View and manage external storage (Enginuity 5876, HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher)

View and manage the FAST controller policies (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

View and manage thin pools (Enginuity 5773 - 5876)

View and manage storage tiers (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

View and manage storage volumes

View and manage storage templates (Enginuity version 5874 - 5876)

View and manage disk groups

View and manage Symmetrix Optimizer (Enginuity version 5671 - 5876)

The Storage menu is only available when you select an individual storage system from the system selector.

Hosts The Hosts menu provides access to the following operations:

View and manage hosts

View and manage masking views

View and manage initiators (rename alias, set attributes, set flags, replace

initiator)

View and manage port groups

View XtremSW cache adapters

View and manage virtual servers

The Hosts menu is only available when you select an individual storage system from the system selector.

Data Protection

The Data Protection menu provides access to the following operations:

View and manage TimeFinder sessions

View and manage SRDF sessions

View and manage Symmetrix system migration sessions

Chapter 2: Getting Started

24 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

View and manage replication groups and pools

View and manage SAN LUNs, Open Replicator, RecoverPoint, and Federate

Live Migration

The Data Protection menu is only available when you select an individual storage system from the system selector.

Performance The Performance menu provides access to the following operations:

Monitor and manage Symmetrix system dashboards (charts/graphs, heat maps,

predefined for FAST).

Perform trend analysis for future capacity planning

Analyze Symmetrix system data for diagnostic troubleshooting

Create charts for historical, diagnostic, and realtime storage system data

Manage policies for data collection and polling

Customize the performance metrics to your requirements

Set thresholds and alert notifications for Symmetrix system components

Maintain and schedule captures of a specified time period of real-time data

Create, schedule, execute, and export data queries

Configure the performance database and perform backups and restores

Databases The Database menu provides access to the following operations:

View storage system-visible databases

Launch Database Storage Analyzer for optimizing database performance

System The System menu provides access to the following operations:

View system dashboards, from which you can replace failed spare drives, and

perform Symmetrix health checks

View and filter records from the system audit log

View, acknowledge, and delete alerts for the specified Symmetrix system

View and manage active jobs

View storage system hardware

View iSCSI dashboard

View File dashboard

Licensing

The System menu is only available when you select an individual storage system from the system selector.

Support The Support menu provides access to the online help.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Touring the interface 25

Help:

Displays content-sensitive help for current view or dashboard. Contents:

The main section of the interface where you will perform the majority of your work. This can contain a dashboard; a list view, as shown above; a details view; or a properties view. In either case, this section usually contains a series of controls (buttons) that allow you to act on the displayed content. For example, a volume list may contain Create and Delete buttons. For operations that you can perform on multiple objects at a time (for example, deleting storage groups), Shift and Ctrl keys are supported to allow you to select multiple sequential, and non-sequential objects, respectively. Status bar:

Provides the following information:

Link to the Alerts New list view for the storage system on which you are currently working. The

maximum number of alerts Unisphere for VMAX will display is 10,000 per server. Once this threshold is reached, Unisphere for VMAX will delete the oldest alert for each subsequent alert it receives.

Link to the Jobs List for the selected storage system. This only appears after you have selected

a storage system.

The date and time the current contents (view, dashboard, etc.) was updated.

when clicked refreshes data in Unisphere console window. Unisphere for VMAX refreshes all its data from the database.

when clicked refreshes storage system data. Unisphere for VMAX refreshes storage system data from the database. This operation will not discover new storage systems, only refresh data from existing systems.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

26 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Using the Home Dashboard The Home Dashboard provides a single place from which you can quickly determine how your storage systems are performing. The Home Dashboard opens by default when you first open the

Unisphere for VMAX console. To return to it from another view, click in the menu bar.

The Home Dashboard displays the following, depending on your storage operating environment:

Storage systems appear grayed-out when they are in a disabled state. This usually occurs when the Unisphere for VMAX server managing the storage system is in the process of starting up.

System nice name, or if not defined, system ID number. Unlicensed systems are indicated with

. To license the system, click the icon to open the Entitlements page from which you can license the storage system.

Model number

Connection (Local or Remote)

Enginuity/HYPERMAX OS version. Enginuity/HYPERMAX OS versions below the minimum

suggested target version display a warning icon . In which case, you should contact your service provider to schedule an upgrade.

Alert summary icon that displays the alert status and count. Alert status is indicated by icon

color:

One or more fatal alerts

One or more critical alerts, with none higher

One or more warning alerts, with none higher

One or more informational alerts, with none higher

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Using the Home Dashboard 27

No alerts

To view details on the system's alerts, click the alert count (#) to open the system's alert list view.

Capacity Graphic representation of the system's capacity (used = blue and free = grey). For

storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, only virtual capacity is displayed. For systems running lower OS versions, both physical and virtual capacities are displayed. Click the Capacity link to open the storage system's Dashboard (or the SRP dashboard for systems running HYPERMAX 0S 5977 or higher). Data only displays in this field for local storage systems.

SG Compliance How well the storage system's workload is complying with the overall

service level. This field displays for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher and registered with the Performance component. Data only displays in this field for local storage systems. Possible values are:

Stable Number of storage groups performing within the service level targets. indicates that there are no storage groups performing within the service level targets.

Marginal Number of storage groups performing below service level targets. indicates that there are no storage groups performing below service level targets.

Critical Number of storage groups performing well below service level targets. indicates that there are no storage group performing well below service level targets.

To view the Storage Groups Dashboard, click the SG Compliance link. To view the available service levels, click .

SG Response Time Graphic representation of how well the storage system's storage groups

are performing. This is determined by analyzing the number of storage groups with more than 10 I/Os per second over the last hour, and then displaying the appropriate icon (green (Stable), yellow (Marginal), red (Critical) disks, as shown earlier for service level compliance). This field displays for storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876 and registered with the Performance component.

System Utilization Graphic representation of the distribution of % busy for the storage

system's front-end, back-end, and cache partitions. To calculate the % busy, the system runs through the following categories and metrics over four hours to determine if a threshold has been crossed:

Front End = The following summed together:

Front end directors: % Busy, % Busy Port 0, % Busy Port 1 and

RDF directors: % Busy, % Busy Port 0

Cache = % WP Utilization

Back End = DA and DX: % Busy, % Busy Port 0, % Busy Port 1

Results are displayed in bar charts of the following colors:

Green Indicates the percent of checks that returned values below the first threshold.

Yellow Indicates the percent of checks that returned values between the first and second thresholds.

Red Indicates the percent of check that returned values above the second threshold.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

28 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Using the system selector

The system selector, located at the second left of the menu bar, displays a list of all managed storage systems. It allows you to toggle the interface between two modes, All Symmetrix and individual systems. The mode you select will determine the menus/controls available to you (for example, the menus under

are only available when you select All Symmetrix) and provide the context for subsequent operations.

For example, to create a host on SYMID001234:

1. Select SYMID001234 from the selector.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Click Create to open the Create Host dialog box.

Similarly, selections you make will also be reflected in the interface's numerous views and lists. For example, if you are viewing a list of thin pools for SYM00001234 and you select SYMID005678 from the selector, the view changes to list the thin pools for SYMID005678.

In addition, the system selector includes the Discover Symmetrix option that enables you to retrieve information on your storage environment. For more information, refer to Discovering storage systems (page 30).

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Using the system selector 29

Discovering storage systems Discovery refers to process by which storage system, volume-level configuration and status information is retrieved. Discovered configuration and status data for all storage systems, as well as their directors and volumes, is maintained in a configuration database file on each host. Once you have discovered your environment, you can direct information requests to retrieve system level (high-level) data or volume-level (low-level) information from it.

To discover a storage system:

1. Click the system selector, located at the far left of the menu bar, and select Discover Symmetrix.

2. Click OK in the confirmation message.                           

Exporting data This procedure explains how to export the contents of a view (list, details, dashboard, performance analyze) to a file:

1. While in the view, click in the title bar and select Export to open the Export Wizard.

2. Expand Application Container and select the component to export.

3. Click Next.

4. Select whether to export the content as Data in a table or as an Image, or as Image and Data Table and click Next.

5. Select a format to use when exporting the data. The formats available here depend on whether you are exporting data or an image.

6. Click Finish.

7. Select a download location and click Save.

Refreshing console information

To refresh data in the Unisphere console window, click refresh in the status bar. Unisphere for VMAX refreshes all its data from the database.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

30 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Refreshing storage system information

To refresh storage system data, click in the status bar. Unisphere for VMAX refreshes storage system data from the database. This operation will not discover new storage systems, only refresh data from existing systems.

Setting preferences

1. Click in the title bar and select Settings to open the Preference Settings dialog box.

2. Modify any of the following settings:

Display Language Sets the language in which text is displayed in the interface. Only

installed language packs are available.

Logging Level This feature is not supported.

Optimize for Remote Connection This feature is not supported.

3. Click OK.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Refreshing storage system information 31

Searching for storage objects To search for objects (storage groups, hosts, initiators) across all manage storage systems:

1. Click in the title bar.

2. Select the type of object (Storage Group, Host, Initiator).

3. Depending on the object you are looking for, type the following:

Storage Group Type all or part of the storage group name.

Host Type all or part of the host name.

Initiator Type all or part of the initiator name.

Select All Symmetrixor a specific storage system identifier.

4. Click Find.

Results include the object Name, the Object Type, and the associated storage system (Symmetrix ID).

5. To view object details, click the object name to open its Details view.

6. Click Clear to clear the results of the search.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

32 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Filtering lists of objects Unisphere for VMAX includes two types of filtering tools to help you quickly locate specific objects in lists, wizards, and dialog boxes:

Simple Allows you search for specific objects by name. For example, the name of a storage

group.

Advanced dialog Allows you to filter lists by attributes. For example, capacity, reservations,

etc.

The system Audit Log and Alerts list views include their own custom filters. For instructions on using these filters, refer to Filtering audit log records on page 812 and Filtering alerts on page 46, respectively. In addition, the Volumes view for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher includes another form of advanced filter. For instructions on using it, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209.

To use the simple filter:

1. Click the filter icon and click Show Filter to display a search field.

2. Type all or part of the object's name and press Enter.

3. To clear the filter (that is, view the complete list again), click the filter icon again and select Clear.

To use the advanced filter

1. Click the filter icon to open the Advanced Filter dialog box.

2. Select or type a value for any number of the following criteria, and then click OK. Volume Type

Capacity Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Capacity Range Filters the list for volumes with capacities within the range.

Volume Configuration Filters the list for volumes with a specific configuration.

Advanced:

Emulation Filters the list for volumes with a specific emulation.

Private Volumes Filters the list for volumes of a specific type. (This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.)

Meta Filters the list for metavolumes of a particular type.

Volume Flag Specifies any volume flags. Volume Identifier

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Range Filters the list for volumes with IDs within the range.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Filtering lists of objects 33

Volume Availability

Status Filters the list for volumes with a specific status.

Reservation Filters the list for reserved volumes of a specific type.

Used:

Mapped Specifies whether to include/exclude mapped volumes.

Masked Specifies whether to include/exclude masked volumes.

Bound Specifies whether to include/exclude bound volumes.

Enabled Specifies whether to include/exclude enabled volumes.

Held Specifies whether to include/exclude held volumes.

In Storage Group Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes that are in storage groups.

In Device Group Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes that are in device groups.

AS400 Gatekeeper Specifies whether to include/exclude AS400 gatekeeper volumes.

Host Cache Card Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes under host cache card control.

D1F1 Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes that do not have the d1f1 attribute set.

Replication

SRDF group Filters the list for volumes within a specific SRDF group.

Dynamic RDF Filters the list for dynamic SRDF volumes of a specific type.

Used:

RecoverPoint Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes under RecoverPoint control. This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5875.139.93 - 5876.

Write Pacing Capable Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes that are capable of using SRDF/A write pacing.

Concurrent RDF Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the Concurrent RDF flag set.

Cascaded RDF Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the Cascaded RDF flag set. This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5671 - 5876.

Diskless RDF Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the Diskless RDF flag set.

RDF not ready if Invalid Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the RDF_NR_IF_INV flag set.

RDF Asynchronous Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the RDF Asynchronous flag set.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

34 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Attached Target Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the Attached Target flag set.

Attached BCV Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with the Attached BCV flag set.

Data Domain Specifies whether to include/exclude Data Domain volumes. This filter is only available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Related Objects

Disk Technology Filters the list for volumes on a specific disk technology.

Pool Filters the list for volumes in a specific pool.

Disk Group Filters the list for volumes in a specific disk group.

Storage Group Filters the list for volumes in a specific storage group.

Federated Tiered Storage

For storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, this option is only available when using ProtectPoint.

Used:

External Specifies whether to include/exclude external volumes.

Encapsulated Specifies whether to include/exclude encapsulated volumes.

Encapsulated WWN Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with encapsulated WWNs.

Geometry Limited Specifies whether to include/exclude volumes with limited geometry.

Virtual Provisioning

Allocated Capacity Percentage Filters the list for volumes with a specific allocated

capacity.

Written Capacity Percentage Filters the list for volumes with a specific written

capacity.

Bound to Thin Pool Filters the list for volumes bound to specific thin pools.

1. To clear the filter, open the Advanced Filter dialog box, click Clear All, and then OK.

Exiting the console

To exit the Unisphere for VMAX console, click in the title bar and select Logout.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Exiting the console 35

Getting help

Clicking in the title bar and selecting Help opens the entire help system.

Clicking help in a dialog box, wizard page, or view opens a help topic specifically for that dialog, page, or view.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

36 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Administration

This chapter contains the following:

Setting system preferences 38

Displaying login messages 41

Database backup 42

Alert settings 44

Security 85

Link and launch 101

Chapter 3: Administration 37

CHAPTER 3

Setting system preferences

Before you begin:

Only a user with Administrator permission can set preferences.

To set system preferences:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration to open the Administration page.

3. Click Preferences to open the Preferences page.

4. Modify any number of the following preferences:

Debug Specify debug level. Set the following parameters:

Debug Set the level of debugging to write to the debug file.

Debug2 Set the secondary level of debugging to write to the debug file.

Debug Filename Enter the debug file name.

Reservation Specify storage system volume reservation preferences. Set the following

parameters:

Reservations must be enabled and enforced in the Options file, which is located in the SYMAPI configuration directory. The settings are displayed in the Reservation panel.

Enable Reservation Specifies whether volume reservations are enabled for this host.

Reservation Type Specifies whether a volume reservation is enforced for all users.

Default Reservation after expiration days Enter the number of days that volume reservations will remain in affect. The value specified here will appear as the default expiration date in all dialog boxes and wizard panels that include the Reserve option. Setting this value to 0 (default) disables this option and the Reserve option will appear clear (unchecked) in all dialogs and wizard panels.

Select to enable or clear to disable for the following configuration parameters:

Enable acquire upon job starts Allows for automatic volume reservation on volumes for a job.

Enable require comments upon acquire Specifies that the user must enter comments for volume reservations. When enabled, the user must enter a comment, or an error displays.

Enable auto release after job completion Allows the volume reservation to be released after the job has been committed.

Enable auto release after clear Allows the volume reservation to be released after the task has been cleared from the job list.

Replication Specify the following Replication parameters:

BCV Delay (sec) Select the amount of time to wait between TimeFinder establish

Chapter 3: Administration

38 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

operations. The delay can be set from 0 to 30 seconds. The default value is 0.

BCV Establish Type Select the TimeFinder establish type.

BCV Pair Cancel Policy Select the BCV pair cancel policy for establishing new pairs when the maximum number of pairs has been reached.

Max BCV Pairs Select the maximum number of BCV pairs (0-16).

Clone Copy Mode Select the default behavior for creating clone sessions. Possible values are:

No Copy No Diff Create a nondifferential (full) copy session without a full background copy.

Copy No Diff Creates a nondifferential (full) copy session in the background.

PreCopy No Diff Creates a nondifferential (full) copy session in the background before the activate starts.

Copy Diff Creates a differential copy session in the background. In differential copy sessions, only those volume tracks that have changed since the full clone was performed are copied (that is, only new writes to the source volume will be copied).

PreCopy Diff Creates a differential copy session in the background before the activate starts. In differential copy sessions, only those volume tracks that have changed since the full clone was performed are copied (that is, only new writes to the source volume will be copied).

VSE No Diff Creates a VP Snap Copy session.

Clone Pair Policy Select the clone terminate policy when establishing a new clone, and the maximum number of clones has been reached.

Automatic Clone Creation Select the mode in which to create the clone sessions. Possible values are:

Best Effort Specifies to satisfy the request from existing volumes, and then create the volumes necessary to meet any shortfall.

Find Existing Specifies to select from existing volumes.

Create New Specifies to create new volumes.

Clone Target Select the default target volume.

Enable clone copy on write Restricts copy operations when the target of a clone is being read. Select to enable, or clear to disable.

Enable clone larger target Allows cloning from a source volume to a larger target volume. Select to enable, or deselect to disable.

Enable command scope Limits eligible volumes for TimeFinder operations to source volumes that have sessions with target volumes contained within the same device group. Enabling this option limits the eligible volumes. This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher. Select to enable, or clear to disable.

Enable multi virtual snap Allows for up to 128 snap sessions on the same source volume. For storage systems running Enginuity 5874.207.166 or higher, this also allows for the creation of multi-virtual snap sessions from thin volumes. Select to enable, or clear to disable.

Chapter 3: Administration

Setting system preferences 39

Open Replicator Copy Mode Select the default behavior for creating Open Replicator copy sessions.

Snap Pair Policy Select the snap terminate policy for establishing a new snap when the maximum number of snaps has been reached.

Enable RDF group level consistency Allows for checks for consistency of the RDF group level during a consistent operation. Select to enable, or clear to disable.

Enable TF/Clone emulation Allows for TF/Clone emulation. Select to enable, or clear to disable.

Protection Setup Wizard SRDF Communication Protocol Select the default SRDF communication protocol, Fibre Channel or GigE.

Protection Setup Wizard SRDF Number of Ports Select the default number of ports to use with SRDF.

SRDF/S Response Time (ms) Specify the threshold values used to determine the status

(color) of the Remote Replication tile in the Protection Dashboard. For example, with the default values (Green = 5 and Yellow = 10) set, the following applies:

If the response time of the majority of remotely protected device groups is less than 5, the status will display green.

If the response time of the majority of remotely protected device groups is less than 10, the storage group willd yellow.

If the response time of the majority of remotely protected device groups is more than 10, the storage group is considered red.

Client Session Type a message to display to Unisphere for VMAX users during login. For

example, you may want to notify logging in users about a software upgrade. Messages can be up to 240 characters/6 lines.

5. Click Apply.

Chapter 3: Administration

40 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Displaying login messages The login message feature enables Administrators and StorageAdmins to display a message to Unisphere for VMAX users during login. For example, an administrator may want to notify logging in users about a software upgrade.

To create a login message:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Preferences to open the Preferences page.

3. In the Client Session panel, type the message you want to display. Messages can be up to 240 characters/6 lines.

Chapter 3: Administration

Displaying login messages 41

Database backup

Backing up the database server This procedure explains how to backup all the data currently on the database server, including Database Storage Analyzer, Workload Planner, performance, and infrastructure data. Database backups will enable you to recover from system crashes.

You can only restore the database to the same Unisphere for VMAX version and same operating system. For example, a V8.0.1 database on Windows, can only be restored to a V8.0.1 on Windows.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator.

To backup the database server:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Databases to open the Databases list view.

3. Click Backup to open the Database Backup dialog box.

4. In File Name, type a description of the backup. Note that the final file name will consist of a time stamp and your custom description.

5. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

42 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing database backups This procedure explains how to view database backups.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a Monitor.

To view database backups:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Databases to open the Databases list view.

The following properties display:

Backup Name Name of the backup in the form TimeStamp_CustomName.

Status Status of the backup.

Start Time Time the backup started.

End Time Time the backup ended.

Message Message related to the backup.

The following controls are available:

Backup Backing up the database server on the previous page

Delete Deleting database backups below

Deleting database backups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator.

To delete database backups:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Databases to open the Databases list view.

3. Select one or more backups and click Delete.

4. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 3: Administration

Database backup 43

Alert settings You can configure Unisphere for VMAX to monitor storage systems for specific events or error conditions. When an event/error of interest occurs, Unisphere for VMAX will display an alert and, if configured to do so, notify you of the alert by way of email, SNMP, or Syslog.

In addition to alerting you of specific events/errors, Unisphere for VMAX also performs a number of runtime checks, for which it will also alert you. For more information, refer to Runtime checks on page 83.

The procedures in this section explain how to configure and use the alert functionality.

Alerts

Viewing alerts

This procedure explains how to view alerts for a particular storage system or all the visible storage systems.

Before you begin:

For alert (event) descriptions, refer to Alert descriptions on page 49.

In addition to alerting you of specific events/errors, Unisphere for VMAX also performs a

number of runtime checks, for which it will also alert you. For more information, refer to Runtime checks on page 83.

The maximum number of alerts Unisphere for VMAX will display is 10,000. Once this threshold

is reached, Unisphere for VMAX will delete the oldest alert for each subsequent alert it receives.

To view alerts:

1. Do the following, depending on whether you want to view the alerts for a particular storage system, or for all storage systems.

For a particular storage system:

a. Select the storage system.

b. Select System > Alerts to open the system's Alerts list view.

For all visible storage systems:

a. Select All Symmetrix.

b. Select Home > Alerts to open the Alert list view.

2. Optional: Use the alert filter to view a subset of the listed alerts. For more information on the Alert Filter, refer to Filtering alerts (page 46).

Chapter 3: Administration

44 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

In both cases, the following properties display:

State State of the alert. Possible values are New or Acknowledged.

Severity Alert's severity. Possible values are:

Fatal

Critical

Warning The following events map to this severity:

The component is in a degraded state of operation.

The storage array is no longer present (during certain operations).

The component is in an unknown state.

The component is (where possible) in a write-disabled state.

Information The component is no longer present (during certain operations).

Normal The component is now (back) in a normal state of operation.

Type Type of alert. Possible values are Array, Performance, Server, System, and File.

Symmetrix Storage system reporting the alert. This field only appears when viewing

alerts for all Symmetrix systems. This field will appear blank for server alerts. This is because server alerts are specific to the server or runtime environment and are not associated with a specific object or Symmetrix system.

Object Component to which the alert is related. This is because server alerts are specific

to the server or runtime environment and are not associated with a specific object or Symmetrix system.

Description Description of the alert.

Created Date/time the alert was created.

Acknowledged Date/time the alert was acknowledged.

The following controls are available:

View Details See Viewing alert details on the next page.

Acknowledge See Acknowledging alerts on the next page.

Delete See Deleting alerts on page 47.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 45

Filtering alerts

The Alerts list view (System > Alerts, or Home > Alerts) includes a filter tool for narrowing the listed alerts to only those that meet the specified criteria:

Start Date Filters the list for alerts created on the specified date/time.

End Date Filters the list for alerts acknowledged on the specified date/time.

State Filters the list for alerts with the specified state.

Severity Filters the list for alerts with the specified severity.

Type Filters the list for alerts with the specified type.

Object Filters the list for alerts for the specified object.

Description Filters the list for alerts with the specified description.

Acknowledging alerts

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Alerts to open the Alerts list view.

3. Select one or more alerts and click Acknowledge.

Viewing alert details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Alerts to open the Alert list view.

3. Select an alert and click View Details to open the Alerts Details view.

This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Alert ID Unique number assigned by Unisphere for VMAX.

State State of the alert. Possible values are new or acknowledged.

Severity Alert's severity. Possible values are:

Fatal

Critical

Warning

Information

Normal

Type Type of alert. Possible values are Array, Performance, and System.

Symmetrix ID of the storage system generating the alert.

Chapter 3: Administration

46 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Object Object to which the alert is related. For more information, click the object to open its

details view.

Created Date/time the alert was created.

Description Description of the alert.

The following controls are available:

Acknowledge See Acknowledging alerts on the previous page.

Delete See Deleting alerts below.

Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to other alerts related to the same object, if any. This panel only displays for Array alerts.

Deleting alerts

This procedure explains how to delete System and Array alerts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Alerts to open the Alert list view.

3. Select one or more alerts and click Delete.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 47

Configuring alert notifications

This procedure explains how to configure Unisphere for VMAX to notify you when a storage system generates an alert.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

Unisphere for VMAX employs the following throttling algorithms to prevent alert flurries from

straining the system.

Storage system Event Throttling When a storage system raises an alert flurry, the alert infrastructure packages all the alerts into a single notification.

Generic Throttling When the number of alerts generated by a non-storage sysevent exceeds a set threshold, the alert infrastructure will ignore subsequent alerts from the source.

Alert notifications for runtime checks will not be delivered. For more information on runtime

checks, refer to Runtime checks on page 83.

To enable alert notifications:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Notifications to open the Notifications page.

3. In the Types panel, click Enable next to the method you want to use to deliver the notifications. Possible methods are:

Syslog Forwards alert notifications to a remote syslog server.

Email Forwards alert notifications to an email address.

SNMP Forwards alert notifications to a remote SNMP listener.

4. Depending on the method you selected, do the following: Syslog:

Refer to Setting up the event daemon for monitoring in the Solutions Enabler Installation Guide for instructions.

Email:

a. Type the email address of the email server (Sender Email).

b. Type the IP address of the email server (IP Address/Host).

c. If the port of your email server differs from the default (25), type a new value (Server Port).

d. Type the email address to which notifications will be sent (Recipient Emaill).

e. Optional: To send a test message to the email server, click Test.

f. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

48 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

SNMP:

a. Optional: Click Add SNMP to add another SNMP server and click OK to confirm.

a. Optional: Click X to remove a SNMP server and click OK to confirm.

b. Type IP address of the SNMP server (IP Address/Host).

c. Type the port on the SNMP server (Server Port).

d. Optional: To send a test SNMP trap, click Test.

e. Click OK.

1. In the Alerts panel, do the following for each storage system from which you want to receive notifications:

a. Select the System Level and Performance Level severites in which you are interested.

b. Type the email addresses to which the notifications should be sent.

c. To clear your changes, click Discard.

d. Once satisfied, click Save.

To disable alert notifications:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Notifications to open the Notifications page.

3. Click Disable next to method you no longer want to use.

Alert descriptions

Unisphere for VMAX reports the following alerts:

Message: event daemon restarted; events may have been lost

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Warning

Notes: Generated when the event daemon is restarted after a crash.

Message: event daemon communications problem; events may have been lost

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Warning

Notes: Generated when the event daemon encounters a communication problem attempting to send events back to a client.

Message: Event Queue overflow; events may have been lost

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Warning

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 49

Notes: Generated when one of the internal Event Queues (within a client process or event daemon) overflows and events are discarded.

Message: Device state has changed to Online [Degraded, RG-Mbr-Rebuild-or-Copy

Category: Status

Object: Device number

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online = Degraded Warning

If Offline = Critical

If Not Present = Info

Notes:

'Not Present' means that the device could not be seen by Solutions Enabler.

'Online' means that the device service state is normal.

Online [Degraded]' means one or more of the device's mirrors are in a Not-Ready state.

'Offline' means that the device service state is failed.

Message: Array state has changed to Not Present | Unknown | Online | Online Degraded | Offline

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online Degraded = Warning

If Offline = Critical

If Not Present = Warning or Critical (depending on the situation)

If Unknown = Warning or Critical (depending on the situation)

Notes:

This event reflects the overall state of the array - including its Disks, Directors, Ports.

Not Present' means that the array couldn't be seen.

Online' means that the array is operational.

Online [Degraded]' means that:

One or more Ports are in an Offline or Write-Disabled state.

One or more Directors are in an Offline or Dead state.

Device events [1200] events are also enabled and one or more device is in a Not-Ready state.

Array sub-component events [1404] are also enabled and one or more are in a failed (Offline) state (Fans, Power Supplies, LCCs, MIBEs, Enclosures, etc.).

Chapter 3: Administration

50 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

'Unknown' means that there was a problem communicating with the array.

Message: Director state has changed to Not Present | Online | Online Degrade] | Offline | Failed

Category: Status

Object: Director identifier

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online Degraded = Warning

If Offline = Fatal

If Not Present = Info

Notes:

'Not Present' means the director was not seen by Unisphere for VMAX.

'Online' means that the director status is Online.

'Online [Degraded]' means that one or more of the director's ports were in an Offline or Write-Disabled state.

'Offline' means that the director status is Offline.

'Failed' means that the director status is Dead.

Message: Port state has changed to Not Present | Unknown | Online | Write Disabled | Offline

Category: Status

Object: Port identifier

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Offline = Critical

If Write Disabled = Warning

If Unknown = Warning

If Not Present = Info

Notes:

'Not Present' means the port was not seen.

'Online' means a port status of On.

'Offline' means a port status of Off.

'Write Disabled' means a port status of Write-Disabled.

Message: Disk state is now State (was: State).

Where State can be:

Online

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 51

Offline

Online Spare

Offline Spare

Online Degraded

Not Present

Category: Status

Object: Spindle ID (Disk identifier is supported for internal disks only)

For example:

Disk=123

or

Disk=16B:C2 (for Director 16B, DA Interface C, SCSI ID/Target 2) (internal disks only)

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online = Spare Normal

If Online = Degraded Warning

If Offline = Warning

If Offline = Spare Warning

If Not Present = Info

Notes:

'Not Present' means that the disk could not be seen by Unisphere for VMAX.

'Online' means that one or more of the disk's Hypers are in a Ready state.

'Online Spare' means that the disk is a Spare and one or more of the disks Hypers are in a Ready state.

'Online [Degraded]' means that the disk can only be reached via a single array DS controller. This disk state is for external disk only and supported with Enginuity 5876 and later.

'Offline' means that all of the disk's Hypers are in a Not-Ready state.

'Offline Spare' means that the disk is a Spare and all of the disk's Hypers are in a Not- Ready state.

Message: Device configuration has changed

Category: Status

Object: Volume number

Severity:Info

Notes:The following aspects of a device's configuration is considered by this event:

The base device configuration.

The meta configuration of the device (META_HEAD, META_MEMBER).

The bound-vs-bound state of a TDEV (bound vs unbound).

Chapter 3: Administration

52 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Whether a dynamic spare disk is invoked for the device.

The RDF mode of the device (of either leg for Concurrent SRDF).

The data pool bound to by a TDEV changes. This reflects a device being bound, unbound or re-bound to a different pool, and is also triggered when the name of the pool changes.

Message: Snap Savedev Pool state has changed to Not Present | Online | Online Degraded | Offline Message: SRDF/A DSE Pool state has changed to Not Present | Online | Online Degraded | Offline Message: Data Pool state has changed to Not Present | Online | Online Degraded | Offline

Category: Status

Object: Pool name

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online Degraded = Warning

If Offline = Critical

If Not Present = Info

Notes:

'Not Present' means that the pool no longer exists.

'Online' means that the pool is in an enabled.'

'Online [Degraded]' means that the pool is in a mixed state.

'Offline' means that the pool is in a disabled state.

Message: Snap Savedev Pool configuration has changed Message: SRDF/A DSE Pool configuration has changed Message: Data Pool configuration has changed

Category: Status

Object: Pool name

Severity:Info

Notes:A pool's configuration changes if:

The set of Enabled devices in the pool changes.

The total size (free + used) of all the Enabled devices in the pool changes.

Message: Snap Savedev Pool utilization is now percent Message: SRDF/A DSE Pool utilization is now percent Message: Data Pool utilization is now percent

This is a threshold event that reflects the amount (as a percentage) of used space within a pool.

Category: Status

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 53

Object: Pool name

Severity:Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is 100% Fatal

If value is >= 80% Critical

If value is >= 70% Major

If value is >= 65% Minor

If value is >= 60% Warning

Otherwise Nornal

Notes:

Used space size is determined by calls to SymPoolShow().

Events are only delivered at multiples of 5% for equal to 5%, 10%, 15%, , 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% and 100%.

Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Message: Symmetrix External Lock has been acquired Message: Symmetrix External Lock has been released

Indicates that one of the monitored Symmetrix External Locks (SELs) has been acquired or released.

Category: Status

Object: Symmetrix lock number

Severity:Info

Notes: At this time, only SEL #15 (used by Config Change) is monitored.

Indicates that one of the monitored Symmetrix External Locks (SELs) has been released.

Category: Status

Object: Symmetrix lock number

Severity:Info

Notes: At this time, only SEL #15 (used by Config Change) is monitored.

Message: Disk is no longer a Spare Message: Disk is now a Spare Message: Disk now an invoked Spare Message: Spare has been invoked against a failed disk Message: Spare is no longer invoked against a failed disk

Indicates that a disk has started or stopped acting as a spare.

Category: Status

Object: Disk identifier of the spare.

Severity:

Chapter 3: Administration

54 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

For 5x74 and newer arrays:

Normal

For older arrays:

If invoked = Warning

If no longer invoked = Normal

Notes: With Permanent Sparing on newer arrays, a failing disk and a spare will exchange roles. The failed disk will end up as a failed spare, and the spare will end up as a normal disk. The Disk is now an invoked Spare event will rarely if ever be delivered.

Message: Number of available disk spares is

This is a Threshold event that reflects the number of available Spare Disks on the storage array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is 0 Critical

If value is 1 Major

If value is 2 Warning

Otherwise Info

Notes: Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Message: Number of available disk spares is

This is a Threshold event that reflects the number of available Spare Disks on the storage array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

TBD

Notes: Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Messsage: Thin Device is now percent allocated.

This is a Threshold event that reflects the amount (as a percentage) of a Thin Device that is backed by space in a Data Pool.

Category: N/A

Object: Device number

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is 100% Fatal

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 55

If value is >= 80% Critical

If value is >= 70% Major

If value is >= 65% Minor

If value is >= 60% Warning

Otherwise Normal

Notes: Events are only delivered at multiples of 5% for equal to 5%, 10%, 15%, , 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% and 100%.

Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Message: Thin Device is now percent allocated

This is a Threshold event that reflects the amount (as a percentage) of a Thin Device that has been written to.

Category: N/A

Object: Device number

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is 100% Fatal

If value is >= 80% Critical

If value is >= 70% Major

If value is >= 65% Minor

If value is >= 60% Warning

Otherwise Normal

Notes: Events are only delivered at multiples of 5% for equal to 5%, 10%, 15%, , 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% and 100%.

Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Message: Port configuration has changed

This is a Threshold event that reflects the amount (as a percentage) of a Thin Device that has been written to.

Category: Status

Object: Port

Severity: Info

Notes: The only aspects of a port's configuration that are considered the following flags from the FA port flags:

The _VCM_ENABLED flag

The _VOL_SET_ADDR (VSA) flag

Chapter 3: Administration

56 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Message: Snap Savedev Pool device state has changed Message: SRDF/A DSE Pool device state has changed Message: Data Pool device state has changed

Indicates that the Deferred Service replacement threshold indicator for a storage array has changed. This change can be in either direction from not-exceeded to exceeded or from exceeded to not-exceeded.

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity:

If the replacement threshold has been exceeded = Warning

Otherwise = Info

Notes: This event will only be generated if Deferred Service is enabled for the storage array.

Message: The device configuration checksum has changed

Indicates that the configuration of a device has changed. The implementation makes use of a checksum maintained by the event daemonover a devices core configuration data. An event is generated when this checksum changes.

Category: Status

Object: Volume number

Severity: Info

Notes: N/A

Message: The migrate operation is complete: success Message: The migrate operation is complete: timed out Message: The migrate operation is complete: terminated Message: The migrate operation is complete: failed

Indicates that a VLUN migration has completed or failed.

Category: Status

Object: Migrate session name

Severity:

If success = Info

If terminated = Info

If timed out = Warning

If failed = Major

Notes: This is only generated for explicitly initiated VLUN migrations not movements being performed by FAST.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 57

Message: Thin Pool rebalancing operation is complete: success Message: Thin Pool rebalancing operation is complete: timed out Message: Thin Pool rebalancing operation is complete: terminated Message: Thin Pool rebalancing operation is complete: failed

Indicates that a Thin Pool rebalancing activity has completed.

Category: Status

Object: Data pool name

Severity:

If success = Info

If terminated = Info

If timed out = Warning

If failed = Major

Notes: This event is only supported for Symmetrix arrays running Enginuity 5875.

Message: Array configuration has changed.

Indicates that some change has been made to the configuration of the storage array.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes:This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: Device Masking database has changed

Indicates that some change have been made to the device masking database on the storage array.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes:This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: Access Control definitions have changed

Indicates that some change has been made to the Access Control [symacl] database on the storage array.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes:This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Chapter 3: Administration

58 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Message: Dynamic RDF operation performed on device

Indicates that a dynamic RDF operation has been performed on some device.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes:This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: Snap session created, activated or deleted

Indicates that a snap / clone session has been created, activated or deleted.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: BCV device pairing has changed

Indicates that the BCV pairing for some device has changed.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: HPUX device identifier has changed

Indicates that the HPUX device identifier for some device has been changed.

Category: Status

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: Device Name has changed

Indicates that the device name for some device has been changed.

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 59

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: Device Nice Name has changed

Indicates that the device name for some device has been changed.

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Message: OpenVMS device identifier has changed

Indicates that the OpenVMS device identifier for some device has been changed.

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the storage array.

Device Reservations data has changed

Indicates that the Device Reservation state for some device on the storage array has changed.

Category: Status

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This event requires checking for modifications to file(s) within SFS.

Message: Time since last SRDFA cycle switch exceeds minimum cycle time by seconds

This is a threshold event that indicates the amount (in seconds) by which an SRDFA group's cycle time exceeds the minimum that is configured.

Category: N/A

Object: SRDF group

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 5 Warning

Otherwise Info

Notes: This is determined by calling SymReplicationGet() and examining the time_since_last_ switch and duration_of_last_cycle quantities for Active, R1, non-MSC sessions.

Chapter 3: Administration

60 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The event value corresponds to the number of seconds that the larger of these two is beyond the configured min_cycle_time. If the time(s) are less than min_cycle_time (everything normal), the event value is 0. To protect against rounding problems, the test is actually against min_cycle_time+1. If the times are less than min_cycle_time+1, the event value will be 0. Therefore, possible event values are: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc.

For example, assuming a min_cycle_time of 10:

Time since last switch Event value

9 0

10 0

11 0

13 3

Message: SRDFA cycles now using percent of the cache available for it

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 90 Warning

Otherwise Info

Notes: This is a Threshold event that indicates the percentage of cache that is available for SRDFA use that is actually holding SRDFA Write Pending data.

This is determined by calling SymReplicationGet() and summing the active_cycle_size and inactive_cycle_size values for all active R1 or R2 sessions. The maximum available cache is computed in the usual manner:

if ((max_host_throttle == 0) and

(rdfa_max_cache_usage > 0) and

(rdfa_max_cache_usage < 100))

max_avail = (max_wr_pend_slots * rdfa_max_cache_usage) / 100

else

max_avail = max_wr_pend_slots

The event value is the sun of the active and inactive cycle sizes expressed as a percentage of this max avail cache size.

warning: Exercise caution when assigning significance to this event. The fact that an amount of cache is available for SRDFA to use (max_avail above) doesn't mean that it is guaranteed to be available for its use. There are other sources of Write Pending data that can use up this space as well - leaving it unavailable for SRDFA's use.

Message: Write Pending data is now using percent of the cache

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 61

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 90 Warning

Otherwise Info

Notes: This is a Threshold event that indicates the percentage of Symmetrix Cache that is holding Write Pending data.

Message: Component state has changed to Online | Online Degraded | Offline | Unknown

Category: N/A

Object:

Power=xxx

Fan=xxx

LCC=xxx

Enclosure=xxx

MM=xxx

IOMC=xxx

Dir=xxx

Severity:

If Online = Normal

If Online = Degraded Warning

If Offline = Major

If Unknown = Warning

Notes: Indicates a change in environmental status for one of the following types of sub- components within the VMAX array:

Fans [ Fan ]

Power Supplies [ Power ]

Link Control Cards [ LCC ]

Management Modules [ MM ]

IO Module Carriers [ IOMC ]

Directors (for environmental alerts)

[ Dir ]

Enclosures or Matrix Interface Board Enclosures

[ Enclosure ]

Online' means that the component is a Normal or Degraded state.

'Online [Degraded]' means that the component is in a degraded state.

'Offline' means that the component is in a Failed state.

The format of the specific component name ('xxx' above) may differ depending on the VMAX model. Some examples you might encounter are:

Chapter 3: Administration

62 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

SB-1/Fan-A Fan in System Bay

SB-1/ENC-1 Enclosure within System Bay

SB-1/ENC-1/Fan-A Fan in Enclosure-Slot within System Bay

SB-1/MIBE-L-2A MIBE within System Bay

SB-1/MIBE-L-2A/PS-A Power Supply in MIBE within System Bay

Message: DSE Spillover has been occurring on the RDF group for minutes Message: DSE Spillover is no longer occurring on the RDF group

Category: N/A

Object: The SRDF group

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 30 (minutes) Warning

Otherwise Normal

Notes: Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values, changes.

Message: Disk Group has changed Message: Disk Group has been deleted Message: Disk Group has been created

Category: N/A

Object: The Symmetrix disk group number (decimal)

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is only supported on VMAX arrays running Enginuity 5876 and HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Disk has spare coverage Message: Disk no longer has spare coverage

Category: N/A

Object: Disk identifier

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is only supported on VMAX arrays running Enginuity 5876 and HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: The spare capacity percentage for diskgroup on engine %d has changed

Category: N/A

Object: Symmetrix Disk Group number (decimal)

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is only supported on VMAX arrays running Enginuity 5876 and HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 63

Message: Cache Partitioning configuration has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Dynamic Mapping configuration for a device has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Meta configuration for a device has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Initiator Group has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Storage Group has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Masking view has changed

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Feature registration DB has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the Feature Registration DataBase on the VMAX array.

Chapter 3: Administration

64 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: FAST tiers have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the FAST (Fully Automated Storage Tiering) Tiers on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: FAST policies have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the FAST (Fully Automated Storage Tiering) Policies on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: FAST associations have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the FAST (Fully Automated Storage Tiering) Associations on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Optimizer/FAST time windows have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the FAST (Fully Automated Storage Tiering) time windows on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Optimizer/FAST control parameters have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the FAST (Fully Automated Storage Tiering) control parameters on the VMAX array.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 65

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array.

Message: Storage group configuration has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to a storage group on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Initiator group configuration has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to an initiator group on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Port group configuration has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to a port group on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Masking view configuration has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to a masking view configuration on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Storage group scope has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to a storage group scope on the VMAX array.

Chapter 3: Administration

66 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Initiator group scope has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to an initiator group scope on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Masking view scope has changed

Indicates that a change has been made to a masking view scope on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived from one of the QuickConfig indication maintained on the VMAX array. This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: User Authorization rules have changed

Indicates that a change has been made to the User Authorization [symauth] database on the VMAX array.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is determined by checking for modifications to the User Authorization file stored in SFS.

Message: Audit log is at percent of capacity (before wrapping)

This is a threshold event that tracks as a percentage the amount of data in an array Audit Log - how close the log is to its wrapping point where existing entries begin to be over-written.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 80% Warning

Otherwise Normal

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 67

Notes: What is actually reported is the position of the write pointer within the Audit Log as a percentage: 0% for the beginning, 100% for the end.

This event is intended to be used as an indication that a backup of the Audit Log is needed - if appropriate.

Message: << The actual message from the Audit Record >>

Indicates that a security-related record was written to the array Audit Log.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is delivered when audit records with an Audit Class of SECURITY are detected in the Audit Log.

The audit message is a free-form string that may span multiple lines (containing multiple new line characters).

Message: << The actual message from the Audit Record >>

Indicates that a Security alert was written to the array Audit Log.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes:

This event is delivered when audit records with an Audit Class of SECURITY are detected in

the Audit Log.

Access Control failures (host based access control, symacl).

User Authorization failures (user based access control, symauth).

SymmWin / SSC Logon failures.

SymmWin Logins.

iSCSI authorization failures.

The audit message is a free-form string that may span multiple lines (containing multiple

new line characters).

Message: << The actual message from the Audit Record >>

Indicates some (any) record written to the array Audit Log.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: The audit message is a free-form string that may span multiple lines (containing multiple new line characters).

Chapter 3: Administration

68 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Message: Optimizer Swap activity (from Audit Log)

Indicates some Optimizer Swap activity.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: Optimizer Move activity (from Audit Log)

Indicates some Optimizer Move activity.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: Optimizer configuration change (from Audit Log)

Indicates some Optimizer configuration change.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: FAST Controller Swap activity (from Audit Log)

Indicates some FAST Controller activity.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: FAST Controller Move activity (from Audit Log)

Indicates some FAST Controller Move activity.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: FAST Controller configuration change (from Audit Log)

Indicates some FAST Controller configuration change.

Category: Optimizer

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 69

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: Optimizer Rollback activity (from Audit Log)

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: This is derived by detecting a record written by the Optimizer to the array Audit Log.

Message: User approval is required for a Config Change plan generated by the Optimizer/FAST Controller

Indicates that user approval of the a swap state is required and user approval is required.

Category: N/A

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: N/A

Message: The FAST (DP or VP) controller has switched to state: (was: )

Where and can be one of the following possible values:

Disabled

Enabled

Disable in progress

Enable in progress

Disable with error

Degraded

Indicates that the FAST state has changed from a previous state to the current state.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Notes: N/A

Message: The Optimizer has switched to a different mode

Indicates that the Optimizer status state has changed.

Category: Optimizer

Object: N/A

Severity: Info

Chapter 3: Administration

70 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Notes: N/A

Message: The combined allocation in pools has changed

This event checks for allocated capacity change of all associated pools under the same FAST VP policy. And as such, if FAST VP policy is accidentally used, this event will never be generated.

Category: Optimizer

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes: N/A

Message: FAST Tier ( ) is performing as expected (NORMAL). Message: FAST Tier ( ) is performing worse than expected (LOW).

Category: Optimizer

Object:

Severity: Info

Notes: This event is only supported with Enginuity 5876 Q42012 SR and above.

Message: The allocation for SRP has changed to %u percent

Category: Optimizer

Object:

Severity: Determined by Threshold values. Unless threshold values are supplied with the registration, the following defaults are used to derive an event severity:

If value is >= 100% Fatal

If value is >= 80% Critical

If value is >= 70% Major

If value is >= 65% Minor

If value is >= 60% Warning

Otherwise Normal

Notes:

Events are only delivered at multiples of 5% for equal to 5%, 10%, 15%, , 75%,

80%, 85%, 90%, 95% and 100%.

Threshold events are only delivered when the severity, as determined by threshold values,

changes.

This event is only supported with HYPERMAX OS 5977.

Message: Group has changed

Indicates that the composition of a device group (DG) or composite group (CG) has changed.

Category: N/A

Entity: Not set -- set to NULL.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 71

Object: DG or CG

Severity: Info

Notes:

The Entity name and type (normally a Symmetrix ID) are not provided for this event. When

registering to receive the event, there is no need to supply an ID (symid=000194900123) - if one is supplied, it will be ignored.

If GNS is not enabled, this event indicates that a group definition in the Solutions Enabler

DB file on this host has changed.

If GNS is enabled, this event indicates that a global group definition stored within GNS (on

storage arrays) has changed.

Alert policies

Managing alert policies

This procedure explains how to enable/disable the policies for which Unisphere for VMAX monitors and reports alerts.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

To receive alert notifications, you must first configure the alert notifications feature.

For alert (event) descriptions, refer to the Solutions Enabler Installation Guide.

To enable/disable alert policies:

1. From the System Selecyetor, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Alert Policies to open the Alert Policies list view.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you are enabling or disabling an alert policy:

Enabling:

a. Select one or more alert policies, and click Enable.

b. To receive a notification when a storage system reports an alert, click Notify to open the Define Notification dialog box.

c. Select one or more notification types.

d. Click OK to close the Define Notification dialog box.

Disabling:

Select one or more alert policies, and click Disable.

Chapter 3: Administration

72 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing alert policies

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Alert Policies to open the Alert Policies list view.

Use the Alerts Policies list view to display and manage alert policies.

The following properties display:

Symmetrix ID Storage system on which the policy is defined (for Array type policies) and

an asterisk (*) for SMAS type policies.

Type Type of alert policy. Possible values are:

Array for array-based alerts.

SMAS for application-based alerts.

File for eNAS-based alerts.

Policy Name Name of the policy. For alert (event) descriptions, refer to the Solutions

Enabler Installation Guide.

State Whether the policy is Enabled or Disabled.

Notification Icon indicating the method to use when delivering the alert notification (e-

mail, SNMP, or Sys Log). A blank indicates that Unisphere is not configured to deliver an alert notification for the corresponding policy.

The following controls are available:

Enable See Alert policies on the previous page.

Disable See Alert policies on the previous page.

Notify See Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 73

Pool threshold alerts

Managing pool threshold alerts

Certain alerts are associated with a numerical value. This value is compared with a set of threshold values, which determine whether the alert is delivered and, if so, with what severity. This procedure explains how to manage the alert threshold feature.

For information on managing performance thresholds, refer to:

Performance Thresholds and Alerts on page 623

Editing a performance threshold and alert on page 624

Deleting performance thresholds and alerts on page 624

Before you begin:

Pool utilization thresholds are enabled by default on every VMAX Family system.

To receive utilization threshold alerts, you must enable alerts on the storage system.

To receive alert notifications, you must first configure the alert notifications feature.

To manage pool alert thresholds:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Symmetrix Threshold Alerts to open the Symmetrix Threshold Alerts list view.

Chapter 3: Administration

74 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

3. Do the following, depending on whether you are creating, editing, or deleting thresholds:

Creating:

a. Click Create to open the Create Threshold Policies dialog box.

b. Select the storage system on which to create the threshold.

c. Select the Category of threshold to assign. Possible values are:

DSE Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as

percentage) within a DSE pool. This category only applies to Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

DSE Spill Duration Threshold event that reflects how long (in minutes) an

SRDF spillover has been occurring. This category only applies to Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

Snap Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as

percentage) within a snap pool. This category only applies to Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

Thin Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as

percentage) within a virtual pool.

FAST VP Policy Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as

percentage) of all the pools in all the tiers in a FAST VP policy. This category only applies to Enginuity 5875 - 5876.

Storage Resource Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated

capacity (as percentage) within an SRP. This category only applies to storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

d. Select the pools (Instances to enable) on which to create the threshold.

e. Specify a threshold value (percentage of utilization) for each severity level: Warning, Critical, and Fatal.

f. Click OK to close the Create Threshold Policy dialog box.

Editing:

a. Select a threshold and click Edit to open the Edit Threshold Policy dialog box.

b. Specify a new threshold value (percentage of utilization) for any number of the severity levels: Warning, Critical, and Fatal.

c. Enable (select) or disable (clear) alerts for the threshold.

d. Click OK to close the Edit Threshold Policy dialog box.

Deleting:

Select one or more thresholds and click Delete.

Viewing pool threshold alerts  

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Symmetrix Threshold Alerts to open the Symmetrix Threshold Alerts list view.

Use the Symmetrix Threshold Alerts list view to display and manage pool threshold alerts.

The following properties display:

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 75

Symmetrix ID Storage system on which the threshold is defined.

Category Category on which the threshold is defined. Possible values are:

DSE Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as percentage) within a DSE pool.

DSE Spill Duration Threshold event that reflects how long (in minutes) an SRDF spillover has been occurring.

Snap Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as percentage) within a snap pool.

Thin Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as percentage) within a virtual pool.

FAST VP Policy Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as percentage) of all the pools in all the tiers in a FAST VP policy.

Symmetrix Resource Pool Utilization Threshold event that reflects the allocated capacity (as percentage) within an SRP. This category only applies to storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Instance Pool on which the threshold is defined. An asterisk (*) indicates that the default

pool type was used.

State Whether alert thresholds are enabled or disabled for the pool.

Notification Whether the alert notification option is enabled or disabled for the alert.

Warning Percentage of utilization at which point a warning alert will be issued.

Critical Percentage of utilization at which point a critical alert will be issued.

Fatal Percentage of utilization at which point a fatal alert will be issued.

Custom Whether the policy has been customized.

The following controls are available:

Create See Pool threshold alerts on page 74.

Edit See Pool threshold alerts on page 74.

Notify See Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

Delete See Pool threshold alerts on page 74.

Performance thresholds and alerts

Creating a performance threshold and alert

You can use the default system values for thresholds and alerts, or create your own. When you set threshold values, you can optionally view them when you create charts for performance metrics in the Root Cause Analysis view.

Chapter 3: Administration

76 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To create a threshold:

1. Select Performance > Settings > Performance Thresholds and Alerts to open the Performance Thresholds and Alerts list.

2. Click Create to open the Create Performance Thresholds and Alert dialog box.

3. Select the Symmetrix ID, Category, Instance, and Metric.

For some categories, when selected, the Instance field defaults to All.

If there is a default value for the Metric, it automatically displays in the First Threshold and Second Threshold fields.

4. Add a value for the First Threshold, Second Threshold, or both.

5. Threshold creation only: Click OK.

To add an alert:

1. Click Enable Alert.

2. Select the severity for the first threshold, the second threshold, or both. The available values are Information, Warning, and Critical.

3. Set the number of occurrences in the data samples which must happen before the alert is triggered. For example, if the threshold is breached 3 times out of 5 samples, an alert is initiated.

4. Optional: Select any additional configuration options. For some group categories, you can choose to enable for the alert for the individual components of the group, for example, when the Disk Group category is selected, you have the option to enable the alert for the disk.

5. Click OK.

Editing a performance threshold and alert

When you edit a threshold and alert setting, a symbol displays in the Custom column of the alerts list to indicate that the value has changed from the default.

To edit performance thresholds and alerts

1. Select Performance > Settings > Performance Thresholds and Alerts to open the Performance Thresholds and Alerts list.

2. Navigate to the threshold or alert to be edited by selecting the appropriate category in the Category section and expanding the appropriate metric in the Metric column.

3. Select the item from the table and click Edit to open the Edit Performance Threshold and Alert dialog box.

4. Edit the threshold and alert settings, as appropriate.

For more information about threshold and alert settings, see See "Performance Thresholds and Alerts" on page 623

5. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 77

Deleting performance thresholds and alerts

Before you begin:

You can delete only custom values. You cannot delete default thresholds.

To delete a performance threshold and alert:

1. Select Performance > Settings > Performance Thresholds and Alerts to open the Performance Thresholds and Alerts list.

2. Navigate to the threshold or alert to be edited by selecting the appropriate category in the Category section and expanding the appropriate metric in the Metric column.

3. Select one or more rows and click Delete.

A confirmation message displays.

4. In the Delete Threshold and Alert confirmation dialog box, click Delete.

Viewing thresholds and alerts

To view thresholds and alerts:

1. Select Performance > Settings > Performance Thresholds and Alerts to open the Performance Thresholds and Alerts list.

2. Select the storage system.

3. In the Category section, select the category for which you want to view the configured thresholds and alerts.

The thresholds and alerts configured for that category are displayed, according to metric. By default, the KPI tab displays. To view all metrics, click All.

Any metrics that include a custom threshold or alert are highlighted with a tick mark in the Custom column.

The some of the following properties display:

Metric The storage system identifier.

KPI Indicates (with a tick mark) if the metric is a KPI.

Custom Indicates (with a tick mark) whether a custom threshold or alert has been set.

First Threshold The user-defined first threshold.

Second Threshold The user-defined second threshold.

The following controls are available:

Create See Performance Thresholds and Alerts on page 623.

Edit See Editing a performance threshold and alert on page 624.

Delete See Deleting performance thresholds and alerts on page 624.

Notifications See Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

Chapter 3: Administration

78 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Configuring email notification

You can configure email addresses to which notifications, alerts, and reports are sent. You can configure a single email address for all notification instances, or you can use different email addresses for different notifications on different storage systems.

To set up email notification:

1. Click Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Notifications. The Notifications window is displayed.

2. In the Email section, click Enable. The Configure Email window is displayed.

3. In the From section specify the following details:

Sender Email

IP Address/Host

Server Port

4. In the Recipient Email field of the To section, specify the address you want to enable for all email notifications.

5. Click OK.

To add an email address and apply it to all notification instances:

1. Click Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Notifications. The Notifications window is displayed.

2. In the Email section, click Enable. The Configure Email window is displayed.

3. In the Recipient Email field of the To section, specify the address you want to enable for all email notifications.

If you configure a new email address in this way, any previously configured addresses are overwritten.

4. Click OK.

To configure email addresses for individual notifications:

1. Click Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Notifications. The Notifications window is displayed.

2. Click the Edit icon for the storage system for which you want to edit the email notification settings. The three individual email fields become editable.

3. Configure the email addresses for individual notifications, as appropriate.

4. Optional: Configure the notification levels by clicking the appropriate icons in the System Level and Performance Level columns.

5. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 79

Compliance alert policies

Creating compliance alerts policies

This procedure explains how to configure Unisphere for VMAX to alert you when the performance of a storage group, relative to its service level target, changes. Once configured, Unisphere for VMAX will assess the performance of the storage every 30 minutes, and deliver the appropriate alert level.

When assessing the performance for a storage group, Workload Planner calculates its weighted response time for the past 4 hours and for the past 2 weeks, and then compares the two values to the maximum response time associated with its given service level. If both calculated values fall within (under) the service level defined response time band, the compliance state is STABLE. If one of them is in compliance and the other is out of compliance, then the compliance state is MARGINAL. If both are out of compliance, then the compliance state is CRITICAL.

The following table details the state changes that will generate an alert and the alert level.

State change Alert generated Alert level

ANY STATE > NONE No  

NONE > STABLE No  

NONE > MARGINAL Yes Warning

NONE > CRITICAL Yes Critical

STABLE > MARGINAL Yes Warning

STABLE > CRITICAL Yes Critical

STABLE > STABLE No  

MARGINAL > STABLE Yes Info

MARGINAL > CRITICAL Yes Critical

MARGINAL > MARGINAL No  

CRITICAL > STABLE Yes Info

CRITICAL > MARGINAL Yes Warning

CRITICAL > CRITICAL Yes Critical

Table 1: Service level compliance rules

When a storage group configured for compliance alerts is deleted or renamed, the compliance alerts will need to be deleted manually. For instructions, refer to Deleting compliance alerts policies.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher and registered for

performance stats collection.

The storage group must:

Chapter 3: Administration

80 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Be either a child or standalone. Parent storage groups are not supported.

Be associated with a service level other than optimized.

Contain volumes other than gatekeepers

Be in a masking view

Not have a policy currently associated with it

To create service level compliance alert policies:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Compliance Alert Policies to open the Compliance Alert Policies list view.

3. Click Create to open the Create Compliance Alert Policy dialog box.

4. Select the storage system on which the storage groups are located.

5. Select one or more storage groups and click Add.

6. Optional: By default, service level compliance policies are configured to generate alerts for all service level compliance states. To change this default behavior, clear any of the states for which you do not want generate alerts:

Critical Storage group performing well below service level targets.

Marginal Storage group performing below service level target.

Stable Storage group performing within the service level target.

7. Click OK.

Editing compliance alerts policies

This procedure explains how to edit service level compliance alert policies.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To edit compliance alert policies:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Compliance Alert Policies to open the Compliance Alert Policies list view.

3. Select the policy, and then select (enable) or clear (disable) any of the Compliance States. Unisphere for VMAX only generates alerts for enabled compliance states.

4. Click Apply.

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 81

Deleting compliance alerts policies

This procedure explains how to delete service level compliance alert policies.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To delete compliance alert policies:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Compliance Alert Policies to open the Compliance Alert Policies list view.

3. Select one or more policies and click Delete.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Viewing compliance alerts policies

This procedure explain how to view compliance alert polices set on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Compliance Alert Policies to open the Compliance Alert Policies list view.

The following properties display:

Symmetrix ID Storage system on which the policy is defined.

Storage Group Storage group on which the policy is defined.

Compliance State Enabled compliance states:

Critical Storage group performing well below service level targets.

Marginal Storage group performing below service level target.

Stable Storage group performing within the service level target.

Notification Method to use when delivering the alert notification (e-mail, SNMP, or Sys

Log). A blank indicates that Unisphere is not configured to deliver an alert notification for the corresponding policy.

The following controls are available:

Create Compliance alert policies

Notify Configuring compliance alert notifications

Delete Deleting compliance alerts policies

Apply Applies policy changes.

Cancel Cancels policy changes.

Chapter 3: Administration

82 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Configuring compliance alert notifications

This procedure explains how to configure Unisphere for VMAX to notify you when a storage group generates a compliance alert.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The storage system must be configured to deliver alert notifications, as described in

Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

To configure compliance alert notifications:

1. From the System Selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Alert Settings > Compliance Alert Policies to open the Compliance Alert Policies list view.

3. Select one or more policies and click Notify to open the Define Notification dialog box.

4. Select (enable) the method you want to use to deliver the notifications. Possible methods are:

The storage system must already be configured to deliver alerts in the desired method, as described in Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

Enable Email Forwards alert notifications to an email address.

Enable SNMP Forwards alert notifications to a remote SNMP listener.

Enable Syslog Forwards alert notifications to a remote syslog server.

5. Click OK.

Runtime checks Unisphere for VMAX performs the following runtime checks. If a check returns a result outside the expected range, Unisphere for VMAX will raise the appropriate alert.

Checks are run on 10 minute intervals and alerts are raised on 24 hour intervals from the time the server was last started. Note that these time intervals apply to discover operations, too. That is, performing a discover operation will not force the delivery of these alerts.

Runtime check alerts will not be sent in alert notifications. For more information on alert notifications, refer to Configuring alert notifications on page 48.

Runtime alerts are not storage system-specific and therefore cannot be acknowledged or deleted.

Runtime check Number of volumes

Threshold Alert

Total memory on the 0 - 12 GB System memory <# GB> is below the

Chapter 3: Administration

Alert settings 83

Runtime check Number of volumes

Threshold Alert

Unisphere server 64,000 minimum requirement of <# GB>

64,000 - 128,000

16 GB

128,000 - 256,000

20 GB

Free disk space on the Unisphere installed directory

0 - 64,000

100 GB Free disk space <# GB> is below the minimum requirement of <# GB>

64,000 - 128,000

140 GB

128,000 - 256,000

180 GB

Number of managed storage systems

0 - 64,000

10 Number of managed arrays <#> is over the maximum supported number of #

64,000 - 128,000

20

128,000 - 256,000

20

Number of managed volumes

256,000 Number of managed volumes <#> is over the maximum supported number of <#>.

Note that Solutions Enabler may indicate a slightly different number of volumes than indicated in this alert.

Number of gatekeepers

6 Number of gatekeepers <#> on Symmetrix (SymmID) is below the minimum requirement of 6.

Chapter 3: Administration

84 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Security

Understanding user authorization User authorization is a tool for restricting the management operations users can perform on a storage system or with the Database Storage Analyzer application. By default, user authorization is enabled for Unisphere users, regardless of whether it is enabled on the Symmetrix system.

When configuring user authorization, an Administrator or SecurityAdmin maps individual users or groups of users to specific roles on storage systems or Database Storage Analyzer, which determine the operations the users can perform. These user-to-role-to-storage system/Database Storage Analyzer mappings (known as authorization rules) are maintained in the symauth users list file, which is located on either a host or storage system, depending on the storage operating environment.

If there is one or more users listed in the symauth file, users not listed in the file are unable to access or even see storage systems from the Unisphere console.

Roles

The following lists the available roles. Note that you can assign up to four of these roles per authorization rule. For a more detailed look at the permissions that go along with each role, see Roles and associated permissions on page 98.

None Provides no permissions.

Monitor Performs read-only (passive) operations on a storage system.

StorageAdmin Performs all management (active or control) operations on a Symmetrix

system and modifies GNS group definitions in addition to all Monitor operations.

Admininstrator Performs all operations on a storage system, including security operations,

in addition to all StorageAdmin and Monitor operations.

SecurityAdmin Performs security operations on a Symmetrix system, in addition to all

Monitor operations.

Auditor Grants the ability to view, but not modify, security settings for a Symmetrix system,

in addition to all Monitor operations.

DSA Admin Collect and analyze database activity with Database Storage Analyzer.

A user cannot change their own role so as to remove Administrator or SecurityAdmin privileges from themselves.

In addition to these user roles, Unisphere includes an administrative role, the Initial Setup User. This user, defined during installation, is a temporary role that provides administrator-like permissions for the purpose of adding local users and roles to Unisphere. For more information, see Operating as the initial setup user on page 22.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 85

Individual and group roles

Users gain access to a storage system or component either directly through a role assignment and/or indirectly through membership in a user group that has a role assignment. If a user has two different role assignments (one as an individual and one as a member of a group), the permissions assigned to the user will be combined. For example, if a user is assigned a Monitor role and a StorageAdmin role through a group, the user is granted Monitor and StorageAdmin rights.

User IDs

Users and user groups are mapped to their respective roles by IDs. These IDs consist of a three-part string in the form:

Type:Domain\Name

Where:

Type Specifies the type of security authority used to authenticate the user or group. Possible types are:

L Indicates a user or group authenticated by LDAP. In this case, Domain specifies the domain controller on the LDAP server. For example:

L:danube.com\Finance

Indicates that user group Finance logged in through the domain controller danube.com.

C Indicates a user or group authenticated by the Unisphere server. For example:

C:Boston\Legal

Indicates that user group Legal logged in through Unisphere sever Boston.

H Indicates a user or group authenticated by logging in to a local account on a Windows host. In this case, Domain specifies the hostname. For example:

H:jupiter\mason

Indicates that user mason logged in on host jupiter.

D Indicates a user or group authenticated by a Windows domain. In this case, Domain specifies the domain or realm name. For example:

D:sales\putman

Indicates user putman logged in through a Windows domain sales.

Name specifies the username relative to that authority. It cannot be longer than 32 characters and spaces are allowed if delimited with quotes. Usernames can be for individual users or user groups.

Within role definitions, IDs can be either fully qualified (as shown above), partially qualified, or unqualified. When the Domain portion of the ID string is an asterisk (*), the asterisk is treated as a wildcard, meaning any host or domain.

When configuring group access, the Domain portion of the ID must be fully qualified.

Chapter 3: Administration

86 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

For example:

D:ENG\jones Fully qualified path with a domain and username (for individual domain

users).

D:ENG.xyz.com\ExampleGroup Fully qualified domain name and group name (for

domain groups).

D:*\jones Partially qualified that matches username jones with any domain.

H:HOST\jones Fully qualified path with a hostname and username.

H:*\jones Partially qualified that matches username jones within any host.

jones Unqualified username that matches any jones in any domain on any host.

In the event that a user is matched by more than one mapping, the user authorization mechanism uses the more specific mapping. If an exact match (e.g., D:sales\putman) is found, that is used; if a partial match (for example, D:*\putman) is found, that is used; if an unqualified match (for example, putman) is found, that is used; otherwise, the user is assigned a role of None.

Viewing user sessions This procedure explains how to view active user sessions for a storage system.

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > User Sessions to open the User Sessions page.

The following properties display:

User Name Name of the individual or group.

Start Time Date and time that the user logged in to the console.

IP Address Address of the console.

Authentication

Login authentication

When you log in, Unisphere for VMAX checks the following locations for validation:

Windows The user has a Windows account on the server. (Log in to Unisphere with your

Windows Domain\Username and Password.)

LDAP-SSL The user account is stored on an LDAP-SSL server. (Log in to with your Unisphere

LDAP-SSL Username and Password.)

The Unisphere Administrator or SecurityAdmin must set the LDAP-SSL server location in the LDAP-SSL Configuration dialog box.

Local The user has a local Unisphere account. Local user accounts are stored locally on the

Unisphere server host. (Log in to Unisphere with your Username and Password.)

The Initial Setup User, Administrator, or SecurityAdmin must create a local Unisphere user account for each user.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 87

Configuring authentication authorities

This procedure explains how to configure Unisphere for VMAX to authenticate users.

Before you begin:

If configuring authentication to use LDAP, obtain the LDAP-SSL server bind distinguished name (DN) and password from your LDAP Administrator.

To configure authentication:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authentication to open the Authentication page.

3. Click Edit to open the Configure Authentication wizard.

4. Select the Authentication Authority to use during login. Possible values are:

Local Directory When enabled, users can log in as a user from the CST local directory.

LDAP-SSL When enabled, users can log in as a user from the configured LDAP directory.

Windows OS/AD When enabled, users can log in as a user from the Windows local host

and/or from the Active Directory domain. This option only applies to Windows installations.

5. If you selected the Windows OS/AD authority, as an option you can specify to limit authentication to members of a specific Windows OS/AD group. To do this, click Show Advanced, select the option, and type the Group Names, separated by commas.

6. Click Next.

7. If you are configuring LDAP-SSL, do the following:

a. Specify values for the following parameters and click Next.

Server (IP or Hostname) IP address or hostname of the LDAP server to use for

authentication. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 40 characters will wrap.

Port Port number of the LDAP service. Typically, this value is 389 for LDAP and 636

for LDAPS. Valid values range from 1 through 65,535.

Bind DN Distinguished name of the privileged account used to perform operations,

such as searching users and groups, on the LDAP directory. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 60 characters will wrap.

Bind Password Password of the privileged account. Only alphanumeric characters

are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

User Search Path Distinguished name of the node at which to begin user searches.

Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 40 characters will wrap.

User Object Class Object class identifying users in the LDAP hierarchy. Only

alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

User ID Attribute Attribute identifying the user login ID within the user object. Only

alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

Chapter 3: Administration

88 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Group Search Path Distinguished name of the node at which to begin group

searches. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 40 characters will wrap.

Group Object Class Object class identifying groups in the LDAP hierarchy. Only

alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

Group Name Attribute Attribute identifying the group name. Only alphanumeric

characters are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

Group Member Attribute Attribute indicating group membership for a user within

the group object. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Values longer than 15 characters will wrap.

b. Optional: To upload an SSL certificate, click Browse, locate the certificate, and click Open. To view the contents of the certificate, click View Certificate.

c. Optional: To limit authentication to only members of specific LDAP groups, click Show Advanced, select the option, and then type the Group Names, separated by commas.

d. Click Next.

8. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

9. Click Finish.

Viewing authentication authorities

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authentication to open the Authentication page.

Use the Authentication page to view and manage authentication settings.

The following properties display:

Authentication Authority States

Local Directory When enabled, users can log in as a user from the CST local directory.

Windows OS/AD When enabled, users can log in as a user from the Windows local host

and/or from the Active Directory domain. This property only displays for Windows installations.

LDAP-SSL When enabled, users can log in as a user from the configured LDAP directory.

LDAP Details (Only displays if LDAP is enabled.)

Server Hostname of IP address of the LDAP server used for authentication.

Port Port number of the LDAP service. Typically, this value is 389 for LDAP and 636 for

LDAPS.

Bind DN Distinguished name (DN) of the privileged account used to perform operations,

such as searching users and groups, on the LDAP directory.

User Search Path Distinguished name of the node at which to begin user searches.

User Object Class Object class identifying users in the LDAP hierarchy.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 89

User ID Attribute Attribute identifying the user login ID within the object.

Group Search Path Distinguished name of the node at which to begin group searches.

Group Object Class Object class identifying groups in the LDAP hierarchy.

Group Name Attribute Attribute identifying the group name.

Group Member Attribute Attribute indicating group membership for a user within the

group object.

Limit Authentication to Group Name of authenticated LDAP group.

The following control is available:

Edit See Configuring authentication authorities on page 88.

Authorization

Chapter 3: Administration

90 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Adding authorization rules

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or a SecurityAdmin.

To add authorization rules:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authorized Users & Groups to open the Authorized Users & Groups list view.

3. Click Add to open the Add Authorization Rule dialog box.

4. Optional: Select an authentication Authority. Possible values are:

Local Directory Specifies to authenticate the user against the Local Authority repository.

Windows AD Specifies to authenticate the user against the Active Directory domain.

LDAP-SSL Specifies to authenticate the user against an LDAP directory.

5. Do the following depending on the authority:

Local Directory:

Select the user Name.

Windows AD or LDAP-SSL

a. Specify whether the rule is for an individual User or for a user Group.

b. Optional: Type the name of the Domain used to authenticate the user/group. Possible values are based on the authentication authority:

Authority Domain name

Local directory

Windows OS

Unisphere server hostname

Windows AD Unisphere server domain

LDAP-SSL LDAP server domain

c. Type the Name of the user or group. User/group names can only contain alphanumeric characters.

6. For Database Storage Analyzer select None, Read Only, or Admin.By default, Database Storage Analyzer permissions are set to None.

7. On the Roles tab, select the object and up to four roles.

8. Click the Show only VMAX with hinting enabled checkbox to see the list of VMAXs with hinting enabled. The VMAX must be running HYPERMAX 5977 or higher.

9. Click the DSA Hinting role. This role is only enabled for DSA administrators.

10. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 91

Modifying authorization rules

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or a SecurityAdmin on all authorized Symmetrix systems.

To modify authorization rules:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authorized Users & Groups to open the Authorized Users & Groups list view.

3. Select a rule and click Modify to open the Modify Authorization Rule dialog box.

4. On the Roles tab, add or remove roles from any of the available objects, being sure to not exceed the four roles/object limit.

5. Click OK.

Removing authorization rules

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or a SecurityAdmin.

To remove authorization rules:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authorized Users & Groups to open the Authorized Users & Groups list view.

3. Select the rule and click Remove.

4. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Chapter 3: Administration

92 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing authorization rules

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Authorized Users & Groups to open the Authorized Users & Groups list view.

Use the Authorized Users & Groups list view to view and manage authorization rules.

The following properties display:

Name User or group name.

Authority Authentication authority. Possible values are:

Local Directory Directory of users and encrypted passwords stored in a CST .xml file (users only, no groups).

Windows OS Local Windows users and groups.

Windows AD Windows Active Directory users and groups that are accessed through the SMAS server's domain.

LDAP-SSL Users and groups on LDAP server that have been configured the Configure Authorization wizard.

Authentication Domain Domain name. Possible values are based on the authentication

authority:

Authority Domain name

Local directory

Windows OS

Unisphere server hostname

Windows AD Unisphere server domain

LDAP-SSL LDAP server domain

Virtualization domain Virtualization domain

Any authority Any

The following controls are available:

Add Authorization on page 90

Remove Removing authorization rules on the previous page

Modify Modifying authorization rules on the previous page

Local Users

Creating local users

This procedure explains how to create local users. Local users have accounts stored locally in the user database the Unisphere server host.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 93

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or SecurityAdmin on at least one Symmetrix system.

To create local users:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Click Create to open the Add Authorization Rule dialog box.

4. Type a User Name. User names are case-sensitive and can only contain alphanumeric characters.

5. Optional: Type a Description.

6. Type and confirm a user Password. Passwords cannot exceed 16 characters. Passwords can contain alphanumeric characters but not the following special characters: @ : ? ; " | < > [ ] + = , * \ /

7. For Database Storage Analyzer select None, Read Only, or Admin.By default, Database Storage Analyzer permissions are set to None.

8. Click the Roles tab, select the object and up to four roles.

9. Click the Show only VMAX with hinting enabled checkbox to see the list of VMAXs with hinting enabled. The VMAX must be running HYPERMAX 5977 or higher.

10. Click the DSA Hinting role. This role is only enabled for DSA administrators.

11. Click OK.

Editing local users

This procedure explains how to edit the roles associated with a user or group.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or

SecurityAdmin on all authorized Symmetrix systems.

Users cannot remove the SecurityAdmin role from themselves.

To create local users:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Select a user and click Edit to open the Properties dialog box.

4. Optional: Type a new Description.

5. On the Roles tab, add or remove roles from any of the available objects, being sure to not exceed the four roles/object limit.

6. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

94 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting local users

This procedure explains how to delete local users and all fully-qualified authorization rules (rules in the format (L:HostName\UserName).

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or

SecurityAdmin on all authorized Symmetrix systems.

Users cannot remove the SecurityAdmin role from themselves.

To delete a user:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Select the user and click Delete to open the Delete Local User dialog box.

4. Optional: By default, deleting local users removes their associated authorization rules from all objects, including storage systems and the Database Storage Analyzer database. To override this default behavior, select the Remove associated authorization rules option.

5. Click OK.

Changing local user passwords

This procedure explains how to change a local user passwords.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or

SecurityAdmin on at least one Symmetrix.

To change local directory user passwords:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Select a user and click View Details to open the user's Details view.

4. Click Change Password to open the Change Password dialog box.

5. Type the user's Current Password.

6. Type a New Password and Confirm New Password.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 95

Viewing local users

Before you begin

To perform this operation, you must be the Initial Setup User (set during installation), or Monitor on at least one Symmetrix system.

To view users with a local Unisphere account:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

The Local Users list view to allows you to view and manage local users.

The following properties display:

User Name User or group name.

Description Optional description.

The following controls are available:

Create Local Users on page 93

View Details Viewing local users details on the facing page

Delete Deleting local users on the previous page

Edit Editing local users on page 94

Chapter 3: Administration

96 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing local users details

This procedure explains how to view details on a local user:

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Select a user and click View Details to open its Details view.

The Details:Local User view allows you to view and manage a local user. It contains Properties and Related Object panels.

Properties panel:

The following properties display:

User Name User or group name.

Description Optional description defined during creation. To modify the description, type a

new description over the existing and click Apply.

The following controls are available:

Delete Deleting local users on page 95

Change Password Changing local user passwords on page 95

Apply Applies changes made to the Properties panel.

Cancel Cancels changes made to the Properties panel.

Related Objects panel:

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects associated with the user. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Authorization Rules - 2 will open a view listing the two authorization rules associated with the user.

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 97

Viewing local user authorization rules

This procedure explains how to view the authorization rules associated with local users.

1. Select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Security > Local Users to open the Local Users list view.

3. Select the user and click View Details to open its details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Authorization Rules to open the authorization rules view.

The following properties display:

Name User or group name.

Authority Authentication authority. Possible values are:

Local Directory Directory of users and encrypted passwords stored in a CST .xml file (users only, no groups).

Windows OS Local Windows users and groups.

Windows AD Windows Active Directory users and groups that are accessed through the SMAS server's domain.

LDAP-SSL Users and groups on LDAP server that have been configured the Configure Authorization wizard.

Authentication Domain Domain name. Possible values are based on the authentication

authority:

Authority Domain name

Local directory

Windows OS

Unisphere server hostname

Windows AD Unisphere server domain

LDAP-SSL LDAP server domain

Virtualization domain Virtualization domain

Any authority Any

The following controls are available:

Add Authorization on page 90

Remove Removing authorization rules on page 92

Edit Modifying authorization rules on page 92

Roles and associated permissions

The following table details the permissions that go along with each role in Unisphere for VMAX.

The Unisphere for VMAX Initial Setup User has all permissions on a storage system until an Administrator or SecurityAdmin is added to the storage system.

Chapter 3: Administration

98 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Permission s

Roles  

Administ rator

StorageA dmin

Moni tor

SecurityA dmin

Audi tor

No ne

Perf Moni tor

Datab ase Stora ge Analy zer

Admi n

Create/dele te user accounts

Yes No No Yes No No No No

Reset user password

Yes No No Yes No No No No

Create roles Yes Yes No Yes (self excluded)

No No No No

Change own password

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ye s

Yes Yes

Manage storage systems

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Discover storage systems

Yes No No Yes No No No No

Add/show license keys

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Set alerts and Optimizer monitoring options

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Release storage system locks

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Set Access Controls

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Set replication and

Yes Yes No No No No No No

Chapter 3: Administration

Security 99

Permission s

Roles  

Administ rator

StorageA dmin

Moni tor

SecurityA dmin

Audi tor

No ne

Perf Moni tor

Datab ase Stora ge Analy zer

Admi n

reservation preferences

Access performanc e data

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Start data traces

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Set performanc e thresholds/ alerts

Yes Yes No No No No Yes No

Create and manage performanc e dashboards

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Collect and analyze database activity with Database Storage Analyzer

No No No No No No No Yes

Chapter 3: Administration

100 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Link and launch

Creating link-and-launch client registrations This procedure explains how to register other applications with the SMAS server. Once registered, users of the registered applications can launch Unisphere for VMAX without logging in.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or SecurityAdmin.

ProSphere users planning on launching Unisphere for VMAX from their respective clients, must

have an Administrator or StorageAdmin role assigned to them within Unisphere for VMAX.

Link-and-launch is not supported with X.509 certificate-based user authentication.

To create link-and-launch client registrations:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Link and Launch to open the Link and Launch list view.

3. Click Create to open the Register Launch Client dialog box.

4. Type a unique Client ID. Client IDs can be up to 75 alphanumeric characters.

5. Type the Password associated with the client ID. Passwords can be up to 75 alphanumeric characters.

6. Retype the password to confirm it.

7. Click OK.

Editing link-and-launch client registrations This procedure explains how to change the password associated with a registered application.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or SecurityAdmin.

To edit link-and- launch client registrations:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Link and Launch to open the Link and Launch list view.

3. Select a registration, and click Edit to open the Edit Launch Client Registration dialog box.

4. Type the Current Password.

5. Type the New Password. Passwords can be up to 75 alphanumeric characters.

6. Retype the new password to confirm it.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Administration

Link and launch 101

Deleting link-and-launch client registrations This procedure explains how to delete an application registration from the SMAS server. Once deleted, users of the application will no longer be able to launch Unisphere for VMAX.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or SecurityAdmin.

To delete link-and-launch client registrations:

1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Link and Launch to open the Link and Launch list view.

3. Select a registration, and click Delete.

4. Click OK in the confirmation box.

Viewing link and launch client registrations 1. From the system selector, select All Symmetrix.

2. Select Home > Administration > Link and Launch to open the Link and Launch list view.

The Link and Launch list view allows you to view and manage link and launch client registrations.

The following property displays:

Client ID Unique client ID

The following controls are available:

Create Creating link-and-launch client registrations on the previous page

Edit Editing link-and-launch client registrations on the previous page

Delete Deleting link-and-launch client registrations above

Chapter 3: Administration

102 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Storage Management

This chapter contains the following:

VMAX provisioning 104

Storage groups 118

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 166

Volume management 209

Disk groups 246

Virtual Provisioning 252

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 278

External Storage 283

Understanding storage templates 297

Reservations 303

Understanding Optimizer 307

Chapter 4: Storage Management 103

CHAPTER 4

VMAX provisioning

Provisioning VMAX storage (HYPERMAX OS 5977 and higher) With the release of HYPERMAX OS 5977 and the next generation VMAX Family systems, Unisphere for VMAX introduces support for service level provisioning. Service level provisioning simplifies VMAX management by automating many of the tasks associated with provisioning storage.

Service level provisioning eliminates the need for storage administrators to manually assign physical resources to their applications. Instead, storage administrators specify the storage performance and capacity required for the application and let the system provision the workload appropriately.

By default, VMAX systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher are pre-configured with a single Storage Resource Pool (SRP) containing all the physical disks on the system organized into disk groups by technology, capacity, rotational speed, and RAID protection type. Unisphere for VMAX allows storage administrators to view all the SRPs configured on the system and the demand that storage groups are placing on them. For more information, refer to Managing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 118.

In addition, VMAX systems are also pre-configured with a number of Service Level and workloads, which storage administrators use to specify the performance objectives for the application they are provisioning.

When provisioning storage for an application, storage administrators assign the appropriate SRP, service level, and workload to the storage group containing the application's LUNs.

Unisphere for VMAX provides the following methods for provisioning VMAX storage:

Recommended: This method relies on wizards to step you through the provisioning process,

and is best suited for novice and advanced users who do not require a high level of customization (that is, the ability to create their own volumes, storage groups, etc.).

Advanced: This method, as its name implies, is for advanced users who want the ability to

control every aspect of the provisioning process.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

104 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

This section provides the high-level steps for each method, with links to the relevant help topics for more detail.

Regardless of the method you choose, once you have completed the process you will have a masking view, in which the volumes in the storage group are masked to the host initiators and mapped to the ports in the port group.

Before you begin:

The VMAX system must already be configured.

For instructions on provisioning VMAX storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, refer to

Provisioning VMAX storage (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 109

For instructions on provisioning DMX storage systems, refer to Masking volumes (page 361).

To provision VMAX storage:

Recommended Advanced

1. Create a host  1. Create a host

  Use the Create Host dialog box to group host initiators (HBAs).

Use the Create Host dialog to group host initiators (HBAs).

2. Provision storage for the new host 2. Create the volumes

Use the Provision Storage wizard, which will step you through the process of creating the storage group, port group, and masking view.

Create one or more volumes on the VMAX system.

    3. Create the storage group

Use the Create Storage Group dialog box to add the volumes you just created to a storage group, and associate the storage group with a storage resource pool, a service level, and a workload.

    4. Create a port group

      Group Fibre Channel and/or iSCSI front-end directors.

    5. Create a masking view

      Associate the host, storage group, and port group into a masking view.

Unisphere for VMAX Help: Storage management > VMAX provisioning > Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 105

Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) This procedure explains how to use the Provision Storage wizard to provision storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977. In addition, you can also use a subset of the steps to simply create a storage group, without actually provisioning it.

For instructions on provisioning storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, refer to Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876).

Before you begin:

The user must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

There are multiple ways to open the Provision Storage wizard. Depending on the method you use, some of steps listed below may not apply. For example, if you open the wizard from the Hosts view, the step on selecting a host will not apply. Or, if you open the wizard from the Reference Workload view, the steps on selecting the Service Level and Workload Type will not apply.

To use the Provisioning Storage wizard:

1. Select the storage system. 2. Open the Provision Storage to Host wizard by doing either of the following:

Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Provision Storage to Host under Common Tasks to open the Provision Storage wizard.

On the Storage Group Dashboard (Storage > Storage Group Dashboard), open one of the storage group list views (Total, Stable, Marginal, Critical, or No Service Level), and click Create SG in the corresponding view.

3. Type a Storage Group Name name. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and dashes (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive.

4. Select a Storage Resource Pool. To create the storage group outside of FAST control, select None. External storage resource pools are listed below the External heading.

5. Select the Service Level to set on the storage group. Service levels specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including average response time, workload type, and priority. This field defaults to None if you set the Storage Resource Pool to None. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

106 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

6. Select the Workload Type to assign it. Workload types are used to refine the service level (that is, narrow the latency range). Possible values are OLTP or DSS, where OLTP workload is focused on optimizing performance for small block I/O and DSS workload is focused on optimizing performance for large block I/O. The Workload Type can also specify whether to account for any overhead associated with replication (OLTP_Rep and DSS_Rep, where denotes replication). To provision the storage group using a previously created Reference Workload, select the Reference Workload, in which case, the Service Level will update to reflect parameter defined in the Reference Workload.

7. Type the number of Volumes and select the Capacity of each.

The maximum volume size supported on a VMAX3 system is 64 TB.

8. Optional: Hover the cursor on the service level and click edit ( ) to set any of the following

options: To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, select one of the following

Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

When using this option, Unisphere for VMAX will only use new volumes when creating the storage group; it will not use any existing volumes in the group.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default). Name Only All volumes will have the same name. Name and VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name and Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

To Allocate capacity for each volume you are adding to the storage group, select the option. You can only use the this option for newly created volumes, not existing volumes.

If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

9. Optional: To add a child storage group, do one of the following:

On all-flash storage systems, click Add Storage Group.

On all other storage systems click Add Service Level . 

Specify a Name, Service Level, Workload Type, Volumes and Capacity. Repeat this step for each additional child storage group. The maximum number of allowed child storage groups is 64.

10. Optional: To set host I/O limits for the storage groups, click Set Host I/O Limits to open the Host I/O Limits dialog box. For instructions setting the limits, refer to dialog's help page. When done, close the dialog box to return to the wizard.

11. To create a storage group, without actually provisioning it, click one of the following; otherwise, click Next and continue with the remaining steps in this procedure: Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs and Previewing. Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 107

12. Specify the host/host group to use by selecting an existing host/host group, or doing the following to create a new host/host group. When done, click Next. To create a new host, click Create Host to open the Create Host dialog box. For

instructions on creating a host, refer to the dialog's help page. To create a new host group, click Create Host Group to open the Create Host Group dialog

box. For instructions on creating a host, refer to the dialog's help page. 13. Select whether to use a New or an Existing port group, and then do the following depending on

your selection:

New: a. Optional: Edit the suggested Port Group Name by highlighting it and typing a new name

over it. Port group names must be unique from other port groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Port group names are case-insensitive.

b. Select the ports to use. To view host-invisible ports (unmasked and unmapped), select Include ports not visible to the host. If a Fibre or iSCSI host was not selected, select the appropriate filter to filter the port list by iSCSI virtual ports or FC ports based on the selected host. If an empty host was selected, the radio button Fibre is selected by default. The Dir-Port table is filtered to only show either FC or iSCSI depending on the radio button selection.

The following properties display:

Dir-Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Identifier Port identifier.

Initiators Logged In Number of initiators logged into the fabric.

PGs Number of port groups where the port is a member.

Mappings Number of mappings.

% Busy Percentage of time that the port is busy.

c. Click Next.

Existing: Select the port group and click Next. 14. Optional: Edit the suggested name for the Masking View by highlighting it and typing a new

name over it. Verify the rest of your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

15. Optional: To receive alerts when the performance of the storage group changes, relative to its service level target, select Enable Compliance Alerts. For more information on service level compliance alerts, refer toCompliance alert policies.

16. Optional: Determine if the storage system can handle the updated service level: a. Click Run Suitability Check. The Suitability Check dialog box opens, indicating the

suitability of the change. For information on interpreting the results, refer to the dialog's help page. This option is only available under certain circumstances. For more information, refer to Suitability Check restrictions.

b. Click OK to close the message. c. If your updates are found to be unsuitable, modify the settings and run the check again

until the suitability check passes. 17. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs and Previewing.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

108 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Provisioning VMAX storage (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) Provisioning storage refers to the process by which you make storage available to hosts.

Unisphere for VMAX provides the following methods for provisioning VMAX storage:

Recommended: This method relies on wizards to step you through the provisioning process,

and is best suited for novice and advanced users who do not require a high level of customization (that is, the ability to create their own volumes, storage groups, etc.).

Advanced: This method, as its name implies, is for advanced users who want the ability to

control every aspect of the provisioning process.

This section provides the high-level steps for each method, with links to the relevant help topics for more detail.

Regardless of the method you choose, once you have completed the process you will have a masking view, in which the volumes in the storage group are masked to the host initiators and mapped to the ports in the port group.

Before you begin:

The VMAX system must already be configured.

For instructions on provisioning DMX storage systems, refer to Masking volumes (page 361).

To provision VMAX storage:

Recommended Advanced

1. Create a host  1. Create a host

  Use the Create Host wizard to group host initiators (HBAs).

  Use the Create Host wizard to group host initiators (HBAs)

2. Provision storage for the new host 2. Create the volumes

Use the Provision Storage wizard, which will step you through the process of creating the storage group, port group, and masking view, and to optionally associate the storage

Create one or more volumes on the VMAX system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 109

group with a FAST policy.  

    3. Create a storage group

Use the Create Storage Group wizard to create a storage group.

If you want to add the volumes you created in step 2, be sure to set the wizard's Storage Group Type to Empty, and then complete Adding volumes to storage groups.

    4. Create a port group

      Group Fibre Channel and/or iSCSI front-end directors.

    5. Create a masking view

      Associate the host, storage group, and port group into a masking view.

    6. Associate the storage group with a FAST policy

Optional: Associate the storage you created in step 3 with an existing FAST policy and assign a priority value for the association.

Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) This procedure explains how use the Provision Storage wizard to provision storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876. The wizard steps you through the provisioning process, and is best suited for novice and advanced users who do not require a high level of customization (that is, the ability to create their own volumes, storage groups, etc.). In addition, you can also use a subset of the steps to simply create a storage group, without actually provisioning it.

For users who want the ability to control every aspect of the provisioning process, refer to the Advanced procedure in Provisioning VMAX storage (Enginuity 5874 - 5876).

For instructions on provisioning storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977, refer to Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 106.

Before you begin:

The storage system must already be configured and you must already have a host. For

instructions on creating a host, refer to See Creating hosts on page 314..

For instructions on provisioning storage systems running Enginuity 5671 - 5774, refer to

Masking volumes (page 361).

Note the following recommendations:

Port groups should contain four or more ports.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

110 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Each port in a port group should be on a different director.

There are multiple ways to open the Provisioning Storage wizard. Depending on the method

you use, some of the following steps may not apply. For example, selecting a storage group in the Storage Groups list view and clicking Provision Storage to Host will open the wizard on the Select Host/Host Group page because you are starting out with a storage group.

To use the Provisioning Storage wizard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Provision Storage to Host under Common Tasks to open the Provision Storage wizard.

3. Type a Storage Group Name. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and dashes (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive

4. Select the Storage Group Type.

5. Do the following, depending on the storage group type: Standard Storage Group:

a. Select the Volume Type to add to the storage group and click Next.

b. Do the following, depending on the volume type: Virtual Volumes:

1. Select the Emulation type for the volumes to add to the storage group.

2. Optional: Select the Thin Pool containing the volumes to add to the storage group.

3. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Size.

4. Optional: Hover the cursor over the volumes and click edit to set any number of the following options. Once done, click OK and continue with the remaining steps in this procedure.

To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, select one of

the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when creating storage groups with new volumes. Note that when creating storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name and VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique storage volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 111

Name and Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

To set an SSID for the volumes, type a value or click Select to open a

dialog box from which you can select an SSID.

To only use BCVs in the storage group, select Use BCV volumes.

To Allocate capacity for each volume you are adding to the storage

group, select the option.

If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

Regular Volumes:

1. Select the Disk Technology on which the storage group will reside.

2. Select the Emulation type for the volumes to add to the storage group.

3. Select the Protection level for the volumes to add to the storage group.

4. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Size. To create an empty storage group, leave both of these fields empty.

5. Optional: Click Show Advanced and set any number of the following options:

To only use BCVs in the storage group, select Use BCV volumes.

To only use volumes from a specific disk group, select the Disk Group.

To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, select one of

the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when creating storage groups with new volumes. Note that when creating storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique storage volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

112 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Template:

1. Select the name of the template.

2. Type the Number of Volumes to add to the storage group.

3. Optional: To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, click Show Advanced and select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when creating storage groups with new volumes. Note that when creating storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a

unique storage volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name

with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

  Cascaded Storage Group:

a. Click Next.

b. Select one or more child storage groups. Empty Storage Group:

Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run

the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

1. If you want to create a storage group, without actually provisioning it, click one of the following; otherwise, click Next and continue with the remaining steps in this procedure:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 113

2. Specify the host/host group to use by selecting an existing host/host group, or doing the following to create a new host/host group.

To create a new host, click Create Host to open the Create Host dialog box. For

instructions on creating a host, refer to the dialog's help page.

To create a new host group, click Create Host Group to open the Create Host Group dialog

box. For instructions on creating a host, refer to the dialog's help page.

3. Click Next.

4. Select whether to use a New or an Existing port group, and then do the following depending on your selection. When done, click Next.

New:

a. Optional: Edit the suggested port group Name by highlighting it and typing a new name over it. Port group names must be unique from other port groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Port group names are case-insensitive.

b. Select the ports to use. To view host-invisible ports (unmasked and unmapped), select Include ports not visible to the host.

The following properties display:

Dir-Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Initiators Logged In Number of initiators logged into the fabric.

# Port Groups Number of port groups where the port is a member.

# Mappings Number of volumes mapped to the port.

c. Click Next.

Existing: Select the port group and click Next.

5. Optional: Edit the suggested name for the Masking View by highlighting it and typing a new name over it. Verify the rest of your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Reference workloads

Creating Reference Workloads

This procedure explains how to create Reference Workloads. Reference Workloads are a reusable set of workload parameters that simplify provisioning by eliminating the ambiguity associated with matching a new workload with the appropriate pre-defined workload. Using this feature, Storage administrators create Reference Workloads from known pre-configured workloads, and then associate them with new workloads during the provisioning process.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

114 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This feature is only available for a user with Admin or StorageAdmin permissions.

To create Reference Workloads:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Compliance panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group containing the workload that you want to reference and click View details to open its details view.

5. If not already displaying, click the Compliance tab.

6. Click Save as Reference Workload to open the Create Reference Workload dialog box.

7. Type a Reference Workload Name. Reference Workload names must be unique and cannot exceed 64 characters.

8. Click OK.

Renaming Reference Workloads

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This feature is only available for a user with Admin or StorageAdmin permissions.

To rename Reference Workloads:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Service Levels to open the Service Levels view.

3. Click the Workload Types tab.

4. Hover the cursor over the Reference Workload and click Edit ( ).

5. Type a new name over the existing. Reference Workload names must be unique and cannot exceed 64 characters.

6. Click OK.

Viewing Reference Workloads

This procedure explains how to view Reference Workloads.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 115

To view Reference Workloads:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Service Levels to open the Service Levels view.

3. Click the Workload Types tab.

The following properties display:

Reference Workloads Workloads configured on the system, including:

Standard Pre-configured workloads.

Custom User-configured workloads.

Details Displays the following details for the selected workload:

Service Level Service level set for the workload. Service levels specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including average response time, workload type, and priority. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

Workload Workload type set for the workload. Workload types are used to refine the service level (that is, narrow the latency range) Possible values are OLTP or DSS, where OLTP workload is focused on optimizing performance for small block I/O and DSS workload is focused on optimizing performance for large block I/O. The Workload Type can also specify whether to account for any overhead associated with replication (OLTP_Rep and DSS_Rep, where denotes replication).

I/O Density How efficiently FAST is managing I/O for the workload.

Skew Calculated skew density score for the disks in the storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values.

I/O Mixture I/O mixture for the workload.

The following control is available:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

116 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 106. When opening the Provision Storage Wizard from this view, the steps on selecting the Service Level and Workload Type will not apply, as they will be pre-populated with information from the Reference Workload.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

VMAX provisioning 117

Storage groups

Managing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) The Storage Groups Dashboard provides you with a single place to monitor and manage storage groups.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To refresh the information displayed in the Storage Groups Dashboard, click refresh

Symmetrix ( ) in the status bar, or exit/return to the Storage Groups Dashboard.

To access the Storage Groups Dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard .

Storage Groups Dashboard

The Storage Groups Dashboard is organized into the following panels: SG Compliance panel

Displays how well the system's storage groups are complying with their respective service levels, if applicable. All of the storage groups on the VMAX system are organized into the following categories:

Total All storage groups on the storage system.

Stable Number of storage groups performing within the service level targets. indicates that there are no storage groups performing within the service level targets.

Marginal Number of storage groups performing below service level targets. indicates that there are no storage groups performing below service level targets.

Critical Number of storage groups performing well below service level targets. indicates that there are no storage group performing well below service level targets.

No Service Level No service level compliance information. Storage Group Management panel

Displays the following links:

Provision Storage to Host Opens the Provision Storage to Host wizard, which will guide

you through the process of provision storage to a host.

View Compliance Report Opens the compliance report, which displays storage group

performance against service levels over a period of time. This option is only available when performance is enabled and Workload Planner has processed.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

118 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

In addition, this panel also includes a Search widget, which allows you to quickly locate a specific storage group on the storage system. Double-clicking the resulting storage group will open its Details view.

Storage Resource Pools panel

Displays performance information for the Storage Resource Pools (SRPs) on the storage system. By default, VMAX systems only include a single SRP, the DEFAULT_SRP. In the event that there are multiple SRPs, each will have their own tab in the display.

The following information displays for each pool:

Alert summary icon that displays the status and number of alerts for the SRP. Alert status is

indicated by icon color:

One or more fatal alerts

One or more critical alerts, with none higher

One or more warning alerts, with none higher

One or more informational alerts, with none higher

No alerts

To view details on the alerts, click the icon to open the SRP Alert list view.

Capacity Displays used (allocated) verses free capacity for the SRP, with the option to

overlay the amount of subscribed capacity (Display subscription). You also have the option to view only SRDF DSE allocated capacity for the SRP or Snapshot allocated capacity for the SRP.

Headroom Displays the space available for a particular service level/workload

combination if all remaining capacity was on that type. For external SRPs, headroom information is not displayed.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default

Demand Report Displays the allocated and subscribed capacity for the SRP by service

level:

Service Level Name of the service level.

Subscription Total space the service level has subscribed on the SRP in GB.

% Percentage of space the service level has subscribed on the SRP.

Allocated (GB) Total space the service level has used on the SRP in GB.

Reports Displays links to the following reports:

Storage Group Demand Report Displays all the storage groups on the SRP and their associated demand.

Workloads Demand Report Displays demand that each workload is placing on the SRP.

View SRP Details Opens the SRP Details view, from which you can view and manage the SRP. For more information, refer to Viewing Storage Resource Pools on page 169.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 119

Creating storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) This procedure explains how to create storage groups on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. In addition to method described below, you can also create a storage group using the Provision Storage wizard, as described in Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 106

For instructions on creating storage groups on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, refer to Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on the facing page.

Before you begin:

The user must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

The maximum number of storage groups allowed on a storage system running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 is 16,384.

A storage group can contain up to 4,096 volumes.

A volume can belong to multiple storage groups if only one of the groups is under FAST control.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

120 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To create a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes list view.

3. Select one or more volumes and click Create SG to open the Create Storage Group dialog box.

4. Type a Storage Group Name. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive.

5. To create the storage group outside of FAST control, set Storage Resource Pool to None; otherwise, leave this field set to the default.

6. Select the Service Level to set on the SG. Service level policies specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including maximum response time, workload type, and priority. This field defaults to None if you set the Storage Resource Pool to None. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

7. Refine the service level by selecting the Workload to assign it.

8. Click OK to create the storage group now, or click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as describe in the remaining steps.

9. Optional: Specify to Allocate Full Volume capacity.

10. If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

11. Click OK.

Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) This procedure explains how to create storage groups on VMAX systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876. For instructions on creating storage groups on VMAX systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977, refer to Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 106.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 121

Before you begin:

You must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

The maximum number of storage groups allowed on a Symmetrix system is 8,192.

A storage group can contain up to 4,096 Symmetrix volumes.

A Symmetrix volume can belong to more than one storage group.

In this procedure you can optionally name the volumes you are adding the storage group. For

more information, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

This procedure explains how to create storage groups using the Provision Storage wizard,

which involves only the first page of the wizard. For instructions on completing the wizard, thereby provisioning the new storage groups, refer to Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 110.

To create a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Click Create SG to open the Provision Storage wizard.

4. Refer to wizard help system for instructions.

Adding volumes to storage groups This procedure explains how to add volumes to existing storage groups.

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To add volumes to storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Compliance panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click View Details to open the its Details view.

2. In the Related Objects panel, click Volumes to open the storage group Volumes list view.

3. Click Add Volumes to SG to open the Add Volumes to Storage Group wizard.

4. Locate the volumes by selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

122 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

Additional Criteria Allows you to refine your query by adding conditional expressions,

as describe next:

a. Select values for the following:

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Operator Establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

b. To add another expression, click Add Another, and repeat the previous step. To clear your criteria, click Clear All.

Include Volumes in Storage Groups Includes volumes already in other storage groups.

5. Click Find Volumes to run the query. Results are displayed on the next page in the wizard.

6. Do one of the following:

Select the Volumes and click Add to SG.

Click Modify Criteria to modify your search query.

Copying volumes between storage groups This procedure explains how to copy volumes between storage groups.

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The user must have StorageAdmin permission.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 123

To copy volumes between storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click View Details to open its Details view.

2. In the Related Objects panel, click Volumes to open the storage group Volumes list view.

3. Select one or more volumes click more and click Copy Volumes To SG to open the Copy Volumes to Storage Group dialog box.

4. Select the Target Storage Group Name.

5. Click OK.

Moving volumes between storage groups This procedure explains how to move volumes between storage groups.

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The user must have StorageAdmin permission.

To perform this operation without disrupting the host's ability to view the volumes, at least one

of the following conditions must be met:

Each storage group must be a child of the same parent storage group, and the parent storage group must be associated with a masking view.

Each storage group must be associated with a masking view, and both masking views must contain a common initiator group and a common port group. In this scenario, the port groups can be different, but they must both contain the same set of ports, or the target port group can contain a superset of the ports in the source port group.

The source storage group is not in a masking view.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

124 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To move volumes between storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click View Details to open its Details view.

2. In the Related Objects panel, click Volumes to open the storage group Volumes list view.

3. Select one or more volumes, click more , and click Move Volumes to SG to open the Move Volumes to Storage Group dialog box.

4. Select the Target Storage Group Name.

5. Optional: By default, the operation will fail if at least one of the conditions above is not met. To override this default behavior, select Use force flag.

6. Click OK.

Removing volumes from storage groups This procedure explains how to remove volumes from storage groups.

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To remove volumes from storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click View Details to open the its Details view.

2. In the Related Objects panel, click Volumes to open the storage group Volumes list view.

3. Select one ore more volumes and click Remove Volumes to open the Remove Volume dialog box.

4. Optional: To unbind the volumes, select Unbind or Unmap, depending on the storage operating environment.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 125

5. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

126 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Expanding storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) This procedure explains how to increase the amount of storage in a group accessible to the masking view or in the FAST Policy.

Before you begin:

This procedure requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

In this procedure you can optionally name the volumes you are adding the storage group. For

more information, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

To expand a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

3. Select the storage group and click Expand to open the Expand Storage Group wizard.

4. Select a method for expanding the storage group. Possible values are:

Virtual Volumes Expands the group using virtual volumes.

Regular Volumes Expands the group using regular volumes. This option is not available

for Symmetrix VMAX 10K/VMAXe systems.

Template Expands the group using a storage template.

Copy Volume Configuration Expands the group by copying the configuration of volumes

already in the group.

5. Click Next.

6. Do the following, depending on the method you are using:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 127

Virtual Volumes:

a. Select the Emulation type for the volumes to add to the storage group.

b. Optional: Select the Thin Pool to which the volumes will be added.

c. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Size.

d. Optional: Click Show Advanced and set any of the following options:

To only use BCVs in the storage group, select Use BCV volumes.

Specify to Allocate Full Volume capacity.

If you selected to allocate full volume capacity in the previous step, you can mark the

allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, select one of the following

Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when expanding storage groups with new volumes. Note that when expanding storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

e. Click Next.

Regular Volumes:

a. Select the Disk Technology on which the storage group will reside.

b. Select the Emulation type for the volumes to add to the storage group.

c. Select the Protection level for the volumes to add to the storage group.

d. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Size.

e. Optional: Click Show Advanced and set any of the following options:

To only use BCVs in the storage group, select Use BCV volumes.

To only use volumes from a specific disk group, select the Disk Group.

To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, select one of the following

Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

128 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

This option is only available when expanding storage groups with new volumes. Note that when expanding storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

f. Click Next.

Template:

a. Select the Template and click Next.

b. Type the Number of Volumes to add to the storage group.

c. Select the Thin Pool containing the volumes to add o the storage group.

d. Optional: Click Show Advanced and set any of the following options:

z/OS Only: If the storage group contains CKD volumes, type an SSID for the target, or

click Select ... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID.

To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, click Show Advanced and

select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when expanding storage groups with new volumes. Note that when expanding storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

e. Click Next.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 129

Copy Volume Configuration:

a. Select a volume to copy.

b. Type the Number of Volumes to add.

c. To name the volumes you are adding to the storage group, click Show Advanced and select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

This option is only available when creating storage groups with new volumes. Note that when creating storage groups with some new and some existing volumes, the identifiers will only be applied to the new volumes.

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique

decimal suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

d. Click Next.

7. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

8. Click Finish.

Modifying storage groups This procedure explains how to modify storage groups on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform the operation from the Storage Groups Dashboard. In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from Storage Groups for File page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

Before you begin:

You must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

The maximum number of storage groups allowed on a storage system is 8,192.

A storage group can contain up to 4,096 storage volumes.

A volume can belong to more than one storage group.

A volume can belong to multiple storage groups if only one of the groups is under FAST control.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

130 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To modify a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click Modify to open the Modify Storage Group dialog box.

5. Do any number of the following:

a. Change the Storage Group Name by highlighting it and typing a new name over it. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and dashes (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive.

Note the following about renaming storage groups:

If renaming a storage group with workload on it, you will have to wait some time

before the workload is visible in the storage group's Details view.

When renaming a storage group configured compliance alerts, the compliance alerts

will need to be deleted manually. For instructions, refer to Deleting compliance alerts policies on page 82.

b. Change the Storage Resource Pool by selecting the new pool from the drop-down menu. Setting this property to None creates the storage group outside of FAST control. External storage resource pools are listed below the External heading.

c. Change the Service Level for the storage group. Service level objectives specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including maximum response time, workload type, and priority. This field defaults to None if you set the Storage Resource Pool to None. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

d. Change the Workload Type assigned to the service level.

e. Add or remove Volumes.

f. Do the following to change the capacity of the storage group, depending on whether the group contains volumes of the same capacity or mixed capacities:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 131

If the group contains volumes of the same capacity, do one of the following:

Type or select an increased number of volumes in the Volumes drop-down menu.

Type or select an increased unit capacity of the volumes and/or change the unit in the Volume Capacity drop-down menus.

If the group contains volumes of mixed capacities, click Edit custom capacity to open

the Modify Custom Capacity dialog box. Change the number of Volumes by capacity, and click OK.You can only use the Allocate capacity for each volume option for newly created volumes, not existing volumes.

The Total Capacity and Additional Capacity figures are updated to reflect any changes.

The maximum volume size supported on a VMAX3 system is 64 TB.

g. Optional: To add a child storage group, do one of the following:

On all-flash storage systems, click Add Storage Group.

On all other storage systems click Add Service Level . 

Modify any of the service level parameters, as described earlier in this procedure.

6. Optional: To determine if the storage system can handle the updated service level:

a. Click Run Suitability Check. The Suitability Check dialog box opens, indicating the suitability of the change. For information on interpreting the results, refer to the dialog's help page. This option is only available under certain circumstances. For more information, refer to Suitability Check restrictions.

b. Click OK to close the message.

c. If your updates are found to be unsuitable, modify the settings and run the check again until the suitability check passes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Moving storage groups to EMC CloudArray This procedure explains how to move storage groups to EMC CloudArray.

If a child storage group is moved to CloudArray, all sibling storage groups are also moved. If a parent storage group is moved to CloudArray, the child storage groups are also moved.

Before you begin:

The user must have Admin or StorageAdmin permission.

The storage system must have an EMC CloudArray SRP.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

132 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To move storage groups to EMC CloudArray:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. Select a storage group, click more , and click Move to EMC CloudArray to open the Move to EMC CloudArray dialog box.

Information about the storage group and the SRPs from which and to which it is being moved displays.

4. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Protecting storage groups The Protect Storage Group wizard guides you through the process of protecting your storage group. Depending on the capabilities of the storage system, the following options may be available:

Snap/VX For instructions, refer to Creating snapshots on page 401. This is the default

method for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

TimeFinder/Clone For instructions, refer to Protecting storage groups using

TimerFinder/Clone below. This is the default method for storage systems running Enginuity 5671 - 5876.

ProtectPoint For instructions, refer to Protecting storage groups using ProtectPoint on page

286. This method is only available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

RecoverPoint For instructions, refer to Protecting storage groups using RecoverPoint on page

514. This is method is only available for storage systems running Enginuity 5875 - 5876.

SRDF For instructions, refer to Protecting storage groups using SRDF on page 137. This

method is available for storage systems, subject to connectivity rules.

SRDF/Metro For instructions, refer to Protecting storage groups using SRDF/Metro on page

140. This is method is only available for storage systems running HYPERMAX 5977 and higher..

Protecting storage groups using TimerFinder/Clone

This procedure explains how to clone storage groups.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 133

Before you begin:

This feature requires the Enginuity 5876.163.105 or higher. This feature does not apply to

storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The storage group must contain only thin volumes (except gatekeepers under 10 MB) and they

must all be of the same type (either BCV or standard thin volumes (TDEVs). This restriction also applies to cascaded storage groups, that is, all volumes in the parent and child storage groups must be thin and of the same type.

The SYMAP_ALLOW_DEV_INT_MULTI_GRPS option must be enabled. For instructions on

enabling the option, refer to Editing the Options file in the  Solutions Enabler Installation Guide.

Meta volumes are not supported.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

134 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To protect storage groups using TimeFinder/Clone:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard.

4. If not already selected, select Point In Time Protection Using Clone.

5. Click Next.

6. Type the name of the device group that will hold the target volumes (Device Group Name).

7. Select the thin pool to which the target volumes will be bound (Bind to Pool). If the source storage group contains thin volumes bound to different thin pools, or if its a cascaded storage group with child storage groups containing volumes bound to different thin pools, selecting a single thin pool will result in all target volumes being bound to that single pool.

8. Optional: Clear the Create Replica Storage Group option in which case a storage group for the target volumes will not be created. Leaving the option selected allows you to optionally change the name of replica storage group (Storage Group Name). Changing the name will also change the target volume storage group name.

9. z/OS Only: If the storage group contains CKD volumes, type a New SSID for the target, or click Select ... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID

10. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. Select the mode in which to create the clone session Clone Copy Mode. You can set the default clone copy mode in the Preferences dialog box, as described in Setting system preferences on page 38. The mode you specify here will override the default mode specified in the preferences. Possible values are:

No Copy No Diff Create a nondifferential (full) copy session without a full background

copy.

Copy No Diff Creates a nondifferential (full) copy session in the background.

PreCopy No Diff Creates a nondifferential (full) copy session in the background before

the activate starts.

Copy Diff Creates a differential copy session in the background. In differential copy

sessions, only those volume tracks that have changed since the full clone was performed are copied (that is, only new writes to the source volume will be copied).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 135

PreCopy Diff Creates a differential copy session in the background before the activate

starts. In differential copy sessions, only those volume tracks that have changed since the full clone was performed are copied (that is, only new writes to the source volume will be copied).

VSE No Diff Creates a VP Snap Copy session.

2. Select a method for creating the clones (Clone Creation). Possible values are:

Best Effort Specifies to make every effort to use existing volumes as the targets, and

then create new volumes as necessary.

Find Existing Specifies to only use exiting volumes as the targets.

Create New Specifies to create new volumes to use as targets.

3. Select the type of volumes to use as the targets (Clone Targets).

4. Click Next.

5. Verify your selections, and then click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Protecting storage groups using ProtectPoint

This procedure explains how to backup thin volumes to Data Domain arrays.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977.

You must have StorageAdmin permission.

The Data Domain appliance must be connected and zoned to the storage system.

Provide the Data Domain Admin the number and size of volumes in the production storage

group and request that they provide you with double the number of similar volumes (masked/visible to the storage system). For example, if the production storage group contains 10 volumes, the Data Domain Admin should provide you with the LUN numbers of 20 similar volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

136 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To protect storage groups using ProtectPoint:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard.

5. Select Backup Using ProtectPoint.

6. Click Next.

7. Type the name of the Point In Time Copy Name and click Next.

8. Type a name for the Backup Storage Group, or leave the system-generated suggestion.

9. Select the external LUNs to add to the backup storage group and click Add to Storage Group. Note that the external LUNs you select must match in number and capacity the volumes in the production storage group.

10. Click Next.

11. Type a name for the New Restore Storage Group, or leave the system-generated suggestion.

12. Select the external LUNs to add to the restore storage group and click Add to Storage Group. Note that the external LUNs you select must match in number and capacity the volumes in the production storage group.

13. Click Next.

14. Verify your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

15. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

16. Once the job completes successfully, provide the following information to the Data Domain Admin:

The LUN numbers used in the backup storage group

The LUN numbers used in the restore storage group

The name of the point in time copy

Protecting storage groups using SRDF

This procedure explains how to protect storage groups using SRDF.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 137

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977.

You must have StorageAdmin permission.

Connectivity to remote storage system must be available.

All storage systems involved must be discoverable and manageable from the Unisphere for

VMAX console.

The SRDF wizard in Unisphere for VMAX 8.1 and higher releases supports the mandatory

creation of a storage group and the optional creation of a device group. The storage group may contain non-concurrent SRDF devices of any one SRDF type, or may contain non-SRDF devices.

The following validation check is performed by the wizard to determine if selected storage

group be SRDF protected: Volumes in the storage group need to be all TDEVs, or all volumes in the storage group need to be R1s and in the same SRDF Group, or all volumes need to be R2s and in the same SRDF Group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

138 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To protect storage groups using SRDF:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard. The Select Protection Type page displays.

2. Select Remote Replication Using SRDF.

3. Click Next.

4. Select the Remote Symmetrix system. To update the list of remote systems, click Scan.

5. Select the Replication Mode. For more information, refer to SRDF session modes on page 475.

6. Select Auto to automatically select a SRDF group or Manual to select a SRDF group from a list.

7. Optional: To not start pair mirroring, clear the Establish Pairs option.

8. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment (target system): For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

Optional: Change the Remote Storage Group Name, and optionally select a Remote Service Level. Changing the name will also change the target volume storage group name.

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

a. Select the Remote Thin Pool to which the target volumes will be bound. If the source storage group contains thin volumes bound to different thin pools, or if its a cascaded storage group with child storage groups containing volumes bound to different thin pools, selecting a single thin pool will result in all target volumes being bound to that single pool.

b. Optional: Select the Remote FAST Policy. This is the FAST policy associated with the remote storage group.

c. z/OS Only: If the storage group contains CKD volumes, type a New SSID for the target, or click Select ... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID.

1. Optional: Click Device Group check box and select the Device Group Name that will hold the target volumes.

2. Click Next. The Finish page displays.

3. Verify your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

4. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 139

Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Protecting storage groups using SRDF/Metro

This procedure explains how to protect storage groups using SRDF/Metro, in order to improve support for host applications in high availability environments.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must have StorageAdmin permission.

Connectivity to remote storage system must be available.

All storage systems involved must be discoverable and manageable from the Unisphere for

VMAX console.

To protect storage groups using SRDF Metro:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard. The Select Protection Type page displays.

5. Select High Availability using SRDF/Metro .

6. Click Next.

7. Select the Remote Symmetrix system. To update the list of remote systems, click Scan.

8. Select Auto to automatically select a SRDF group or Manual to select a SRDF group from a list.

9. Optional: To stop the initiation of pair mirroring, clear the Establish Pairs option.

10. If Establish Pairs is checked, choose Managed by Witness or Bias. If Witness is unavailable on the local or remote Symmetrix, the option is disabled and Bias is selected by default. If available, Witness is selected by default.

11. Optional: Change the Remote Storage Group Name, and optionally select a Remote Service Level. Changing the name will also change the target volume storage group name

12. Click Next. The Finish page displays.

13. Verify your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

14. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

140 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Converting storage groups to cascaded This procedure explains how to non-disruptively convert a standalone storage group to cascaded storage group. Once complete, the original storage group will serve as the parent to a new child storage group.

This procedure explains how to perform the operation from the Storage Groups Dashboard. In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from Storage Groups for File page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

Before you begin:

You must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To convert storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group, click , and select Convert to Cascaded to open the Convert to Cascaded dialog box.

5. Type a new name over the system-suggested Child Storage Group Name. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive.

6. Click OK.

Changing Storage Resource Pools for storage groups This procedure explains how to change the Storage Resource Pool of a parent storage group, with child service levels using different Storage Resource Pools.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the Storage Groups Dashboard. In eNAS environments, you can also perform this operation from the File Storage Groups page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 141

To change the Storage Resource Pool for storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group, click more , and select Change SRP to open the Change SRP dialog box.

5. Select the new SRP.

6. Optional: Change the Service Level for the SG. Service level objectives specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including maximum response time, workload type, and priority. This field defaults to None if you set the Storage Resource Pool to None. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

7. Optional: Refine the service level by selecting the Workload Typeto assign it.

8. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Associating FAST policies and storage groups The procedure for associating FAST policies and storage groups, depends on whether you are associating a storage group with a policy or policy with a storage group.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Storage groups and FAST policies can only be associated under the following conditions:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

142 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The VMAX system is running Enginuity 5874 through 5876.

The storage group is not already associated with another policy. This restriction does not apply to Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5876.

The target FAST policy needs to have a least one pool that is part of the source policy in re- association activity.

The volumes in the new storage group are not already in a storage group associated with a FAST policy.

The policy has at least one tier.

The storage group only contains meta heads; meta members are not allowed.

The storage group does not contain moveable volumes. When a storage group is associated with a policy, you cannot add non-moveable volumes to it. Non-moveable volumes include:

CKD EAV

DRV

SFS

iSeries, ICOS, ICL

SAVE volumes

VDEVs

Diskless volumes

The storage group cannot contain a volume that is part of another storage group already

associated with another policy.

The Symmetrix system has less than the maximum number of allowed associations (8,192).

To associate a FAST policy with a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies panel, click Manage Policies to open the Manage Policies view.

5. Select the policy and click Associate Storage Groups to open the Associate Storage Groups dialog box.

6. Select one or more storage groups, and then click either of the following:

OK to associate the storage group.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To have FAST factor the R1 volume statistics into move decisions made for the R2 volume, select Enable FAST [VP|DP] RDF Coordination. This attribute can be set on a storage group, even when there are no SRDF volumes in the storage group. This feature is only available if the Symmetrix system is part of an SRDF setup. Both R1 volumes and R2 volumes need to be running Enginuity version 5876 or higher for the FAST VP system to coordinate the moves. However, the setting of the RDF coordination attribute will not be prevented if one of the

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 143

Symmetrix systems is running an Enginuity level lower than 5876.

2. Click OK.

To associate a storage group with a FAST policy:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Associate to FAST to open the Associate to FAST Policy dialog box.

4. Select a policy and click OK.

Disassociating FAST policies and storage groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. In the navigation bar, click Storage to open the Storage section.

3. Click FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

4. Select the FAST Type.

5. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies details view.

6. Select the policy and click View Details to open the policy's details view.

7. In the Related Object view panel, click Storage Groups - nn to open the Storage Groups for FAST Policy details view.

8. Select the one or more storage groups and click Disassociate.

9. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

144 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Reassociating FAST polices and storage groups This procedure explains how to reassociate a storage group with a new policy. When reassociating a storage group, all the current attributes set on the original association automatically propagate to the new association. This feature eliminates the previous process of disassociating a storage group, then associating the group to a new policy, and entering the attributes, such as priority, on the association.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The storage group name must be valid.

The storage group and policy must already exist on the Symmetrix system.

The storage group must be in an association before performing a reassociation.

The new policy for the storage group, must have the same emulation as the storage group. Mix

emulation association will result in an error.

The storage group cannot be associated with an empty policy, and the reassociated policy must

contain at least one tier.

The total of the capacity percentage for the target FAST policy must add up to at least 100%.

If the FAST policy contains VP Tiers, all of the thin devices in the storage group must be bound

to any VP pool in a tier in the policy. None of the thin devices can be bound to a pool outside of the policy.

To reassociate FAST Policies and storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group, click more , and click Reassociate to FAST Policy to open the Reassociate to FAST Policy dialog box.

4. Select a policy and click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 145

Adding or removing cascaded storage groups This procedure explains how to add or remove child storage groups from parent storage groups.

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To add/remove cascaded storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the parent storage group and click View Details to open its Details view.

2. In the Related Object panel, click Child Storage Group to open the Child Storage Groups list view.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you are adding or removing storage groups:

Adding storage groups:

a. Click Add Storage Group to open the Add Storage Group dialog box.

b. Select one or more storage groups and click OK.

Removing storage groups:

a. Select one or more storage groups and click Remove.

b. Enginuity 5874 - 5976 only: To unmap, select Unmap Device.

c. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Deleting storage groups This procedure explains how to delete storage groups.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

146 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

Storage groups require Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You cannot delete a storage group that is part of a masking view or associated with a FAST

Policy.

Before you can delete a child storage group, you must first remove it from its parent.

When a storage group configured compliance alerts (requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) is

deleted or renamed, the compliance alerts will need to be deleted manually. For instructions, refer to Deleting compliance alerts policies on page 82.

To delete a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from Storage Groups for File page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group, click more , and select Delete.

2. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Setting host I/O limits Host I/O limits (quotas) is a feature that can be used to limit the amount of Front End (FE) Bandwidth and I/Os per second (IOPs) that can be consumed by a set of storage volumes over a set of director ports. The bandwidth and I/Os against the set of volumes over the set of director ports will be monitored by the Symmetrix system to ensure that it will not exceed the user specified maximum bandwidth or maximum IOPs placed on these. This feature allows you to place limits on the FE Bandwidth and IOPs consumed by applications on the storage system.

Host I/O limits are defined as storage group attributes the maximum bandwidth (in MB per second) and the maximum IOPs (in I/Os per second). For a cascaded storage group, a host I/O limit can be added for the parent and/or the child storage group. If set for both, the child limits cannot exceed that of the parent.

The Host I/O limit for a storage group can be either active or inactive, only the active Host I/O limit can limit the FE bandwidth and IOPs of the volumes in a storage group. The Host I/O limit will become active when a provisioning view is created using the storage group and will become inactive when the view is deleted. When a view is created on a parent storage group with a Host I/O limit, the limit will be shared among all the volumes in all child storage groups.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 147

The Host I/O limit of the storage group will apply to all the director ports of the port group in the provisioning view. The Host I/O limit is divided equally among all the directors in the port group independent of the number of ports on each director. For this reason it is recommended that you configure only one of the ports of a director in the port group.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running Enginuity 5876.159.102 or higher, or HYPERMAX OS 5977

or higher.

For Enginuity 5876.159.102 up to HYPERMAX OS 5977, the maximum number of quotas per

array is 2,000. For HYPERMAX OS 5977 and higher, the maximum number is 16,000.

For more information on setting host I/O limits, refer to the Solutions Enabler Array

Management CLI Product Guide. This guide is part of the Solutions Enabler Complete Documentation Set.

To set host I/O limits:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from Storage Groups for File page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and select Set Host I/O Limits to open the Set Host I/O Limits dialog box.

2. Select and type values for one or both of the following:

Set Host I/O Limit (MB/Sec) Maximum bandwidth (in MB per second). Valid values

range from 1 MB/sec to 100,000 MB/sec.

Set Host I/O Limit (IO/Sec) Maximum IOPs (in I/Os per second). Valid values range

from 100 IO/Sec to 100,000 IO/sec, in 100 increments.

3. To configure a dynamic distribution of host I/O limits, Set Dynamic Distribution to one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to Never (default). This feature requires Enginuity 5876.163.105 or higher.

Always Enables full dynamic distribution mode. When enabled, the configured host

I/O limits will be dynamically distributed across the configured ports, thereby allowing the limits on each individual port to adjust to fluctuating demand.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

148 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

OnFailure Enables port failure capability. When enabled, the fraction of configured host

I/O limits available to a configured port will adjust based on the number of ports currently online.

4. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now

Managing VP compression on storage groups The following explains how to manage VP compression on the thin volumes in a storage group.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5876.159.102 or higher. This feature is not supported on VMAX systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To manage VP compression on storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group, click , and select VP Compression to open the VP Compression dialog box.

4. Select one of the following compression actions:

Start Compression Starts compressing the thin volumes in the storage group.

Stop Compression Stops compressing the thin volumes in the storage group.

Start Uncompression Starts uncompressing the thin volumes in the storage group.

Stop Uncompression Stops uncompressing the thin volumes in the storage group.

5. Click OK.

Viewing storage groups

Viewing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view storage groups on a storage system running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. There are multiple ways to view the same information. Depending on the method you use, some of the properties and controls may not apply.

1. Select the storage system.

The Storage Groups Dashboard opens by default.

2. Do one of the following:

To view all storage groups on the storage system, click Total in the Compliance panel to

open the Storage Groups list view.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 149

To view only file storage groups (in eNAS environments):

a. Select System > Dashboard to open the System dashboard.

b. In the Summary panel, click File Dashboard to open the File Dashboard.

c. In the Summary panel, click File Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups for File list view.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the storage group. Parent storage groups are preceded by an arrow (>)

 icon. Click the icon to view child storage groups.

Compliance How well the storage group is complying with its service level, if applicable.

Possible values are:

Critical Storage group is performing well below service level target.

Marginal Storage group is performing below service level target.

Stable Storage group is performing within the service level target.

No Service Level Storage group has no assigned service level.

Compliance information is being collected.

SRP Name of SRP that the storage group belongs to, if any.

Service Level Name of the service level associated with the storage group. If there is no

service level associated with the group, then file displays N/A.

Workload Type Workload associated with the storage group.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Snapshots Number of snapshots linked to the storage group.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

File System # Number of file systems associated with the file storage group. This

column only displays in eNAS environments.

Storage Pools Number of storage pools associated with the file storage group. This

column only displays in eNAS environments.

The following controls are available:

Create SG See Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 121.

Modify Modifying storage groups on page 130

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Provision Storage for File Provisioning storage for file on page 797

Protect Protecting storage groups on page 133

Chapter 4: Storage Management

150 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Manage Protection Managing TimeFinder/Snap sessions on page 388Select a storage

group and click Manage Protection to display a link dialog box with links to the various replication technologies applied to a storage groupTimeFinder SnapVX, TimeFinder Clone, TimeFinder Mirror, SRDF storage groups, SRDF device groups, and SRDF/Metro groups.

Note that if a storage group has SRDF Protection with a device group and a storage group, then two management options for SRDF are displayed.

View Details Viewing storage group details (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) below

Move to EMC CloudArray Moving storage groups to EMC CloudArray

FAST Array Advisor Analyzing FAST migration on page 203

Change SRP Changing Storage Resource Pools for storage groups on page 171

Set Host I/O Limits Setting host I/O limits on page 147

Replication QoS See Setting replication QoS on page 233.

Delete Deleting storage groups on page 146

Expand ProtectPoint Expanding ProtectPoint storage groups on page 287

Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim Managing thin pool allocations on page 264/Managing

thin pool capacity on page 268/Managing space reclamation on page 266

Stop Allocated/Free Reclaim Managing thin pool allocations on page 264/Managing

thin pool capacity on page 268/Managing space reclamation on page 266

Convert to Cascaded Converting storage groups to cascaded on page 141

Set Volume Status Setting volume status on page 230

Viewing storage group details (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view configuration details for storage groups on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. In eNAS operating environments, there are multiple ways to view the same information. Depending on the method you use, some of the properties and controls may not apply.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 151

1. Select the storage system.

The Storage Groups Dashboard opens by default.

2. Do one of the following:

To view all storage groups on the storage system, click Total in the Compliance panel to

open the Storage Groups list view.

To view only file storage groups (in eNAS environments):

a. Select System > Dashboard to open the System dashboard.

b. In the Summary panel, click File Dashboard to open the File Dashboard.

c. In the Summary panel, click File Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups for File list view.

3. Select the storage group and click View Details to open its details view.

4. If not already displaying, click the Details tab.

The Storage Group Configuration view contains Properties, Related Objects, and Performance Views panels. In addition, for file storage groups, the File Systems panel displays. SnapVX, Clone, Mirror and SRDF/Metro also appear in the Related Objects Panel depending on the storage group selection. To manage protection, click the SRDF link in the Associated with section in the Related Objects panel, click View Storage Groups to navigate to the SRDF Storage Group list view for the selected storage group, and then click Manage Protection. Note that if an SRDF pair is manageable by a storage group and also manageable by a device group, then two management options for SRDF pairs are displayed.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name Name of the storage group. To rename the storage group, type a new name over the

existing and click Apply. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive. If you rename a storage group that has workload on it, you will have to wait some time before the workload is visible in the storage group's Details view.

Compliance How well the storage group is complying with its service level, if applicable.

Service Level Service level associated with the storage group. If there is no service level

associated with the group, then this field displays N/A.

Workload Type Type of the workload associated with the storage group.

Storage Resource Pool Storage resource pool containing the storage group.

Total Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Volumes Number of volumes in the storage group.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

Last Updated Timestamp of the most recent changes to the storage group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

152 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host I/O Limit Whether the host I/O limit feature is enabled. For more information, see

Setting host I/O limits on page 147.

Set Host I/O Limit (MB/Sec) Enables you to specify the maximum bandwidth.

Host I/O Limit (MB/Sec) Maximum bandwidth (in MB per second). Valid values range from

1 MB/sec to 100,000 MB/sec.

Set Host I/O Limit (IO/Sec) Enables you to specify the maximum IOPs.

Host I/O Limit (IO/Sec) Maximum IOPs (in I/Os per second). Valid values range from 100

IO/Sec to 100,000 IO/sec.

Set Dynamic Distribution Enables/disables dynamic distribution of host I/O limits. This

feature requires Enginuity 5876.163.105 or higher. Possible values are:

Always Enables full dynamic distribution mode. When enabled, the configured host

I/O limits will be dynamically distributed across the configured ports, thereby allowing the limits on each individual port to adjust to fluctuating demand.

OnFailure Enables port failure capability. When enabled, the fraction of configured host

I/O limits available to a configured port will adjust based on the number of ports currently online.

Never Disables this feature (Default).

The following controls are available:

Modify Modifying storage groups on page 130

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Provision Storage for File Provisioning storage for file on page 797

Delete See Deleting storage groups on page 146.

Set New Performance Baseline Expectations Sets the characteristics currently measured

for the previous two weeks as the new performance baseline. See Resetting Workload Plan on page 203.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the storage

group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the storage group. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Volumes - 2 will open a view listing the two volumes contained in the storage group.

Performance Views panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance monitor and analyze views for the storage group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 153

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected storage system is not registered for data collection.

File Systems panel

The File Systems panel displays the following information:

File System Name File system name.

Storage Groups Storage groups mapped to the file system.

Storage Pools Storage pools in the file system.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the file system.

Viewing storage group workload (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view the statistics used to compute the compliance of a storage group.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, a Monitor role is required.

The storage system must be local and registered for performance.

Viewing storage group workload :

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click View details to open its details view.

5. If not already displaying, click the Compliance tab.

The Compliance tab allows you to view workload details, organized into the following panels: Service Level

The service level associated with workload (Storage Group). Service Level Compliance

The calculated compliance of the workload as measured against its service level. Capacity Trend

The percentage of change in the storage group capacity over the previous two weeks. Performance

Links you to the performance Analyzeand Monitor views for the storage group.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected VMAX system is not registered for data collection.

Weighted Averages

Displays the following charts:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

154 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Response time (ms) Displays the calculated weighted average response time in

milliseconds for the storage group over the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks, against the service level value range for the storage group.

IOs per sec Displays the calculated weighted average IOs/second for the storage

group over the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

CPU/Port Load Scores

Displays the following charts:

% Front end Displays the calculated IO load scores of the storage group's front-end

CPUs and ports as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Back end Displays the calculated IO load scores of the storage group's back-end

CPUs and ports as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

You can optionally toggle the format used to display the load scores between IOs/sec and MB/sec.

Access Density Skew Scores:

Displays the load scores for the storage group in the following charts:

% High load Displays the calculated skew density score for the high load disks in

the storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Mixed load Displays the calculated skew density score for the mixed load disks

in the storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Low load Displays the calculated skew density score for the low load disks in the

storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

You can toggle the format used to display the load scores between the following views:

IOs/sec Displays the calculated skew scores for the storage group in IOs per

second.

MB/sec Displays the calculated skew scores for the storage group in megabytes

per second.

GB Displays the calculated skew scores for total data throughput (in GB) for the

storage group.

In general, the High load and Low load numbers should be between 25 and 175 and the Mixed load number should be between 50 and 150.

Higher skew storage groups should display the following characteristics for load (IOs/sec)  and Capacity:

IOs/sec Higher High load numbers and lower Low load numbers.

Capacity Higher Low load numbers and lower High load numbers.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 155

Lower skew storage groups should display higher Mixed load numbers and lower High load and Low load numbers for load (IOs/sec) and Capacity.

When displaying load (IOs/sec):

Higher High load numbers indicate that it is easier for the system to provide lower

than expected response time for the storage group.

Higher Low load numbers indicate that it is more difficult for the system to keep the

storage group away from SATA storage.

When displaying Capacity:

Lower High load numbers indicate that the storage group can have low response

times while using less than expected amounts of Flash storage.

Lower Low load numbers indicate that the storage group cannot take advantage of

SATA storage.

The following controls are available if the storage system is running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

Save as Reference Workload Reference workloads on page 114

Reset Workload Plan Resetting Workload Plan on page 203

Viewing storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

The Storage Groups list view allows you to view and manage storage groups on a Symmetrix system.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the storage group. Parent storage groups are preceded by an arrow (>)

 icon. Click the icon to view child storage groups.

FAST Policy Policy associated with the storage group.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Volumes Number of volumes contained in the storage group.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

The following controls are available:

Create SG Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 121

Expand Expanding storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 127

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

on page 110

Protect Protecting storage groups on page 133

Chapter 4: Storage Management

156 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Manage Protection Managing TimeFinder/Clone sessions on page 371,

TimeFinder/Mirror on page 415,Managing TimeFinder/Snap sessions on page 388See "Managing remote replication sessions" on page 433. Select a storage group and click Manage Protection to display a link dialog box with links to the various replication technologies applied to a storage group -TF Clone, TF SnapVX (for V3's), TF Mirror, SRDF storage groups, and SRDF device groups.

Note that if a storage group has SRDF Protection with a device group and a storage group, then two management options for SRDF are displayed.

View Details Viewing storage group details on the next page

FAST Array Advisor Analyzing FAST migration on page 203

Delete Deleting storage groups on page 146

Associate to FAST Associating FAST policies and storage groups on page 190

Bind SG Binding/Unbinding/Rebinding thin volumes on page 274

Unbind SG Binding/Unbinding/Rebinding thin volumes on page 274

Rebind SG Binding/Unbinding/Rebinding thin volumes on page 274

Reassociate to FAST Policy Reassociating FAST polices and storage groups on page

193

Disassociate Disassociating FAST policies and storage groups on page 192

Set Host I/O Limits Setting host I/O limits on page 147

Set Optimized Read Miss Setting optimized read miss on page 228

Pin SG See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

Unpin SG See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

VLUN Migration See Migrating regular storage group volumes on page 476.

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition See Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867.

VP Compression See Managing VP compression on storage groups on page 149.

Replication QOS See Setting replication QoS on page 233.

Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim Managing thin pool allocations on page 264/Managing

thin pool capacity on page 268/Managing space reclamation on page 266

Stop Allocated/Free Reclaim Managing thin pool allocations on page 264/Managing

thin pool capacity on page 268/Managing space reclamation on page 266

Assign Symmetrix Priority See Assigning Symmetrix priority on page 224. (Does not

apply/display for Symmetrix VMAX 10K (VMAXe) systems)

Tag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page

510.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 157

Untag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page

510.

Viewing storage group details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group and click View Details to open its Details view.

The storage group Details view allows you to view and manage a storage group. It contains Properties, Related Objects, Performance Views, and FAST Compliance Report panels. Clone and Mirror also appear in the Related Objects Panel depending on the storage group selection. To manage protection, click the SRDF link in the Associated with section in the Related Objects panel, click View Storage Groups to navigate to the SRDF Storage Group list view for the selected storage group, and then click Manage Protection. Note that if an SRDF pair is manageable by a storage group and also manageable by a device group, then two management options for SRDF pairs are displayed.

There are multiple ways to open this view. Depending on the one you used, some of the following properties and controls may not appear.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name Name of the storage group. To rename the storage group, type a new name over the

existing and click Apply. Storage group names must be unique from other storage groups on the system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Storage group names are case-insensitive.

FAST Policy Policy associated with the storage group. To associate the storage group with a

different policy, select a new policy and click Apply.

FAST Priority The priority value currently assigned to the storage group within the tier.

Storage groups associated with a policy are assigned a priority value that determines the order in which the tier will service them during conflicts. Possible values range from 1 (the highest) to 3 (the lowest). To change the priority, select a new priority and click Apply. This field only displays when the storage group is associated with a FAST Policy.

Total Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Volumes Number of volumes in the storage group.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

Last Updated Timestamp of the most recent changes to the storage group.

Child Storage Groups Number of child storage groups contained in this (parent) storage

group. This field only displays for parent storage groups.

Parent Storage Groups Number of storage groups of which this storage group is a child. This

field only displays for child storage groups.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

158 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host I/O Limit Whether the host I/O limit feature is enabled. For more information, see

Setting host I/O limits on page 147.

Set Host I/O Limit (MB/Sec) Enables you to specify the maximum bandwidth.

Host I/O Limit (MB/Sec) Maximum bandwidth (in MB per second). Valid values range from

1 MB/sec to 100,000 MB/sec.

Set Host I/O Limit (IO/Sec) Enables you to specify the maximum IOPs.

Host I/O Limit (IO/Sec) Maximum IOPs (in I/Os per second). Valid values range from 100

IO/Sec to 100,000 IO/sec.

Set Dynamic Distribution Enables/disables dynamic distribution of host I/O limits. This

feature requires Enginuity 5876.163.105 or higher. Possible values are:

Always Enables full dynamic distribution mode. When enabled, the configured host

I/O limits will be dynamically distributed across the configured ports, thereby allowing the limits on each individual port to adjust to fluctuating demand.

OnFailure Enables port failure capability. When enabled, the fraction of configured host

I/O limits available to a configured port will adjust based on the number of ports currently online.

Never Disables this feature (Default).

The following controls are available:

Expand See Expanding storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 127.

Delete See Deleting storage groups on page 146.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the storage

group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the storage group. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Masking Views - 2 will open a view listing the two masking views associated with the storage group.

Performance Views panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance monitor and analyze views for the storage group.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected storage system is not registered for data collection.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 159

FAST Compliance Report panel

The FAST Compliance Report provides the following information:

Tier Tier name.

Protection RAID protection level.

Technology Disk technology.

Max SG Demand (%) The percentages for the storage group per tier as defined in the FAST

Policy.

Limit (GB) Upper limit in GB per tier for the storage group.

Fast SG Used (GB) Current occupancy in GB of the storage group in the tier.

Growth (GB) Per the FAST policy, how much more the storage group can grow in GB on a

given tier. This also indicates compliance. If the growth is negative that means the storage group has exceeded the capacity limit for this tier and is out of compliance.

Viewing backup storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view storage groups protected by ProtectPoint.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Backup to open the Backup Replication view.

The following properties display:

Partially protected storage groups will not appear in this view. For example, after adding a volume to a storage group protected by ProtectPoint, the storage group is considered partially protected, in which case it will no longer appear in this view. The storage group will remain in this state until you expand it using ProtectPoint, after which it will be considered fully protected, and reappear in this view.

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All volumes are in a normal state.

Warning One or more volumes in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more volumes in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Snapshot Name of the snaphshot.

Capacity Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Backup Storage Group Name of the backup storage group.

Last Creation Time Date, time, and generation number for the snapshot.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

160 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following control is available:

Manage Protection Viewing snapshots on page 409

Viewing point-in-time storage groups

This procedure explains how to view storage groups protected by TimeFinder/SnapVX, TimeFinder/Clone, or TimeFinder/Mirror.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard (applies only for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher).

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Point in Time to open the Point in Time view.

The Point in Time view consists of the following tabs, depending on the storage environment: SnapVX:

Applies only for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The following properties display:

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All volumes are in a normal state.

Warning One or more volumes in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more volumes in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Snapshot Name of the snaphshot.

Last Creation Time Date, time, and generation number for the snapshot.

The following controls are available:

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on page 401

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Manage Protection Viewing snapshots on page 409

Clone:

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All volumes are in a normal state.

Warning One or more volumes in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 161

Error One or more volumes in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Replication Management Group Replication management group containing the storage

group.

Link States Lists the pair states found in the management group.

Group Type Type of management group.

The following controls are available:

Activate See Activating clone copy sessions on page 374.

Recreate See Recreating clone copy sessions on page 375.

Split See Splitting clone volume pairs on page 380.

Restore See Restoring data from target volumes on page 379.

Manage Protection Viewing snapshots on page 409

Mirror:

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All volumes are in a normal state.

Warning One or more volumes in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more volumes in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Replication Management Group Replication management group containing the storage

group.

Link States Lists the pair states found in the management group.

Group Type Type of management group.

The following controls are available:

Establish See Creating Snapshots on page 416.

Restore See Restoring BCV pairs on page 417.

Split See Splitting BCV pairs on page 419.

Cancel See Cancelling BCV pairs on page 419.

Manage Protection Viewing snapshots on page 409

Chapter 4: Storage Management

162 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing remote replication storage groups

This procedure explains how to view storage groups protected by SRDF. Note that for the Protection Dashboard showing SRDF protected SGs, only R1 SGs will appear in the Application Protection section and Storage Group Protection counts. An R2 SG will appear in the SG Protection count and Application Protection list, if it is an R1 in an R21 setup.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard (applies only for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher).

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Remote Replication to open the Remote Replication view.

The following properties display:

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All pairs are in a normal state.

Warning One or more oairs in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more pairs in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Replication Management Group Replication management group associated with the

storage group.

Link States State of the SRDF links.

Multiple Replicas SRDF configuration.

The following controls are available:

Establish See Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453.

Split See Splitting SRDF pairs on page 469.

Suspend Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470

Restore See Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466.

Resume Resuming SRDF links (page 462)

Failover Failing over (page 454)

Failback Failing back (page 455)

Manage Protection Select a Storage Group and click Manage Protection to navigate to

the SRDF Storage Group List view displaying the SRDF storage groups.

Viewing high availability storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view high availability SRDF/metro storage groups.

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 163

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard (applies only for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher).

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click High Availability to open the Remote Replication view.

The following properties display:

State State severity of the SRDF/Metro storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All pairs are in a normal state.

Warning One or more oairs in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more pairs in the group are in an Error state.

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Replication Management Group Replication management group associated with the

storage group.

Link States State of the SRDF links.

Bias Location Bias location.

The following controls are available:

Establish See Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453.

Suspend Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470

Restore See Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466.

Set Bias Location Setting bias location (page 467)

Manage Protection Select a Storage Group and click Manage Protection to navigate

to the SRDF/Metro Storage Group List view displaying the SRDF/Metro storage groups.

Viewing total storage groups

This procedure explains how to view all storage groups on a storage system, regardless of whether they are proctected:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard (applies only for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher).

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Totalto open the All Storage Groups list view.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

164 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following properties display:

Storage Group Name of the storage group. Parent storage groups are preceded by an

arrow (>) icon. Click the icon to view child storage groups.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Service Level Service level associated with the storage group.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

The following controls are available:

Protect See Protecting storage groups on page 133.

Manage Storage Groups Managing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on

page 118

Set SRDF GCM Setting the SRDF GCM flag on page 467

Reset SRDF/Metro Identity Resetting original device identity on page 465

Set Volume Status Setting volume status on page 468

Viewing unprotected storage groups

This procedure explains how to view unprotected storage groups.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Unprotected to open the Unprotected Storage Groups list view.

The following properties display:

Storage Group Name of the storage group. Parent storage groups are preceded by an

arrow (>) icon. Click the icon to view child storage groups.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the storage group in GB.

Masking Views Number of masking views associated with the storage group.

The following controls are available:

Protect See Protecting storage groups on page 133.

Manage Storage Groups Managing storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on

page 118

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Storage groups 165

Fully Automated Storage Tiering

Understanding FAST (HYPERMAX OS 5977)

This section describes FAST operations for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977. Understanding FAST (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 177 describes FAST operations on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Fully Automated Storage Tiering (FAST) automates management of storage system disk resources on behalf of thin volumes. FAST automatically configures disk groups to form a Storage Resource Pool by creating thin pools according to each individual disk technology, capacity and RAID type.

FAST technology moves the most active parts of your workloads (hot data) to high-performance flash disks and the least-frequently accessed storage (cold data) to lower-cost drives, leveraging the best performance and cost characteristics of each different drive type. FAST delivers higher performance using fewer drives to help reduce acquisition, power, cooling, and footprint costs. FAST is able to factor in the RAID protections to ensure write heavy workloads go to RAID 1 and read heavy workloads go to RAID 6. This process is entirely automated and requires no user intervention.

FAST further provides the ability to deliver variable performance levels through service levels. Thin volumes can be added to storage groups and the storage group can be associated with a specific service level to set performance expectations.

FAST monitors the storage groups performance relative to the service level and automatically provisions the appropriate disk resources to maintain a consistent performance level.

On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, FAST is always on. The VMAX3 Family Product Guide provides additional details about FAST operations in this storage environment.

Understanding Service Levels

A service level is the response time target for the storage group. The service level allows you set the VMAX array with the desired response time target for the storage group. It automatically monitors and adapts to the workload in order to maintain (or meet) the response time target. The service level includes an optional workload type so you can further tune expectations for the workload storage group to provide just enough flash to meet your performance objective.

Renaming service levels

This procedure explains how to rename service levels. Once renamed, all active management and reporting activities will be performed on the newly named service level . The original, pre-configured service level name will be maintained in the Service Level view for future reference. All other references to the original service level will display the new name.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

166 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Service level must be unique from other service levels on the storage system and cannot

exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and hyphens (-) are allowed. However, service level names cannot start or end with an underscore or hyphen.

To rename service levels:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Service Level to open the Service Level view.

3. Hover the cursor over the service level and click Edit ( ).

4. Type the new name over the existing name.

5. Click OK.

Reverting to original service level names

This procedure explains how to revert a renamed service level to its original, pre-configured name.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Service level must be unique from other service levels on the storage system and cannot

exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and hyphens (-) are allowed. However, service level names cannot start or end with an underscore or hyphen.

To rename service levels:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Service Level to open the Service Level view.

3. Hover the cursor over the service level and click Edit ( ).

4. Type the original, pre-configured name.

5. Click OK.

Viewing service levels

This procedure explains how to view information on the available service levels.

A service level is the response time target for the storage group. The service level allows you set the VMAX array with the desired response time target for the storage group. It automatically monitors and adapts to the workload in order to maintain (or meet) the response time target. The service level includes an optional workload type so you can further tune expectations for the workload storage group to provide just enough flash to meet your performance objective.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 167

To view service levels:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Service Level to open the Service Level view.

Available service levels appear in white and unavailable appear grayed-out.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond.

3. Optional: To rename a service level, hover the cursor over the service level and click Edit ( ). Type the new name over the existing name.

4. Optional: To provision storage using a service level, hover the cursor over the service level and click Provision Storage. This will open the Provision Storage wizard, with the Service Level and Storage Resource Pool already selected. For more information on using the wizard, refer to its help page.

5. To view details on the Expected Average Response Times, click Show Details. Response time details for each service level display. Where OLTP workload is focused on optimizing performance for small block I/O and DSS workload is focused on optimizing performance for large block I/O. The Workload Type can also specify whether to account for any overhead associated with replication (OLTP_Rep and DSS_Rep, where denotes replication).

Understanding Storage Resource Pool details

Storage Resource Pool is a collection of data pools that provide FAST a domain for capacity and performance management. By default, a single default Storage Resource Pool is factory pre- configured. Additional Storage Resource Pools can be created with a service engagement. FAST performs all its data movements within the boundaries of the Storage Resource Pool.

Modifying Storage Resource Pool details

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

To modify Storage Resource Pools:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, under Reports, click View SRP Details to open the SRP Details view.

4. Modify any number of the following:

Name Name of the storage resource pool. To change this value, type a new description and click Apply. The name of the storage resource pool must be unique and it cannot exceed 32 characters. It can include only alphanumeric, underscore, and hyphen characters, but cannot begin with an underscore or hyphen character.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

168 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Description Optional description of the pool. To change this value, type a new description and click Apply. The description cannot exceed 127 characters. It can contain only alphanumeric, hyphen, underscore, space, period, and comma characters.

Reserved Capacity % (0 - 80) The percentage of the capacity of the Storage Resource Pool to be reserved for volume write I/O activities. Valid values for the percentage are from 1 to 80. NONE disables it.

For example, if you set the reserved capacity on a Storage Resource Pool to 30%, then the first 70% of the pool capacity is available for general purpose operations (host I/O allocations, local replication tracks and SRDF/A DSE allocations) and the final 30% of the pool capacity is reserved strictly for volume write I/O activities.

Note that existing TimeFinder snapshot sessions created on volumes in the Storage Resource Pool are invalid if the free capacity of the Storage Resource Pool, as a percentage of the usable capacity, goes below the reserved capacity.

Usable by RDFA DSE Specifies whether the Storage Resource Pool can be used for SRDF/A DSE operations. This field does not display for external SRPs. The maximum amount of storage from a Storage Resource Pool that can be used for DSE is controlled by the system wide dse_max_cap setting, as described in the Solutions Enabler SRDF Family CLI User Guide.

5. Click Apply.

Viewing Storage Resource Pools

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to open the Storage Resource Pool view from the main menu.

You can also open it from Storage Groups Dashboard.

To view Storage Resource Pools:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Resource Pools to open the Storage Resource Pools view.

3. Select the tab for the storage resource pool you want to view.

The Storage Resource Pool view allows you to view and manage storage resource pools. It contains Properties, Related Objects, and Disk Groups panel: on page 171 panels.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 169

Properties panel:

The following properties display:

Name Name of the storage resource pool. To change this value, type a new description and

click Apply. The name of the storage resource pool must be unique and it cannot exceed 32 characters. It can include only alphanumeric, underscore, and hyphen characters, but cannot begin with an underscore or hyphen character.

Description Optional description of the pool. To change this value, type a new description

and click Apply. The description cannot exceed 127 characters. It can contain only alphanumeric, hyphen, underscore, space, period, and comma characters.

Default Emulation The default emulation for the pool (FBA or CKD).

Usable Capacity (GB) Usable capacity of all the disk groups in the Storage Resource Pool,

excluding any external disk groups used for FTS encapsulation.

Allocated Capacity (GB) Sum of the volume allocations, snapshot allocations, and SRDF/A

DSE allocations on the Storage Resource Pool.

Free Capacity (GB) Difference between the usable and allocated capacities.

Subscription (GB) Percentage of the configured sizes of all the thin volumes subscribed

against the Storage Resource Pool.

Reserved Capacity % (0 - 80) Percentage of the Usable Capacity that will be reserved for

non-snapshot activities. Existing TimeFinder snapshot sessions created on volumes in the Storage Resource Pool can go invalid if the Free Capacity of the Storage Resource Pool, as a percentage of the Usable Capacity, goes below the Reserved Capacity. To change this value, type a new value over the old, and click Apply.

Usable by RDFA DSE Specifies whether the Storage Resource Pool can be used for SRDF/A

DSE operations. This field does not display for external SRPs.

The following controls are available:

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, changing the Reserved

Capacity %.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Add eDisk Adding external disks on page 291

Related Objects panel:

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in the pool. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Service Levels - 2 will open a view listing the two service levels in the storage resource pool.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

170 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Disk Groups panel:

The Disk Groups panel lists details on the disk groups in the SRP, including:

Name Name of the disk group.

For external disk groups, clicking on the disk group name opens a list of external disks. For more information, refer to Filtered results table.

Vendor Vendor and product ID.

Speed (RPM) Speed of the disks in the disk group.

Usable Capacity (GB) Usable capacity in the disk group.

Disk Location Specifies if the disk group is internal or external.

Changing Storage Resource Pools for storage groups

This procedure explains how to change the Storage Resource Pool of a parent storage group, with child service levels using different Storage Resource Pools.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the Storage Groups Dashboard. In eNAS environments, you can also perform this operation from the File Storage Groups page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 171

To change the Storage Resource Pool for storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group, click more , and select Change SRP to open the Change SRP dialog box.

5. Select the new SRP.

6. Optional: Change the Service Level for the SG. Service level objectives specify the characteristics of the provisioned storage, including maximum response time, workload type, and priority. This field defaults to None if you set the Storage Resource Pool to None. Possible values are:

Service level Performance type Use case

Diamond Ultra high HPC, latency sensitive

Platinum Very high Mission critical, high rate OLTP

Gold High Very heavy I/O, database logs, datasets

Silver Price/Performance Database datasets, virtual applications

Bronze Cost optimized Backup, archive, file

Optimized (Default)

  Places the most active data on the highest performing storage and the least active on the most cost-effective storage.

For all-flash storage systems, the only service level available is Diamond and it is selected by default.

7. Optional: Refine the service level by selecting the Workload Typeto assign it.

8. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Viewing Storage Resource Pool alerts

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view Storage Resource Pool alerts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Group Dashboard to open the Storage Group Dashboard.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

172 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, click the number of SRP alerts to open the SRP Alerts list view.

The following properties display:

State State of the alert. Possible values are New or Acknowledged.

Severity Alert's severity. Possible values are:

(1) Fatal

(2) Critical

(3) Warning

(4) Information

(5) Normal

Type Type of alert. Possible values are Array, Performance, Server, and System.

Object Object to which the alert is related. This field will appear blank for server alerts.

This is because server alerts are specific to the server or runtime environment and are not associated with a specific object or Symmetrix system.

Description Description of the alert.

Created Date/time the alert was created.

Acknowledged Date/time the alert was acknowledged.

Acknowledger ID of the user who acknowledged the alert.

The following controls are available:

View Details Viewing Storage Resource Pool alert details below

Acknowledge Acknowledging Storage Resource Pool alerts on the next page

Delete Deleting Storage Resource Pool alerts on the next page

Viewing Storage Resource Pool alert details

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view Storage Resource Pool alerts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Group Dashboard to open the Storage Group Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, click the number of SRP alerts to open the SRP Alerts list view.

4. Select the alert and click View Details.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 173

Acknowledging Storage Resource Pool alerts

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view Storage Resource Pool alerts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Group Dashboard to open the Storage Group Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, click the number of SRP alerts to open the SRP Alerts list view.

4. Select one or more alerts and click Acknowledge.

Deleting Storage Resource Pool alerts

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view Storage Resource Pool alerts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Group Dashboard to open the Storage Group Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, click the number of SRP alerts to open the SRP Alerts list view.

4. Select one or more alerts and click Delete.

Service level compliance

Each service level and workload type has a response band associated with it. When a storage group (workload) is said to be compliant, it means that it is operating within the associated response time band.

When assessing the compliance of a storage group, Workload Planner calculates its weighted response time for the past 4 hours and for the past 2 weeks, and then compares the two values to the maximum response time associated with its given service level. If both calculated values fall within (under) the service level defined response time band, the compliance state is STABLE. If one of them is in compliance and the other is out of compliance, then the compliance state is MARGINAL. If both are out of compliance, then the compliance state is CRITICAL.

Creating compliance reports

This procedure explains how to create compliance reports. Compliance reports allow you to view storage group performance against service levels over a period of time.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

174 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The user must be a StorageAdmin permissions or higher.

To create compliance reports:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Group Management panel, under Manage, click View Compliance Report to open the report.

4. Click Schedule to open the Create Report dialog box.

5. On the General tab, do any number of the following:

a. Type a Name for the report.

b. Type a Description for the report.

c. Select the time zone in which the report will be generated (Generated Time Zone).

6. On the Schedule tab, do any number of the following:

a. Select the First Runtime.

b. Select the Day(s) to Run.

c. Select the number of days that the report should be retained (Retention (Days)).

7. On the Email tab, select Send report to and type an email address.

8. Click OK.

Viewing compliance reports

This procedure explains how to view storage group performance against service levels over a period of time.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The user must be a StorageAdmin permissions or higher.

To view service level compliance reports:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Group Management panel, under Manage, click View Compliance Report to open the report.

4. Optional: Customize the report by doing the following:

a. Select to view All Service Levels or a specific service level.

b. Select the time period. For the time period you select, WLP will assess the storage group's compliance in 30 minute intervals, and then display its overall compliance state based on the method described in Service level compliance on the previous page. For example, if you select Last 24 hours, WLP will assess the storage group's compliance state 48 times, and then display its calculated compliance state in this report.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 175

c. Select whether to view the compliance information as a chart or numerical display.

The following properties display:

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Service Level Service level associated with the storage group.

% Stable Percentage of time the storage group performed within the service level

target.

% Marginal Percentage of time the storage group performed below the

service level target.

% Critical Percentage of time the storage group performed well below the service level

target.

The following controls are available:

Save As Save the report as a JPG, PNG, or PDF file

Schedule Exporting the Storage Group Demand Reports on the facing page

Monitor Open the Performance Monitor page for the storage group

Storage Group Demand Reports

Viewing Storage Group Demand Reports

This procedure explains how to view storage groups on an SRP and their associate workloads.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view storage group demand reports:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, under Reports, click Storage Group Demand Report to open the report.

The following properties display:

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

Subscription (GB) Amount of SRP capacity to which the storage group subscribed.

Allocated (%) The percentage of allocated pool capacity.

Snap Allocated (%) The percentage allocated to snap.

The following control is available:

Export Report Exporting the Storage Group Demand Reports on the facing page

Chapter 4: Storage Management

176 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Exporting the Storage Group Demand Reports

This procedure explains how to export a portable document format (PDF) version of the Storage Group Demand Report:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools panel, under Reports, click Storage Group Demand Report to open the report.

4. Click Export Report.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

6. Select a location for the download and click Save.

Understanding FAST (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

This section describes FAST operations for storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876. Understanding FAST (HYPERMAX OS 5977) on page 166 describes FAST operations on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Fully Automated Storage Tiering (FAST) is software that runs background algorithms to continuously analyze the utilization (busy rate) of the storage system volumes. The FAST controller processes the algorithm data, and generates plans for moving and swapping data volumes to fine tune performance and reduce costs. FAST can move the most-used data to the fastest (and most expensive) storage, such as Enterprise Flash Drives (EFD), the least-used data to the slowest (and least expensive) storage, such as SATA drives, while maintaining the remaining data on Fibre Channel (FC) drives, based on user-defined Symmetrix tiers and FAST policies. The objective of tiered storage is to minimize the cost of storage, while improving or maintaining performance, by putting the right data, on the right Symmetrix tier, at the right time.

Enginutiy 5876 introduced Federated Tiered Storage (FTS), which allows the virtualization of external storage as an external disk (eDisk). Adding the eDisk to the Symmetrix system makes its capacity available to the Symmetrix system as an external spindle. FAST VP supports tiers of externally provisioned VP pools. Encapsulated volumes are not supported. There is no support for externally provisioned or encapsulated (standard) volumes with FAST. The new order for the fastest to the slowest tiers is EFD, FC, SATA, and external tiers.

Enginutiy 5876.159.102 or higher supports associating FTS tiers with a technology type. The technology associated with the FTS tier indicates the tier's expected performance to the FAST VP controller. This enables you to place the FTS tier at the right location for the expected performance of the external tier.

After configuration, FAST can be set to move/swap data automatically or with user approval. All three drive technologies (EFD, FC, SATA), or external disks (eDisks) are not required in the Symmetrix system to use FAST.

On storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, FAST is a license-able feature. The Solutions Enabler Array Controls CLI Guide provides additional details about FAST in this storage environment.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 177

FAST versions

There are two versions of FAST: FAST for Disk Provisioning (DP) and FAST for Virtual Pools (FAST VP). The following table identifies the differences between the versions:

FAST DP FAST Virtual Pools

Requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876 Requires Enginuity 5875 - 5876

Supports standard volumes Supports thin volumes

Supports FBA and CKD volume emulation

Supports FBA volume emulation

Enginuity 5876 supports thin CKD 3390 and thin IBM i 512 volumes

Disk group provisioing (DP) tiers: contain disk groups

Virtual pool (VP) tiers: contain thin pools

DP modes: Auto Approve and User Approve

VP modes: Auto Approve or None

User visible data movement plans and history

No plans or history generated

Federated Tiered Storage (eDisks) not supported

Supports Federated Tiered Storage (eDisks) with Enginuity 5876 or higher

Thin volume/thin pool compression not supported

Supports compression for thin volumes and thin (VP) pools

Up to three tiers per policy supported Up to four VP tiers per policy with Enginuity 5876.159.102 or higher

Table 2: Comparison of FAST and Fast Virtual Pools (VP)

Configuration overview

The following are the basic steps for configuring FAST in a Symmetrix system:

1. Create a set of Symmetrix tiers. A Symmetrix tier is a specification of the type of storage (EFD, FC, SATA, or eDisks) and resources (disk groups/virtual pools) from which storage will be selected. With FAST, from one to four tiers are grouped together into a policy.

2. Create a set of storage groups. A storage group is a group of volumes. When used with FAST, a storage group is associated with a FAST policy and assigned a priority.

3. Create a FAST policy. A FAST policy is a set of one to three DP tiers or one to four VP tiers, but not a combination of both DP and VP tiers. Policies define a limit for each tier in the policy. This limit determines how much data from a storage group associated with the policy is allowed to reside on the tier.

4. Associate the storage groups with the FAST policy. A storage group can only be associated with one policy; however, one policy can be associated with multiple storage groups.

The association between a storage group, FAST policy, and Symmetrix tiers is illustrated in the following figure:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

178 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Managing FAST

Time windows define when the FAST controller should collect performance information or execute data movement. Time windows are described in Understanding time windows.

Control parameters define the numbers of and types of volumes, the modes of operation, the thresholds for data movement, and the analysis time period. Control parameters are described in FASTcontroller (page 196).

Monitoring FAST

Once you have configured FAST on a storage system, you can use the FAST dashboard to monitor its status, as described in Monitoring FAST (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) (page 180).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 179

Monitoring FAST (Enginuity 5874 - 5876)

The FAST dashboard provides you with a single place from which to examine FAST data, including status and demand reports, and information on policies and storage groups under FAST control. In addition, you can manage the FAST polices on a Symmetrix system.

Before you begin:

The FAST dashboard is only available for storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To refresh the information displayed in the FAST dashboard, click refresh Symmetrix ( ) in the status bar, or exit/return to the FAST dashboard.

To access the FAST dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST .

FAST dashboard

The FAST dashboard contains the following components: Fast Type

If the storage system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, use this option to toggle the monitor between the two features; otherwise, the licensed feature will appear selected for you. The FAST Status Report, FAST Policies, Tiers Demand Report, and Storage Groups Under FAST Control view panels will update according to the feature you select. FAST Status Report

Displays information on the current state of FAST and some of the more important FAST settings, including:

Settings Opens the FAST Settings dialog box, from which you modify FAST settings. For

more information, refer to FASTcontroller on page 196.

State The current state of FAST on the storage system. Possible values are:

Enabled The FAST controller is Enabled.

Disabled The FAST controller is Disabled.

Disabling The FAST controller is transitioning from Enabled to Disabled. This state does not apply in

Enabling The FAST controller is transitioning from Disabled to Enabled.

Disabled with Error The FAST controller is disabled with an error.

Degraded The FAST controller is activated but not fully functional because of any of the following reasons: missing DRV volumes or because of some other reason. When degraded, moves are possible; however, static swaps are not.

Data Movement Mode The mode in which the FAST controller is operating. Possible values are:

Automatic The FAST controller will continuously perform data movement within the time window, without user intervention.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

180 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

User Approved The FAST controller will generate plans, but not perform any movements without user approval. This value only applies to FAST DP.

Off The FAST controller will not perform any data movements for thin volumes. This value only applies to FAST VP.

Current Activities The current FAST activity. Possible values are:

RunningPlan FAST is currently moving or swapping data according to plan.

Idle  FAST is enabled, but not running a plan.

Time Windows

Performance Time Window Indicates whether FAST is operating within a defined performance time window. Possible values are:

Closed  Indicates that FAST is operating within a performance time window.

Open   Indicates that FAST is operating outside a performance time window (that is, the last performance time window has expired, the next performance time window has yet to start, or there are no performance time windows defined.

Move Time Window Indicates whether FAST is operating within a defined move time window. Possible values are:

Closed Indicates that FAST is operating within a move time window.

Open Indicates that FAST is operating outside a move time window (that is, the last move time window has expired, the next move time window has yet to start, or there are no move time windows defined.

FAST Policies

Allows you view and manage the FAST policies on the Symmetrix system. This view panel includes the following attributes:

Manage Policies Opens the FAST Policies list view, from which you can manage the FAST

Policies on the Symmetrix system.

Policy List Lists the policies on the Symmetrix system, including the following:

Policy Name Name of the policy.

Tier 1 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 1 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to the Symmetrix tier 1.

Tier 2 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 2 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to the Symmetrix tier 2.

Tier 3 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 3 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to the Symmetrix tier 3.

Tier 4 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 4 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to the Symmetrix tier 4.

This view panel displays up to 4 tiers is for FAST VP policies and up to 3 tiers for FAST policies.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 181

# Associated Storage Groups Number of storage groups associated with the policy. Tiers Demand Report

Allows you view the demand on each tier in the storage system, as either a chart or a table.

The chart format provides the following information for each tier, displayed in Alphabetical or Used order.:

Used The amount of storage that has already been used on the tier, in GB.

Free The amount of free/unused storage on the tier, in GB.

Max SG Demand The maximum amount of storage that FAST could put on the tier, in GB.

Available to FAST The amount of storage available to FAST VP on the tier, in GB. This is the

calculated by taking the total enabled capacity for the all the pools in the tier (sum of all enabled TDATs) minus the pool reserved capacity (PRC).

The table format provides the same information as the chart format, with the following additions:

Tech + Port The type of disk on which the tier resides and the tier's RAID protection level.

Excess (GB) The amount of excess storage available if FAST reaches the maximum of all the

percentages in the policies associated with storage groups on the tier, in GB. This value can be either positive or negative. A positive value indicates that there will be enough excess storage available for all the storage groups. A negative value indicates that there will not be enough excess storage available and storage groups will be competing against one another.

Storage Groups Under FAST Control

Allows you to view information on all of the storage groups under FAST control on the Symmetrix system, including:

Storage Group Name The name of the storage group.

FAST Policy The FAST Policy associated with the storage group.

Capacity Used Break Down Per Tier A graphic representation of where the storage group's

capacity resides in relation to the tiers in the FAST Policy.

Compliant Indicates whether the storage group is within compliance. A storage group is

compliant if all its volumes exist only on the tiers defined in the policy and the percentage capacity of all tiers it occupies are within the upper limits of the tier capacities specified in the

policy. indicates compliance. indicates non-compliance.

Symmetrix tiers

Creating Symmetrix tiers

This procedure explains how to create Symmetrix tiers.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

182 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The maximum number of tiers that can be defined on a storage system is 256.

When a disk group or thin pool is specified, its technology type must match the tier technology.

Disk groups can only be specified when the tier include type is static.

A standard tier cannot be created if it will:

Lead to a mix of static and dynamic tier definitions in the same technology.

Partially overlap with an existing tier. Two tiers partially overlap when they share only a subset of disk groups. For example, TierA partially overlaps with TierB when TierA contains disk groups 1 & 2 and TierB contains only disk group 2. (Creating TierA will fail.)

To create a Symmetrix tier:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

3. Click Create Tierto open the Create Tier dialog box. When this dialog box first opens, the chart displays the configured and unconfigured space on the selected Symmetrix system. Once you select a disk group or thin pool, this chart will display the configured and unconfigured space of the selected object.

4. Type a Tier Name. Tier names must be unique and cannot exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) are allowed, however, the name cannot start with a hyphen or an underscore. Each tier name must be unique per Symmetrix system (across both DP and VP tier types), ignoring differences in case.

5. If the Symmetrix system on which you are creating the tier is licensed to perform FAST and FAST VP operations, select a Tier Type. Possible values are:

DP Tier A disk group tier is a set of disk groups with the same technology type. A disk

group tier has a disk technology type and a protection type. To add a disk group to a tier, the group must only contain volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

VP Tier A virtual pool tier is a set of thin pools. A virtual pool tier has a disk technology

type and a protection type. To add a thin pool to a tier, the thin pool must only contain DATA volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

6. If creating a VP tier, select the Emulation type of the thin pools to include in the tier. Only thin pools containing volumes of this emulation type will be eligible for inclusion in the tier.

7. Select the type of Disk Technology on which the tier will reside. Only disk groups or thin pools on this disk technology will be eligible for inclusion in the tier.

8. If you selected External disk technology for the tier, then select the type of External Technology.

9. Select the RAID Protection Level for the tier. Only disk groups or thin pools on this disk technology will be eligible for inclusion in the tier.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 183

10. Depending on the type of tier you are creating, select the disk groups or virtual pools to include in the tier.

11. If creating a DP tier, you can optionally specify to Include all future disk groups on matching technology to this tier. To do this, click Show Advanced, and select the option. Tiers created in this manner are considered dynamic tiers. Tiers created without this option are considered static tiers.

12. Click OK.

Modifying Symmetrix tiers

This procedure explains how to add and remove disk groups/thin pools from Symmetrix tiers.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

You can only modify tiers that are not part of a policy. For instructions on removing a tier from a

policy, refer to Modifying FAST policies.

You cannot create blank tiers in Unisphere for VMAX (that is, tiers without disk groups or thin

pools); however, you can use Unisphere to add disk groups or thin pools to blank tiers that were created in Solutions Enabler.

To modify a Symmetrix tier:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

3. Select the tier and click Modify to open the Edit Tier dialog box.

4. Add or remove disk groups/thin pools by selecting/clearing the corresponding check box.

5. If you are adding disk groups to a partially overlapped disk group tier (that is, a disk group tier that shares a subset of its disk groups with other disk group tiers) you must use the propagate option. To do this, click Show Advanced, and select Adjust all Diskgroup Tiers (Propagate).

6. Click OK.

Renaming Symmetrix tiers

This procedure explains how to rename Symmetrix tiers.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

184 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Tier names must be unique and cannot exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters,

hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) are allowed, however, the name cannot start with a hyphen or an underscore. Each tier name must be unique per Symmetrix system (across both DP and VP tier types), ignoring differences in case.

To rename a Symmetrix tier:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

3. Select the tier and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. Type a new name for the tier.

5. Click Apply.

Deleting Symmetrix tiers

This procedure explains how to delete Symmetrix tiers.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

You cannot delete tiers that are already part of a policy. To delete such a tier, you must first

remove the tier from the policy. For instructions, refer to Modifying FAST policies.

To delete a Symmetrix tier:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

3. Select the tier and click Delete.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Viewing Symmetrix tiers

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To view Symmetrix tiers:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

The Tiers list view allows you to view and manage the tiers on a Symmetrix system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 185

The following properties display:

Name Name of the tier.

Type Tier type. Possible values are:

Disk Group A disk group tier is a set of disk groups with the same technology type. A disk group tier has a disk technology type and a protection type. To add a disk group to a tier, the group must only contain volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

Virtual Pool A virtual pool tier is a set of thin pools. A virtual pool tier has a disk technology type and a protection type. To add a thin pool to a tier, the thin pool must only contain DATA volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

Technology Disk technology on which the tier resides.

Emulation Emulation type of the thin pools in the tier.

Used Capacity Amount of storage that has already been used on the tier, in GB.

Capacity (GB) Amount of free/unused storage on the tier, in GB.

Protection RAID protection level assigned to the volumes in the tier.

The following controls are available:

Create Tier See Symmetrix tiers on page 182.

Modify See Modifying Symmetrix tiers on page 184.

View Details See Viewing Symmetrix tier details below.

Delete See Deleting Symmetrix tiers on the previous page.

Viewing Symmetrix tier details

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To view Symmetrix tiers details:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Tiers to open the Tiers list view.

3. Select the tier and click View Details to open its Details view.

The tier Details view allows you to view and manage a Symmetrix tier. It contains Properties below, Related Objects on page 188, Performance Views, and Graphs on page 188 panels. There are multiple ways to open this view. Depending on the method used, not all of the following may apply.

Properties

The following properties display:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

186 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Name Name of the tier.

[OutOfTier]: If on a given technology there exists volumes that do not reside on any tier they will be shown as [OutOfTier]. This can happen when the protection type of volumes does not match the tier protection type, or when tiers are only defined on a subset of disk groups in a technology.

Is Static Whether the tier is static (Yes) or dynamic (No). With a dynamic tier, the

FAST controller will automatically add all future disk groups on matching disk technology to the tier. Tiers without this option enabled are considered static.

Type Tier type. Possible values are:

DP A disk group tier is a set of disk groups with the same technology type. A disk group tier has a disk technology type and a protection type. To add a disk group to a tier, the group must only contain volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

VP  A virtual pool tier is a set of thin pools. A virtual pool tier has a disk technology type and a protection type. To add a thin pool to a tier, the thin pool must only contain DATA volumes on the tier's disk technology type and match the tier protection type.

Technology Disk technology on which the tier resides.

If Disk Location is External then External Technology property displays and the technology value can be changed.

RAID Protection RAID protection level assigned to the volumes in the tier.

Attribute Status of the tier on the technology type. Possible values are:

Tier in a FAST Policy associated with storage groups.

Tier in a FAST Policy unassociated with storage groups.

Tier not in any FAST Policy.

Total Capacity (GB) Amount of free/unused storage on the tier, in GB.

Free Capacity (GB) Unconfigured space in Gigabytes in this tier. Free capacity for each disk

group in the tier will only count toward tier free capacity if the disk group has enough usable disks to support the tier target protection type.

FAST Usage (GB) Sum of hypers of all volumes in FAST storage group with matching RAID

protection that reside on this tier.

FAST Free (GB) If the tier is in a FAST policy associated with a storage group, the FAST Free

capacity in Gigabytes is the sum of FAST Usage, Free capacity and Space occupied by Not Visible Devices (Unmapped/Unmasked).

If the tier is not in any FAST policy or in policies where none of the policies are associated to a storage group, then the FAST Available capacity is same as FAST Usage.

Maximum SG Demand (GB) The calculated upper limit for the storage group on the tier.

Excess (GB)  Difference between FAST Free and Max SG Demand. If the tier is not in a FAST

policy or in policies where none of the policies are associated to a storage group, then this value is Not applicable.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 187

The following controls are available:

Modify See Modifying Symmetrix tiers on page 184.

Delete See Deleting Symmetrix tiers on page 185.

Apply Applies changes made to the tier name.

Cancel Cancels changes made to the tier name.

Related Objects

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in tier. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Disk Groups- 3 opens a view listing the three disk groups in the policy.

Performance Views panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance monitor and analyze views for the tier.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected Symmetrix system is not registered for data collection.

Graphs

The Graphs panel provides a graphic representation of the tier's used capacity over free space.

FAST policies

Creating FAST policies

A FAST policy is a set of one to three DP tiers or one to four VP tiers, but not a combination of both DP and VP tiers. Policies define a limit for each tier in the policy. This limit determines how much data from a storage group associated with the policy is allowed to reside on the tier.

Storage groups are sets of volumes. Storage groups define the volumes used by specific applications. Storage groups are associated with FAST policies, and all of the volumes in the storage group come under FAST control. The FAST controller can move these volumes (or data from the volumes) between tiers in the associated policy.

A storage group associated with a FAST policy may contain standard volumes and thin volumes, but the FAST controller will only act on the volumes that match the type of tier contained in the associated policy. For example, if the policy contains thin tiers, then the FAST controller will only act on the thin volumes in the associated storage group.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The maximum number of policies allowed per storage system is 256.

Policies must contain either disk group tiers or virtual pool tiers, but not a combination of both

disk group and virtual pool tiers.

Disk group tier policies can contains from one to three tiers.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

188 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Virtual pool tier policies can contain from one to four tiers. Only one out of the four tiers can be

an external tier.

Each tier must be unique and there can be no overlapping disk groups/thin pools.

The first tier added to a policy determines the type of tier the policy will contain.

A policy cannot have an empty tier.

You cannot create blank policies (that is, policies without at least one tier) in Unisphere for

VMAX; however, you can create such policies in Solutions Enabler. The Solutions Enabler Array Controls CLI Guide contains instructions on creating blank policies. Unisphere does allow you to manage blank policies.

You cannot add a standard tier to a policy if it will result in a configuration where two tiers share

a common disk group.

To create a FAST Policy:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type to which the policy will apply.

4. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies details view.

5. Click Create to open the Create FAST Policy dialog box.

6. Type a Policy Name. Policy names must be unique and cannot exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) are allowed, however, the name cannot start with a hyphen or an underscore.

7. Select the volume Emulation.

8. Select a Tier to add to the policy and then specify a storage group capacity for the tier (% MAX of Storage Group). This value is the maximum amount (%) of the associated storage group's logical capacity that the FAST controller can allocate to the tier. This value must be from 1 to 100. The total capacities for a policy must equal to or be greater than 100.

9. Repeat the previous step for any additional tiers you want to add.

10. Click OK.

Renaming FAST policies

This procedure explains how to rename FAST policies.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 189

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Policy names must be unique and cannot exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters,

hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) are allowed, however, the name cannot start with a hyphen or an underscore.

To rename a FAST Policy:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies details view.

5. Select the tier and click View Details to open the policy's Details view.

6. Type a new name for the policy.

7. Click Apply.

Deleting FAST policies

This procedure explains how to delete FAST policies.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

You cannot delete a policy that has one or more storage groups associated with it. To delete

such a policy, you must first disassociate the policy from the storage groups.

To delete a FAST Policy:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies list view.

5. Select the policy and click Delete.

6. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Associating FAST policies and storage groups

The procedure for associating FAST policies and storage groups, depends on whether you are associating a storage group with a policy or policy with a storage group.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Storage groups and FAST policies can only be associated under the following conditions:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

190 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The VMAX system is running Enginuity 5874 through 5876.

The storage group is not already associated with another policy. This restriction does not apply to Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5876.

The target FAST policy needs to have a least one pool that is part of the source policy in re- association activity.

The volumes in the new storage group are not already in a storage group associated with a FAST policy.

The policy has at least one tier.

The storage group only contains meta heads; meta members are not allowed.

The storage group does not contain moveable volumes. When a storage group is associated with a policy, you cannot add non-moveable volumes to it. Non-moveable volumes include:

CKD EAV

DRV

SFS

iSeries, ICOS, ICL

SAVE volumes

VDEVs

Diskless volumes

The storage group cannot contain a volume that is part of another storage group already

associated with another policy.

The Symmetrix system has less than the maximum number of allowed associations (8,192).

To associate a FAST policy with a storage group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies panel, click Manage Policies to open the Manage Policies view.

5. Select the policy and click Associate Storage Groups to open the Associate Storage Groups dialog box.

6. Select one or more storage groups, and then click either of the following:

OK to associate the storage group.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To have FAST factor the R1 volume statistics into move decisions made for the R2 volume, select Enable FAST [VP|DP] RDF Coordination. This attribute can be set on a storage group, even when there are no SRDF volumes in the storage group. This feature is only available if the Symmetrix system is part of an SRDF setup. Both R1 volumes and R2 volumes need to be running Enginuity version 5876 or higher for the FAST VP system to coordinate the moves. However, the setting of the RDF coordination attribute will not be prevented if one of the

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 191

Symmetrix systems is running an Enginuity level lower than 5876.

2. Click OK.

To associate a storage group with a FAST policy:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Associate to FAST to open the Associate to FAST Policy dialog box.

4. Select a policy and click OK.

Disassociating FAST policies and storage groups

1. Select the storage system.

2. In the navigation bar, click Storage to open the Storage section.

3. Click FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

4. Select the FAST Type.

5. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies details view.

6. Select the policy and click View Details to open the policy's details view.

7. In the Related Object view panel, click Storage Groups - nn to open the Storage Groups for FAST Policy details view.

8. Select the one or more storage groups and click Disassociate.

9. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

192 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Reassociating FAST polices and storage groups

This procedure explains how to reassociate a storage group with a new policy. When reassociating a storage group, all the current attributes set on the original association automatically propagate to the new association. This feature eliminates the previous process of disassociating a storage group, then associating the group to a new policy, and entering the attributes, such as priority, on the association.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The storage group name must be valid.

The storage group and policy must already exist on the Symmetrix system.

The storage group must be in an association before performing a reassociation.

The new policy for the storage group, must have the same emulation as the storage group. Mix

emulation association will result in an error.

The storage group cannot be associated with an empty policy, and the reassociated policy must

contain at least one tier.

The total of the capacity percentage for the target FAST policy must add up to at least 100%.

If the FAST policy contains VP Tiers, all of the thin devices in the storage group must be bound

to any VP pool in a tier in the policy. None of the thin devices can be bound to a pool outside of the policy.

To reassociate FAST Policies and storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Select the storage group, click more , and click Reassociate to FAST Policy to open the Reassociate to FAST Policy dialog box.

4. Select a policy and click OK.

Viewing FAST policies

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 193

To view FAST policies:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies list view.

Use the FAST Policies list view to view and manage FAST policies on a Symmetrix system.

The following properties display:

Policy Name Name of the policy.

Tier 1 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 1 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to

the Symmetrix tier 1.

Tier 2 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 2 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to

the Symmetrix tier 2.

Tier 3 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Tier 3 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to

the Symmetrix tier 3.

Tier 4 Symmetrix tier associated with the policy.

Up to 4 tiers is supported only for FAST VP policies. FAST policies support up to 3 tiers.

Tier 4 % Maximum amount (%) of an associated storage group that can be allocated to

the Symmetrix tier 4.

# Associated Storage Groups Storage group associated with the policy.

The following controls are available:

Create See FAST policies on page 188.

View Details See Viewing FAST policy details below.

Delete See Deleting FAST policies on page 190.

Associate Storage Groups Associating FAST policies and storage groups on page 190

Viewing FAST policy details

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

194 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To view FAST policy details:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Policies view block, click Manage Policies to open the FAST Policies list view.

5. Select the policy and click View Details to open its Details view.

The policy Details view allows you to view and manage a FAST Policy. It contains Properties, Related Objects, Performance Views, and Graphs panels.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Policy Name Name of the policy. To rename the policy, type a new name over the existing

and click Apply. Policy names must be unique and cannot exceed 32 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) are allowed, however, the name cannot start with a hyphen or an underscore.

Tier 1 - 3 (for FAST DP)

Tier 1 - 4 (for FAST VP) Symmetrix tier associated with the policy, followed by the maximum

amount (%) of the associated storage group's logical capacity that the FAST controller can allocate to the tier. This value must be from 1 to 100. The total capacities for a policy must be greater than or equal to 100. To change a tier, select another from the list, and click Apply. To change a maximum amount, type a new amount, and click Apply.

The following controls are available:

Associate Storage Groups Associating FAST policies and storage groups on page 190

Delete See Deleting storage groups on page 146.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the policy.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the FAST Policy. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Tiers - 3 will open a view listing the three tiers in the policy.

Performance Views panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance monitor and analyze views for the policy.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected Symmetrix system is not registered for data collection.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 195

Graphs panel

The Graphs panel includes graphic representations of the used and free space available for each tier in the policy. In addition, each chart includes markers for the following metrics:

Max SG Demand The calculated upper limit for the storage group on the tier.

Available to FAST The amount of storage available for FAST operations on the tier.

FASTcontroller

Setting FAST control parameters

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To set FAST control parameters:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the storage system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type.

4. In the FAST Status Report view block, click Settings to open the corresponding FAST [VP|DP] Settings dialog box.

5. Modify any number of the following parameters and click OK. Note that the parameters available to you depend on the version of FAST:

FAST DP FAST VP

Set State Enables/Disables the FAST controller. When Enabled, the FAST controller will move data between tiers based on the defined policies. When Disabled, the FAST controller will not move data between tiers. By default, the FAST controller is disabled.

Data Movement Mode Sets the mode of the FAST controller to automatic or user approval mode. If the FAST controller is set to user approval mode, it will generate plans, but not perform any movements unless the plans are approved by the user. This option is shared with Symmetrix Optimizer.

Maximum Moves Per Day (2-200) Specifies the maximum number of moves to perform in a 24 hour period, starting at 12:00 AM. Possible values range from 2 to 200, with 200 being the default. This option is shared with Symmetrix Optimizer.

Relocation Rate (1-10) Specifies the data movement mode for thin volumes. If set to Automatic, the FAST system will continuously perform data movement for thin volumes within the data movement window, without user intervention. If set to Off, the FAST controller will not perform any data movement for thin volumes. There is no equivalent to user approval mode for thin data movement.

Table 3: Comparison of FAST DP and Fast VP

Chapter 4: Storage Management

196 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

FAST DP FAST VP

Maximum Simultaneous Moves (2-32) Specifies the maximum number of moves that can be performed at one time. Possible values range from 2 to 32, with 32 being the default. This option is shared with Symmetrix Optimizer.

Pool Reserved Capacity (1-80) Specifies the capacity of each thin pool (percentage) that will be reserved for non-FAST activities. If the free space in a given thin pool (as a percentage of pool-enabled capacity) falls below this value, the FAST controller will not move any more chunks (a group of 12 tracks) into that pool. To move any new chunks to the pool, the FAST controller must first move some chunks from that pool to another pool to free up space. Enforcement of this parameter is best-effort; FAST may move chunks to a thin pool resulting in a violation because non-FAST activities (such as new allocations for writes to a thin volume) can simultaneously consume pool free capacity. Possible values range from 1 to 80, with 10 being the default.

Migration Restriction Specifies whether the FAST controller can perform swaps and moves, or only swaps.

Allocate by FAST Policy When enabled, the system chooses a pool for the policy when making an allocation for a thin volume.

Allow FAST to use volumes that are not visible to the host for full swaps Indicates if the FAST controller can use host invisible volumes (unmasked and unmapped) to do a full swap with volumes in storage groups under FAST control to improve the performance of the storage group. Possible values are ENABLE and DISABLE. The default is DISABLE.

Compression Attributes Enables FAST VP Compression.When enabled, the FAST controller will compress the members of any thin pool (for which this feature is enabled) according to the following attributes:

Time to Compress (40-400) Specifies how frequently

compression will occur. Valid values are 1 - 365 days. Default is 40 days.

Compression Rate (1-10) Specifies the compression

rate. Valid values are 1 (most aggressive to 10 (least aggressive). Default is 5.

You can enable this feature for a thin pool while creating it (Thin pools (page 258) or post creation in the pool's Details view (Viewing thin pool details (page 270)).

In addition, you can also manually control this feature at the storage group level (Managing VP compression on storage groups (page 149)).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 197

Pinning and unpinning volumes

Pinning volumes prevents any automated process such as FAST or Optimizer from moving them. However, you can still can manually move a pinned volume with Optimizer or migrate a pinned volume with Virtual LUN Migration.

The capacity of pinned volumes is counted for compliance purposes.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To pin and unpin volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes dashboard.

3. Select the volume type in tree menu and click View to open its list view.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select one of the following:

Pin To pin the volumes.

Unpin To unpin the volumes.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Time windows

Understanding time windows

Time windows are used by FAST, FAST VP, and Symmetrix Optimizer to specify when data can be collected for performance analysis and when moves/swaps can execute.

Unisphere for VMAX supports time windows in the enhanced format introduced in Enginuity 5875.139.93. To use time windows created in earlier versions of Enginuity,you must convert them according to the procedure in the Solutions Enabler Array Controls CLI Guide.

There are two types of time windows:

Performance time windows Specify when performance samples can be taken for analysis.

Move time windows Specify when moves/swaps are allowed to start or not start.

In addition, performance and move time windows can be further defined as open or closed:

Open When creating performance time windows, this specifies that the data collected in the

time window should be included in the analysis. When creating move time windows, this specifies that the moves can start within the time window. This type of time window is also referred to as inclusive.

Closed When creating performance time windows, this specifies that the data collected in

the time window should be excluded from analysis. When creating move time windows, this specifies that the moves cannot start within the time window. This type of time window is also referred to as exclusive.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

198 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Creating and modifying time windows

This procedure explains how to create/modify time windows.

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Time windows are used by FAST and Optimizer. Changes made to FAST time windows may also

affect Optimizer.

The maximum number of time windows that can be defined on a Symmetrix system is 128.

To create time windows:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > FAST to open the FAST dashboard.

3. If the Symmetrix system is licensed for both FAST DP and FAST VP, select the FAST Type to which the time window will apply.

4. In the FAST Status Report view block, click the type of time window you want to create/modify.

Depending on your selection, either the Performance Time Window or the Move Time Window dialog box opens.

5. In the Show field, click the calendar icon and select the week in which to define the time window.

6. Click Show Advanced.

7. Do the following, depending on whether you are creating/modifying an open or closed time window:

Open time window:

a. Click Manage next to the Open Time Windows (Inclusive) option to open Manage Open Performance Time Window dialog box.

b. Define the time window, by selecting one of the following options and clicking Add:

Always open Creates a single open time window for the entire week (Sunday to

Saturday).

All weekend (Fri:18:00 - Mon:00:00) Creates a single open time window for the

weekend (17:00 Friday to 8:00 Monday).

9:00-17:00 , Monday-Friday Creates five time windows, one for each day of the

work week.

17:00-8:00, Monday-Friday Creates five time windows, one for each of night of the

work week.

Custom Allows you to define your own time window.

c. Click OK to close the Manage dialog box.

Closed time window:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 199

a. Click Manage next to the Closed Time Windows (Exclusive) option to open Manage Closed Performance Time Windows dialog box.

b. Define the time window, by selecting a Start Date/Time and an End Date/Time, and clicking Add.

c. Click OK to close the Manage dialog box.

8. Define the following parameters:

Workload Analysis Period Specifies the amount of workload sampling to maintain for

sample analysis. Possible values are specified in units of time (hours, days, or weeks) and can range from 2 hours to 4 weeks, with the default being one week.

Time to Sample before First Analysis Specifies the minimum amount of workload

sampling to complete before analyzing the samples for the first time. When setting this parameter, be sure to allow enough time (usually a week) to establish a good characterization of the typical workload. This parameter allows you to begin operations before the entire Workload period has elapsed. Possible values range from 2 hours to the value specified for the Workload Analysis Period parameter, with the default being eight hours.

9. Click OK.

Understanding Workload Planner Workload Planner is a FAST component used to display performance metrics for applications and to model the impact of migrating the workload from one storage system to another (Analyzing FAST migration on page 203).

Workload Planner is supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977.

For storage groups to be eligible for Workload Planning, they must meet the following criteria:

On a locally attached storage system registered for performance. See Registering storage

systems on page 622 for instructions on registered storage systems.

Belong to only one masking view.

Under FAST control:

For storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977, they must be associated with a service level.

For storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, they must be associated with a FAST policy.

Contain only FBA volumes.

In addition, the Unisphere for VMAX server must be on an open systems host.

Viewing storage group workload (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher)

This procedure explains how to view the statistics used to compute the compliance of a storage group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

200 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, a Monitor role is required.

The storage system must be local and registered for performance.

Viewing storage group workload :

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click View details to open its details view.

5. If not already displaying, click the Compliance tab.

The Compliance tab allows you to view workload details, organized into the following panels: Service Level

The service level associated with workload (Storage Group). Service Level Compliance

The calculated compliance of the workload as measured against its service level. Capacity Trend

The percentage of change in the storage group capacity over the previous two weeks. Performance

Links you to the performance Analyzeand Monitor views for the storage group.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected VMAX system is not registered for data collection.

Weighted Averages

Displays the following charts:

Response time (ms) Displays the calculated weighted average response time in

milliseconds for the storage group over the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks, against the service level value range for the storage group.

IOs per sec Displays the calculated weighted average IOs/second for the storage

group over the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

CPU/Port Load Scores

Displays the following charts:

% Front end Displays the calculated IO load scores of the storage group's front-end

CPUs and ports as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Back end Displays the calculated IO load scores of the storage group's back-end

CPUs and ports as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

You can optionally toggle the format used to display the load scores between IOs/sec and MB/sec.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 201

Access Density Skew Scores:

Displays the load scores for the storage group in the following charts:

% High load Displays the calculated skew density score for the high load disks in

the storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Mixed load Displays the calculated skew density score for the mixed load disks

in the storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

% Low load Displays the calculated skew density score for the low load disks in the

storage group as a percentage of the storage group's expected values. The scores are calculated for the previous 4 hours and 2 weeks.

You can toggle the format used to display the load scores between the following views:

IOs/sec Displays the calculated skew scores for the storage group in IOs per

second.

MB/sec Displays the calculated skew scores for the storage group in megabytes

per second.

GB Displays the calculated skew scores for total data throughput (in GB) for the

storage group.

In general, the High load and Low load numbers should be between 25 and 175 and the Mixed load number should be between 50 and 150.

Higher skew storage groups should display the following characteristics for load (IOs/sec)  and Capacity:

IOs/sec Higher High load numbers and lower Low load numbers.

Capacity Higher Low load numbers and lower High load numbers.

Lower skew storage groups should display higher Mixed load numbers and lower High load and Low load numbers for load (IOs/sec) and Capacity.

When displaying load (IOs/sec):

Higher High load numbers indicate that it is easier for the system to provide lower

than expected response time for the storage group.

Higher Low load numbers indicate that it is more difficult for the system to keep the

storage group away from SATA storage.

When displaying Capacity:

Lower High load numbers indicate that the storage group can have low response

times while using less than expected amounts of Flash storage.

Lower Low load numbers indicate that the storage group cannot take advantage of

SATA storage.

The following controls are available if the storage system is running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

Save as Reference Workload Reference workloads on page 114

Chapter 4: Storage Management

202 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Reset Workload Plan Resetting Workload Plan below

Resetting Workload Plan

This procedure explains how to set the performance baseline expectations of a storage group to the characteristics currently measured for the previous two weeks.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, a StorageAdmin role is required.

Setting new performance baseline expectations:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group and click View details to open its details view.

2. If not already displaying, click the Compliance tab.

3. Click Reset Workload Plan.

4. Review the Current Scores and the projected New Baseline.

5. If satisfied, click OK.

Once complete, the Workload Planning tab will update with the newly calculated performance metrics.

Analyzing FAST migration

The FAST Array Advisor wizard will guide you through the process of determining the performance impact of migrating the workload from one storage system (source) to another storage system (target). If the wizard determines that the target storage system can absorb the added workload, it will automatically create all the necessary auto-provisioning groups to duplicate the source workload on the target storage system. 

Before you begin:

To perform the analysis portion of this procedure, a Monitor role is required.

To perform the migration preparation steps of this procedure, a StorageAdmin role is required.

The following migrations are supported:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 203

Source storage system

Target storage system

Enginuity 5874 - 5876 Enginuity 5874 - 5876 or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher

Target storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876 must

have at least one thin pool.

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher

The source storage system must be local and registered for Performance. Registering storage

systems on page 622 explains how to registered storage systems.

The storage group must:

Not be a child storage group. Only standalone or parent storage groups can be selected for analysis. If a parent storage group is selected, its child storage groups will be implicitly selected as well, and the analysis will apply to the entire collection of parent and child storage groups as a group.

Not have ongoing Workload Planning processing.

Be associated with a single masking view.

Only contain FBA volumes. It cannot be empty or contain only gatekeeper volumes.

Be associated with a service level (HYPERMAX OS 5977), or associated with a FAST policy (Enginuity 5874 - 5876).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

204 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To analyzing FAST migration:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 205

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from Storage Groups for File page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups).

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Select the storage group, click , and select FAST Array Advisor to open the FAST Array Advisor wizard.

2. Select the Target storage system to include in the analysis, or select All available arrays to include all available storage systems in the analysis.

3. Do the following, depending on your target storage system selection: For target storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select the Storage Resource Pool (SRP) to associate with the storage group.

b. Select the Service Level to associate with the storage group. If the storage group is a parent, this involves selecting service levels for each of the child storage groups.

c. Click Next.

d. Select the target storage system port configuration parameters to include in the analysis, including:

The Number of ports to use for the migrated storage group.

Whether to allow the system to select the most suitable ports (All available

ports), or to select Specific ports. Selecting the latter will display list of ports from which you can select. The port list includes the port identifier and whether the VSA bit is enabled (Enabled is indicated with a flag).

e. Click Next. For target storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

a. Select the FAST policy to associate with the storage group. If the storage group is a parent, this involves selecting policies for each of the child storage groups.

b. Click Next.

c. Select the target storage system port configuration parameters to include in the analysis, including:

The Number of ports to use for the migrated storage group.

Whether to allow the system to select the most suitable ports (All available

ports), or to select Specific ports. Selecting the latter will display list of ports from which you can select. The port list includes the port identifier and whether the VSA bit is enabled (Enabled is indicated with a flag).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

206 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

d. Click Next. For all available ports:

Click Next.

1. Determine the suitability of the migration:

This option is only available under certain circumstances. For more information, refer to Suitability Check restrictions.

Indicates a suitable migration.

Indicates a non-suitable migration.

In both cases, results are displayed in a bar chart by component (Front End, Back End, Cache) along with a score from 0 to 100 indicating the components expected availability on the target storage system after a potential migration.

The current score for the component is shown in gray, with the additional load for the component shown in green or red indicating suitability. The additional score is red if the current and additional loads total more than 100.

If the purposed migration is suitable, click Next; otherwise, click Back to configure another possible migration.

2. Prepare for the migration by reviewing the objects that will be created on the target storage system:

Each object will be named exactly as it is on the source storage system. In the case of naming conflicts, a numeric suffix will be appended to target name to guarantee uniqueness. If the resulting suffixed name is longer than the 64 character limit, the target name will be truncated and the suffix added to the shortened name.

Masking View Name of the masking view.

Storage Group:

Storage Group Name of the storage group. If the storage group is a parent, you can expand the entry to view its child storage groups.

Volumes Number of volumes to be created on the target storage system.

Capacity (GB) Capacity of the storage group.

Any host I/O limits set on the source storage group will be copied to the target storage group.

Port Group:

Port Group Name of the port group.

Port Name of the ports to be included in the port group.

Initiator Group:

Initiator Group Name of the initiator group. If the initiator group is a parent, you can expand the entry to view its child initiator groups.

Initiator Name of an initiator to be included in the initiator group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Fully Automated Storage Tiering 207

The initiator group created on the target storage system will be an exact copy of the source workload's associated initiator group, including all initiators, child initiator group relationships, and flags. If this target cannot be created exactly as the source, then an error message will return.

3. Click Finish. This will create all the necessary auto-provisioning groups to duplicate the source workload on the target storage system. This may take some time to complete. The process has multiple steps, marked with a dialog box indicating the success or failure of each. Should the process fail, any partially created objects will remain on the target storage system until manually removed.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

208 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Volume management

Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) For storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, the Volumes view provides you with a single place from which to view and manage all the volumes types on the system.

For instructions on managing volumes on storage systems running Enginuity versions 5671 - 5876, refer to Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) below.

To use the Volumes view:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes list view.

By default, the view opens displaying thin volumes.

3. Optional: Filter the volume list by doing the following:

a. Selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Volume Configuration Filters the list for volumes with a specific configuration.

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

b. Click Find to run the query now, or refine your query with conditional expressions, as described next.

c. In the Additional Criteria section, select values for the following, and then click Add Another. Repeat this step for each additional expression.

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Is equal to Establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

d. Click Find to filter the volume list.

For field and control descriptions, refer to the following volume-specific help pages:

TDEV Viewing thin volumes

DATA Viewing DATA volumes on page 254

Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) For storage systems running Enginuity versions 5671 - 5876, the Volumes dashboard provides a high-level view of all volumes on a storage system and a breakdown of the volume types.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 209

For instructions on managing volumes on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on the previous page.

To use the Volumes view:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes dashboard.

This dashboard contains two panels, All Volumes and Volumes Distribution Chart.

3. Expand the tree menu in the All Volumes panel to view the types/number of volumes on the Symmetrix system.

4. Double-click a volume type to open its list view, from which you can view details and perform operations on specific volumes.

All Volumes panel

The following properties display (Click a column heading to sort the list by that value):

General Volume Types High level volume container types such as, Regular, Virtual, Meta,

Private,

Volume Type Name of volume type container.

Number of Volumes Number of volumes in the container.

The following controls are available:

Emulation Filters the listed volumes by emulation type (ALL, FBA, CKD). This filter only appears when there are multiple emulations types available.

View Allows for viewing the various volume container types.

Volumes Distribution Chart

The Volumes Distribution Chart provides a pie chart representation of volume type percentages of the total volumes and the count for each volume type.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

210 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Creating volumes 1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment and the type of volumes you are creating: HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

TDEV Creating thin volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977) on page 218

Virtual Gatekeeper Creating virtual gatekeeper volumes on page 220

The maximum volume size supported on a VMAX3 system is 64 TB.

Enginuity 5671 - 5876:

DATA  Virtual Provisioning on page 252

Diskless Creating diskless volumes on the next page

DRV Creating DRV volumes on page 213

Gatekeeper Creating gatekeeper volumes on page 214

Regular Creating regular volumes on page 215

SAVE Creating SAVE volumes on page 216

TDEV Thin volumes on page 272

VDEV Creating VDEV volumes on page 221

In addition, you can also create volumes using a storage template, as described in Creating volumes using storage templates on page 220.

Creating DATA volumes

This procedure explains how to create DATA volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5671 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Private.

4. Select DATA as the Configuration.

5. Select the Disk Technology.

External disk technology is an option if the storage system has FTS (Federated Tiered Storage) enabled and available external storage.

6. Select the Emulation type.

7. Select the RAID Protection level.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 211

8. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

9. To add the new volumes to a specific thin pool, select one from Add to Pool. Pools listed are filtered on technology, emulation, and protection type.

10. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

The advanced options presented depend on the value selected for Add to Pool. Complete any of the following steps that are appropriate:

a. Select the Disk Group (number and name) in which to create the volumes. The list of disk groups is already filtered based on technology type selected above.

b. To enable the new volumes in the pool, select Enable volume in pool.

c. To rebalance allocated capacity across all the DATA volumes in the pool, select Start Write Balancing.

1. Click either of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating diskless volumes

This procedure explains how to create diskless volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5671 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

4. Select DLDEV as the Configuration.

5. Select the Emulation type.

6. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter the volume capacity.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

212 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To assign Dynamic Capability to the volumes, select one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to None.

RDF1_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 RDF volume.

RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R2 RDF volume.

RDF1_OR_RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 or R2 RDF volume.

The Define Meta panel only displays when attempting to create a volume larger than the value specified in the Minimum Auto Meta Size.

2. If Auto Meta is enabled on the system, and if you are attempting to create volumes larger than the Minimum Meta Capacity, specify values for the following in the Define Meta panel:

Member capacity (Cyl/MB/GB) Size of the meta members to use when creating the

meta volumes.

Configuration (Striped/Concatenated) Whether to create striped or concatenated meta

volumes.

3. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating DRV volumes

This procedure explains how to create DRV volumes on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity version 5773 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Private.

4. From Configuration, select DRV.

5. Select the Disk Technology on which to create the volumes.

6. Select the Emulation type.

7. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 213

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To create the volumes from a specific disk group, select one (disk group number and name) from Disk Group.

If Auto meta is enabled on the system then it displays as enabled with a green check mark.

2. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating gatekeeper volumes

This procedure explains how to create gatekeeper volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5773 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. To create a gatekeeper, complete the following steps:

a. In Volume Type, click Regular.

b. Select Gatekeeper as the Configuration.

To create a virtual gatekeeper, complete the following steps:

a. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

b. Select Virtual Gatekeeper as the Configuration.

4. Select the Emulation type.

5. Type the Number of Volumes to create.

6. If creating virtual gatekeepers, you can optionally bind them to a specific thin pool (Bind to Pool). Only thin pools with enabled DATA volumes and matching emulation are available for binding (except AS/400 which will bind to an FBA pool).

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

214 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Creating regular volumes

This procedure explains how to create regular volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5671 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In the Volume Type panel, click Regular.

4. Select the Configuration.

5. Select the Disk Technology.

External disk technology is an option if the storage system has FTS (Federated Tiered Storage) enabled and available external storage.

6. Select the Emulation type.

7. Select the RAID Protection level.

8. Specify the capacity to create by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

9. Click one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. z/OS Only: Type the SSID for the new volume, or click Select... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID.This is required for volumes on storage systems with ESCON or FICON directors (or mixed systems). This field is optional on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 or higher when reducing the number of mirrors.

2. To create the volumes from a specific Disk Group, select one (disk group number and name).

3. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique storage system

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 215

4. To assign Dynamic Capability to the volumes, select one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to None.

RDF1_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 RDF volume.

RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R2 RDF volume.

RDF1_OR_RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 or R2 RDF volume.

5. If Auto Meta is enabled on the system, and if you are attempting to create volumes larger than the Minimum Meta Capacity, specify values for the following in the Define Meta panel:

Member capacity (Cyl/MB/GB) Size of the meta members to use when creating the

meta volumes.

Configuration (Striped/Concatenated) Whether to create striped or concatenated meta

volumes.

6. Click either of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating SAVE volumes

This procedure explains how to create SAVE volumes on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity version 5773 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Private.

4. From Configuration, select SAVE. When creating SAVE volumes on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5875 for VMAXe, this field is set to 2-Way Mir, by default.

5. Select the Disk Technology.

External disk technology is an option if the Symmetrix system has FTS (Federated Tiered Storage) enabled and available external storage.

6. Select the Emulation type.

7. Select the RAID Protection level.

8. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

9. To add the new volumes to a specific pool, select one from Add to pool. SNAP and SRDF/A DSE pools listed are filtered on technology, emulation, and protection type selected above.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

216 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

10. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

If Auto meta is enabled on the system then it displays as enabled with a green check mark. Setting Advanced options:

1. Select the Disk Group (number and name) in which to create the volumes. The list of disk groups is already filtered based on technology type selected above.

2. To enable the new volumes in the pool, select Enable volume in pool.

If Auto meta is enabled on the system then it displays as enabled with a green check mark.

3. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating thin volumes (Enginuity 5773 - 5876)

This procedure explains how to create thin volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. For instructions on creating thin volumes on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, refer to Creating thin volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977) on the next page.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

4. Select Configuration (TDEV or BCV + TDEV) or thin volumes.

5. Select the Emulation type.

6. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

7. To bind the new volumes to a specific thin pool, select one from Bind to Pool. Only thin pools with enabled DATA volumes and matching emulation are available for binding (except AS/400 which will bind to an FBA pool).

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 217

Setting Advanced options:

1. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

2. To Allocate Full Volume Capacity, select the option.

3. If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

4. To assign Dynamic Capability to the volumes, select one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to None.

RDF1_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 RDF volume.

RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R2 RDF volume.

RDF1_OR_RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 or R2 RDF volume.

5. If Auto Meta is enabled on the system, and if you are attempting to create volumes larger than the Minimum Meta Capacity, specify values for the following in the Define Meta panel:

Member capacity (Cyl/MB/GB) Size of the meta members to use when creating the

meta volumes.

Configuration (Striped/Concatenated) Whether to create striped or concatenated meta

volumes.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating thin volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977)

This procedure explains how to create thin volumes on VMAX systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977. For instructions on creating thin volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876, refer to Thin volumes on page 272.

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

218 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. Select TDEV as the Configuration.

4. Select the Emulation type.

5. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

6. Optional: To add the volumes to a storage group, click Select, select the volumes, and then click OK.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. If creating thin volumes or a thin BCVs, you can specify to Allocate Full Volume Capacity. In addition, you can mark the preallocation on the thin volume as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations.

2. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

3. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 219

Creating virtual gatekeeper volumes

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Creating virtual gatekeepers:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

4. Select Virtual Gatekeeper as the Configuration.

5. Optional: Select the Emulation type.

6. Type the Number of Volumes.

7. Optional: To add the volumes to a storage group, click Select, select the storage group, and then click OK.

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating volumes using storage templates

This procedure explains how to use storage templates to create volumes on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

220 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Template.

4. Type the name of the Template to use when creating the volumes, or click Select to open a dialog box from which you can select a template.

5. Type the Number of Volumes to create. This field appears populated or dimmed if the template you are using contains a total capacity value.

If Auto meta is enabled on the system then it displays as enabled with a green check mark.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

2. Click either of the following:

Add to Job List. to create the volumes at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs

(page 843), or from the job list as described in Viewing the job list (page 845).

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to create the volumes now.

Creating VDEV volumes

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

4. Select VDEV as the Configuration.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 221

5. Select the Emulation type.

6. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity.

If Auto meta is enabled on the system then it displays as enabled with a green check mark.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. View Enable SCSI3 Persistent Reservation status For Enginuity 5875 and higher this feature is pre-set by SYMAPI and cannot be changed. It is displayed as enabled for Enginuity 5875 and higher, except for CDK and AS/400 emulations.

2. If Auto Meta is enabled for the system, and if you are attempting to create volumes larger than the Minimum Meta Capacity, specify values for the following in the Define Meta panel:

Member capacity (Cyl/MB/GB) Size of the meta members to use when creating the

meta volumes.

Configuration (Striped/Concatenated) Whether to create striped or concatenated meta

volumes.

3. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to create the volumes at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843, or from the job list as described in Viewing the job list on page 845.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to create the volumes now.

Deleting volumes 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select the volumes and click Delete.

5. Click Delete in the confirmation dialog box.

Duplicating volumes The following explains how to duplicate volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

222 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

You cannot duplicate RDF, SFS, or VAULT volumes.

If you are duplicating a thin volume that is bound to a pool, the newly created volumes will be

bound to the same pool.

If you are duplicating a DATA volume that is part of a pool, the newly created DATA volumes will

be part of the same pool. The initial state of the volume will be DISABLED.

To duplicate a volume:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select the volume, click more , and click Duplicate Volume to open the Duplicate Volume dialog box.

5. Type the Number of Volumes (duplicates) to make.

6. z/OS Only: You can optionally change the SSID number for the new volumes by typing a new value, or clicking Select... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID. By default, this field displays the SSID of the volume you are copying.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List. to create the volumes at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs

(page 843), or from the job list as described in Viewing the job list (page 845).

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to create the volumes now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 223

2. Do one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Assigning Symmetrix priority This procedure explains how to prioritize the service time of the host I/O to individual volumes or groups of volumes (DGs or SGs).

Before you begin:

This feature requires Enginuity 5671 - 5876.

To assign host priority to individual volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Select the type of volumes from the tree menu, and click View to open the corresponding volume list view.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Assign Symmetrix Priority to open the Assign Symmetrix Priority dialog box.

5. Optional: Click Show Selected Volumes to view details on the selected volumes.

6. Select a Symmetrix Priority from 1 (the fastest) to 16 (the slowest) and click OK.

7. Click OK in the confirmation message.

To assign host priority to groups of volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. To assign priority to storage groups, select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

To assign priority to device groups, select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

3. Select the group, click more , and select Assign Symmetrix Priority to open the Assign Symmetrix Priority dialog box.

4. Optional: Click Show Selected Volumes to view details on the selected volumes.

5. Select a Symmetrix Priority from 1 (the fastest) to 16 (the slowest) and click OK.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Changing volume configuration This procedure explains how to change a volume's configuration.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

224 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

On storage systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher, you cannot increase or decrease the

mirror protection of a volume.

When adding DRV attributes, volumes must be unmapped.

Full swap operations require the R1 and R2 devices to be the same size.

Only the head of a metavolume can have its type changed. The metamembers will

automatically have the changes applied.

You cannot convert one member of a raidset to unprotected without converting all the members

to unprotected.

When adding/removing SRDF attributes, there are no restrictions on I/O. The SRDF pair must be

split or failed over. If failed over, the R1 device must be unmapped.

When adding/removing BCV attributes, there are no restrictions on I/O. The standard/BCV pair

must be split.

To change the configuration of volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and click Change Volume Configuration to open the Change Volume Configuration dialog box.

5. To view details on the selected volumes, click Show Selected Volumes.

6. Select a New Configuration for the selected volumes. Only valid configurations are listed. The remaining fields in the dialog box are active or inactive depending on the configuration type.

7. z/OS Only: Type the SSID for the new volume created by removing a mirror, or click Select... to open a dialog from which you can select an SSID.This is required for volumes on Symmetrix systems with ESCON or FICON directors (or mixed systems). This field is optional on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5773 or higher when reducing the number of mirrors.

8. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

9. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to schedule the job for a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs

(page 843).

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now run the job now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 225

Expanding existing volumes This procedure explains how to expand the capacity of existing, externally-visible thin volumes.

Before you begin:

Volume expansion can be performed only for HYPERMAX OS 5977, or higher.

Volumes can be expanded up to, and including, a size of 64 TB.

Volume expansion cannot be performed if any of the following operations are currently being

carried out on the volume:

free all

reclaim

allocation

Restriction apply if the volume

is a gatekeeper

is an ACLX volume

has Celerra FBA emulation

is an AS400 volume

is FTS encapsulated

has a SnapVX session defined, or is being replicated

To set volume status for individual volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. To open the Expand Volume dialog box, do one of the following: Open the Expand Volume dialog box from the Storage Group Volumes list

a. Click Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. Click Total.

c. Select the storage group and click View Details.

d. In the Related Objects pane, click Volumes. The Storage Group Volumes List view displays.

e. Do one of the following:

Select a volume and click Expand Volume.

Select a volume and click View Details and then click > Expand Volume. Open the Expand Volume dialog box from the Volumes list

a. Click Storage > Volumes.

b. Select a volume and click > Expand Volume.

The Expand Volume dialog box displays.

1. In the Volume Capacity field of the Expand Volume dialog box, type or select the new capacity of the volume. The Total Capacity and Additional Capacity figures update automatically.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

226 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

2. To reserve the volume, select Reserve Volumes.

3. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Mapping volumes 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes and click and Map to open the mapping wizard.

5. Select one or more Ports.

When performing this operation on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, only ACLX-disabled ports will be available for selection.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration. The default values for Reserve Volumesand Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

7. Click Next.

8. To change an automatically generated LUN address, do the following; otherwise, click Next to accept the generated address.

a. Double-click the address to open the Set Dynamic LUN Address dialog box.

b. To use a new Starting LUN, double-click it and type a new address over it, or select an address and click Next Available LUN to increment the generated address to the next available address. When done, click Apply Starting LUN.

c. Click OK to return to the mapping wizard

d. Click Next.

9. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

10. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 227

Unmapping volumes 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes and click and Unmap to open the Unmap Volumes wizard.

5. Select one or more ports.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration. The default values for Reserve Volumes and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

7. Click Next.

8. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

9. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Setting optimized read miss The optimized read miss feature reduces I/O processing overhead of read miss operations for both DA and DX emulations. The feature is supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5876.163.105 or higher. This feature is not supported on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to set the optimized miss feature at the volume level. You can also perform this operation at the storage group or the device group level.

Before you begin:

The optimized read miss feature is supported only for EFD volumes with FBA or AS400 D910 emulation attached to an XtremSW Cache Adapter. However, starting with Enginuity 5876.280, you can use optimized read miss without a XtremeSW Cache Adapter. To use optimized read miss without the adapter, you must set the Optimized Read Miss mode to On.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

228 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To set optimized read miss:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes dashboard.

3. In the All Volumes panel, double-click the volume type to open its list view.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Set Optimized Read Miss to open the Optimized Read Miss dialog box.

5. Optional: Click Show Selected Volumes to view details on the selected volumes.

6. Select a Set Optimized Read Miss mode:

System Default Storage system determines whether to enable or disable optimized

read miss mode for the specified volumes/group.

Off Disables optimized read miss mode, regardless of the configuraion.

On Enables optimized read miss mode for both XtremCache and non-XtremCache EFD-

only configurations.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 229

Setting volume status This procedure explains how to change the status of volumes.

Before you begin:

You cannot set the status of an unbound thin volume.

To set volume status for individual volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Set Volume Status to open the Set Volume Status dialog box.

5. To view details on the selected volumes, click Show Current Volumes.

6. Set Volume Status. Possible values are:

Read/Write Enable Changes the write-protect status of the volumes to be read and

write enabled on the specified director port(s) for any locally attached hosts.

Write Disable Changes the write-protect status of the volumes to be write disabled on

the specified director ports for any locally attached hosts. This option will only work on volumes that are in a write enabled state.

Device Ready Changes the User Ready status of the volumes to Ready.

Device Not Ready Changes the User Ready status of the volumes to Not Ready.

Hold Causes the Hold bit to be placed on a volume. The Hold bit is automatically placed

on the target volume of a Snap session.

Unhold Causes the Hold bit to be removed from a volume. The Hold bit is automatically

removed from the target volume of a snap session when the snap session is removed.

7. Optional: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, select SRDF/Metro.

8. If the selected volumes are mapped, you can select to change the status for a particular Director or all directors.

9. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

230 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Setting volume attributes Setting the volume attribute for a volume restricts how it can be accessed.

Before you begin:

You cannot set attributes for DATA volumes.

To set volume attributes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Set Volume Attributes to open the Set Volume Attributes dialog box.

5. To view details on the selected volumes, click Show Selected Volumes.

6. Set any number of the following attributes. Note that the attributes available depend on the type of selected volumes.

Emulation Sets the emulation type for the volumes. The default is No Change. This

option will appear dimmed for masked/mapped volumes, as this feature is not supported on masked/mapped volumes.

Dynamic RDF Capability Sets the volume to perform dynamic RDF operations. This

feature only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5773-5876. Possible operations are:

No Change Keeps the RDF capability the same.

None Sets the volume for no dynamic RDF capability.

RDF1 or RDF2 Capable Allows the volume to be R1 or R2 (RDF swaps allowed). Select this attribute to create an R21 volume used in a Cascaded RDF operation.

RDF1 Capable Allows the volume to be an R1 (no RDF swaps).

RDF 2 Capable Allows the volume to be an R2 (no RDF swaps).

SCSI3 Persistent Reservation Maintains any reservations (flags) whether the system

goes online or offline. This field will appear dimmed for diskless volumes.

7. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 231

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Setting volume identifiers 1. Select the storage system.

2. Do one of the following: Open the Set Volume Identifiers dialog box from the Volumes list

a. Select Storage > Volumes.

1. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

b. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Set Volume Identifiers. Open the Set Volume Identifiers dialog box from the Protocol Endpoints list

a. Select Storage > VVols Dashboard.

b. Click Protocol Endpoints. The Protocol Endpoints list displays.

c. Select one or more protocol endpoints, and click Set Volume Identifiers.

The Set Volume Identifiers dialog box displays.

1. To view details on the selected volumes, click Show Current Volumes.

2. Type the Volume Identifier Name. Volume identifier names must be unique from other volumes on the Symmetrix system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ) are allowed.

3. Type the Volume HP Identifier Name. HP identifier names must be a user-defined volume name (not to exceed 128 alpha-numeric characters) applicable to HP-mapped volumes. This value is mutually exclusive of the VMS ID. This attribute will appear grayed out for diskless volumes.

4. Type the Volume VMS Identifier Name. VMS identifier names must be a numeric value (not to exceed 32766) with relevance to VMS systems. This value is mutually exclusive of the HP ID. This attribute will appear grayed out for diskless volumes.

5. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration date. The default values for Reserve Volumes and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Setting volume names When creating or duplicating volumes; or creating or expanding storage groups, you can optionally name the new volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

232 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

When naming volumes, you should be aware of the following:

Volume names cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ),

and periods (.) are allowed.

Volume names plus an optional suffix cannot exceed 64 characters. If using a numerical suffix,

volume names cannot exceed 50 characters (prefix) and the trailing numerical suffix number cannot exceed 14 characters. If not using a numerical suffix, all 64 characters can be specified for the volume name. The maximum starting suffix is 1000000.

This feature is not supported for the following types of volumes: SFS, DRV, Meta

members, SAVE, DATA, Vault, and diskless.

Setting replication QoS The QoS (Quality of Service) feature, allows you to adjust the data transfer (copy) pace on individual volumes or groups of volumes (DGs or SGs) for certain operations. By increasing the response time for specific copy operations you can increase the overall performance of other storage volumes.

To set the copy pace at the storage group level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the storage operating environment: For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Compliance panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view. For Enginuity 5874 - 5876:

Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

1. Perform one of the following actions:

All volumes in the storage group: Select the storage group, click more , and select

Replication QoS to open the Set Replication Priority QoS dialog box.

Some volumes in the storage group: Select the storage group, click View Details, and

select Volumes - nn from the Related Objects panel to open the Volumes list view. Select

the volumes, click more , and select Replication QoS.

2. Select the Operation Type from the possible values:

RDF Sets the copy pace priority during RDF operations.

Mirror Copy Sets the copy pace priority during mirror operations.

Clone Sets the copy pace priority during Clone operations.

VLUN Sets the copy pace priority during virtual LUN migrations. This option is not

available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 233

3. Select the Copy Pace from the possible values:

0-16 Sets the copy pace, with 0 being the fastest (and the default) and 16 being the

slowest.

STOP Stops the copy. Not supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the storage

system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

URGENT Sets the copy pace to urgent, which may be faster than the default (0). Not

supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the storage system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

4. Click OK.

To set the copy pace at the device group level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > Device Groups to open the Device Groups view.

3. Select the device group, click more , and select Replication QoS to open the Set Replication Priority QoS dialog box.

4. Select the Operation Type from the possible values:

RDF Sets the copy pace priority during RDF operations.

Mirror Copy Sets the copy pace priority during mirror operations.

Clone Sets the copy pace priority during Clone operations.

VLUN Sets the copy pace priority during virtual LUN migrations. This option is not

available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

5. Select the Copy Pace from the possible values:

0-16 Sets the copy pace, with 0 being the fastest (and the default) and 16 being the

slowest.

STOP Stops the copy. Not supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the storage

system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

URGENT Sets the copy pace to urgent, which may be faster than the default (0). Not

supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the Symmetrix system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

6. If performing this operation on a group: Select the type of volumes on which to perform the operation.

7. Click OK.

To set the copy pace at the volume level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes dashboard.

3. In the All Volumes panel, double-click the volume type to open its list view.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

234 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Replication QoS to open the Replication QoS dialog box.

5. Select the Operation Type from the possible values:

RDF Sets the copy pace priority during RDF operations.

Mirror Copy Sets the copy pace priority during mirror operations.

Clone Sets the copy pace priority during Clone operations.

VLUN Sets the copy pace priority during virtual LUN migrations. This option is not

available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

6. Select the Copy Pace from the possible values:

0-16 Sets the copy pace, with 0 being the fastest (and the default) and 16 being the

slowest.

STOP Stops the copy. Not supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the storage

system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

URGENT Sets the copy pace to urgent, which may be faster than the default (0). Not

supported when the Operation Type is BCV, or the Symmetrix system is running an Enginuity version earlier than 5875.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 235

Managing Meta Volumes

Creating meta volumes

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

On storage systems running Enginuity versions lower than 5875, only unmapped thin volumes

(hypers) can be formed into meta volumes.

On storage systems running Enginuity 5875 or higher:

Bound thin volumes can be used as meta heads; however, bound thin volumes cannot be used as meta members.

Unmapped thin volumes can be formed into striped meta volumes.

Mapped or unmapped thin volumes can be formed into concatenated meta volumes.

For a complete list of restrictions and recommendations on creating meta volumes, refer to the

Solutions Enabler Array Controls CLI Guide.

When creating meta volumes, Unisphere for VMAX will attempt to instill best practices in the

creation process by setting the following defaults in the Create Meta Volume wizard:

Meta Volume Configuration = Striped

Meta Volume Member Count including Head = 8

Note that these best practices do not apply to volumes created with the CKD-3390 emulation type.

To create meta volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, expand the Meta Volume folder and double-click a meta type to open the Meta Volumes list view.

4. Click Create Meta Volume to open the Create Meta wizard.

5. Select the Emulation type.

6. If creating FBA volumes, select whether to create them from Create Volumesor Use Existing Volumes volumes.

7. If creating FBA or AS/400 volumes, select the Meta Volume Configuration (Concatenated or striped).

8. Select a method for forming the meta volumes.

9. Click Next.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

236 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

10. Do the following, depending on the method you selected:

Using Existing Virtual Volumes:

a. Type the Number of Meta Volumes to form.

b. Specify the Meta Volume Capacity by typing the Meta Volume Member Count including Head, and selecting a Meta Volume Member Capacity.

c. Select a Volume Configuration for the members.

d. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

e. If you are creating CKD meta volumes, type or select an SSID.

f. If you are creating striped meta volumes, you can optionally select the size of the meta volumes, by clicking Show Advanced, and selecting a Striped Size. The striped size can be expressed in blocks or cylinders. Possible sizes in 512 byte blocks are 1920, 3840, 7680, 15360, 30720, and 61440. The stripe size must be 1920, which is the default for all versions of Enginuity. If no stripe size is specified when creating a striped meta, all Enginuity codes will consider the default stripe size as 1920 blocks of 512 bytes each.

g. Click Next.

Using Existing Standard Provisioned Volumes:

a. Type the Number of Meta Volumes to form.

b. Specify the Meta Volume Capacity by typing the Meta Volume Member Count including Head, and selecting a Meta Volume Member Capacity.

c. Select a Volume Configuration.

d. Select the RAID Protection level for the meta volumes.

e. Select the type of Disk Technology on which the meta volumes will reside.

f. Select the Disk Group (Request/Available) containing the meta volumes.

g. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes.

h. Click Next.

By Manually Selecting Existing Volumes (Advanced):

a. Select from the listed volumes.

b. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes.

c. Click Next.

Using New Standard Provisioned Volumes:

a. Specify the Number of Meta Volumes.

b. Specify the Meta Volume Capacity by typing the Meta Volume Member Count including Head, and selecting a Meta Volume Member Capacity.

c. Select a Volume Configuration.

d. Select the RAID Protection level for the meta volumes.

e. Select the type of Disk Technology on which the meta volumes will reside.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 237

f. Select a Disk Group.

g. If you are creating CKD meta volumes, type or select an SSID.

h. Click Next

Using New Virtual Volumes:

a. Specify the Number of Meta Volumes.

b. Specify the Meta Volume Capacity by typing the Meta Volume Member Count including Head, and selecting a Meta Volume Member Capacity.

c. Select a Volume Configuration.

d. Click Next

11. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

12. Click Run Now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

238 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Adding meta members

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

To expand a bound striped thin meta volume on a storage system running an Enginuity version

lower than 5875, you must first unbind the volume from the pool. This operation is allowed on storage systems running Enginuity 5875 or higher without having to unbind the volume, however, you must select the Protect Data option.

When expanding meta thin volumes with BCV meta protection, the volumes must be fully

allocated to a pool and they must have the Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy option set on them. This is because binding thin meta BCV volumes is done through the pool and not through the thin BCV volume selection. For more information on allocating thin pool capacity for thin volumes, refer to Managing thin pool allocations on page 264.

To add meta members:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the type of meta volume you want to expand. The Meta Volumes list view opens.

4. Select the meta volume and click Add Member to open the Add Member dialog box.

5. For striped metas only: To protect the original striped meta data, do the following:

a. Select the Protect Data option.

b. Type or select the name of the BCV meta head to use when protecting the data. By default, this field is filled in with the first available BCV.

6. Select one or more volumes to add to the meta volume.

7. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

8. Click Add to Job List or Run Now and refer to Managing jobs on page 840.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 239

Removing meta members

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

You can only remove members from concatenated meta volumes.

To remove meta members

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the meta volume type to open the Meta Volumes list view.

4. Select the meta volume and click View Details to open its Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Meta Members to open the Meta Members list view.

6. Select one or more members and click Remove Member to open the Remove Meta Volume Member dialog box.

7. Click Add to Job List or Run Now.

Converting meta volumes

This procedure explains how to change the configuration of a meta volume.

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

To convert meta volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the type of meta volume you want to convert. The Meta Volumes list view opens.

4. Select the meta volume and click Convert to open the Convert Meta Volume dialog box.

5. If converting from concatenated to striped, you can optionally specify to protect the original striped data by selecting Protect Data and typing or selecting the BCV meta head to use when protecting the data. By default, the BCV field is filled in with the first available BCV.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve Volumes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

240 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Dissolving meta volumes

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

To dissolve meta volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the type of meta volume you want to dissolve. The Meta Volumes list view opens.

4. Select the meta volume and click Dissolve to open the Dissolve Meta Volume dialog box.

5. Optional: If required, select Reserve Volumes and/or Delete meta members after dissolve. Note that selecting Delete meta members after dissolve requires the operation to be run immediately and not scheduled.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Viewing meta volumes

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

To view meta volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the meta type to open the Meta Volumes list view.

Use the Meta Volumes list view to view and manage meta volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 241

The following properties display:

Name Volume number.

Type Volume type.

Meta Config Volume configuration.

Stripe Size Meta striped size.

Status Volume status.

Reserved Whether the volume is reserved.

Capacity (GB) Volume capacity in GB.

Emulation Emulation type.

Paths Number of masking records for the volume.

The following controls are available:

Create Meta Volume See Managing Meta Volumes on page 236.

Add Member See Adding meta members on page 239.

Dissolve See Dissolving meta volumes on the previous page.

Convert See Converting meta volumes on page 240.

View Details See Viewing meta volume details on the facing page.

Tag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page

510.

Untag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page

510.

Map See Mapping volumes on page 227.

Unmap See Unmapping volumes on page 228.

Change Volume Configuration See Changing volume configuration on page 224.

Duplicate Volume See Duplicating volumes on page 222.

Set Volume Attributes See Setting volume attributes on page 231.

Set Volume Identifiers See Setting volume identifiers on page 232.

Set Volume Status See Setting volume status on page 230.

Replication QOS See Setting replication QoS on page 233.

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition See Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867.

Pin See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

Unpin See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

242 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

VLUN Migration See Migrating regular volumes on page 477.

Set Optimized Read Miss See Setting optimized read miss on page 228.

Viewing meta volume details

Before you begin:

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

To view meta volume details:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, double-click the meta type to open the Meta Volumes list view.

4. Select a volume and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the meta volume Details view to view and manage a meta volume. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name Volume name.

Physical Name Physical name.

Volume Identifier Volume identifier.

Type Volume configuration.

Encapsulated Volume Whether external volume is encapsulated. Relevant for external disks

only.

Encapsulated WWN World wide name for encapsulated volume. Relevant for external disks

only.

Status Volume status.

Reserved Whether the volume is reserved.

Capacity (GB) Volume capacity in GBs.

Capacity (MB) Volume capacity in MBs.

Capacity (Cylinder) Volume capacity in cylinders.

Emulation Volume emulation.

Symmetrix ID Symmetrix system on which the volume resides.

Symmetrix Volume ID Symmetrix volume name/number.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 243

HP Identifier Name User-defined volume name (1-128 alpha-numeric characters),

applicable to HP-mapped devices. This value is mutually exclusive of the VMS ID.

VMS Identifier Name Numeric value (not to exceed 32766) with relevance to VMS systems.

This value is mutually exclusive of the HP ID.

Nice Name Nice name generated by Symmetrix Enginuity.

WWN World Wide Name of the volume.

DG Name Name of the device group in which the volume resides, if applicable.

CG Name Name of the device group in which the volume resides, if applicable.

Attached BCV Defines the attached BCV to be paired with the standard volume.

Attached VDEV TGT Volume Volume to which this source volume would be paired.

RDF Type RDF configuration.

Geometry - Type Method used to define the volume's geometry.

Geometry - Number of Cylinders

Geometry - Sectors per Track Number of sectors per track, as defined by the volume's

geometry.

Geometry - Tracks per Cylinder  Number of tracks per cylinder, as defined by the volume's

geometry.

Geometry - 512 Block Bytes Number of 512 blocks, as defined by the volume's geometry.

Geometry - Capacity (GB) Geometry capacity in GBs.

Geometry - Limited Indicates whether the volume is geometry limited.

SSID Subsystem ID.

Capacity (Tracks) Capacity in tracks.

SA Status Volume SA status.

Host Access Mode Host access mode.

Pinned Whether the volume is pinned.

RecoverPoint Tagged Whether the volume is tagged for RecoverPoint use.

Service State Service state.

Defined Label Type Type of user-defined label.

Dynamic RDF Capability RDF capability of the volume.

Mirror Set Type Mirror set for the volume and the volume characteristic of the mirror.

Mirror Set DA Status Volume status information for each member in the mirror set.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

244 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Mirror Set Invalid Tracks Number of invalid tracks for each mirror in the mirror set.

Priority QoS Priority value assigned to the volume. Valid values are 1 (highest) through 16

(the lowest).

Dynamic Cache Partition Name Name of the cache partition.

XtremSW Cache Attached Indicates whether XtremSW cache is attached to the volume.

Optimized Read Miss Cacheless read miss status.

The following controls are available:

Create Meta Volume See Managing Meta Volumes on page 236.

Add Member See Adding meta members on page 239.

Dissolve See Dissolving meta volumes on page 241.

Convert See Converting meta volumes on page 240.

Tag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page 510.

Untag for RecoverPoint See Tagging and untagging volumes for RecoverPoint on page 510.

Map See Mapping volumes on page 227.

Unmap See Unmapping volumes on page 228.

Change Volume Configuration See Changing volume configuration on page 224.

Duplicate Volume See Duplicating volumes on page 222.

Set Volume Attributes See Setting volume attributes on page 231.

Set Volume Identifiers See Setting volume identifiers on page 232.

Set Volume Status See Setting volume status on page 230.

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition See Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867.

Replication QOS See Setting replication QoS on page 233.

Pin See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

Unpin See Pinning and unpinning volumes on page 198.

VLUN Migration See Migrating regular volumes on page 477.

Set Optimized Read Miss See Setting optimized read miss on page 228.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects associated with the meta volume. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Meta Members - 2 will open a view listing the two members in the meta volume.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Volume management 245

Disk groups

Renaming disk groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

3. Select the disk group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. Click Rename to open the Rename Disk Group dialog box.

5. Type the New Name and click Run Now.

Removing disks from disk groups This procedure explains how to remove disk from disk groups.

Before you begin:

Only disks in external disk groups can be removed from a group.

To remove disks from a disk group:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

3. Select the disk group from the list and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, select Disks to open the Disks view.

5. Select a disk from the list and click Remove Disk.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Deleting disk groups This procedure explains how to delete disk groups.

Before you begin:

Only empty external disk groups can be deleted.

To delete disk groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

3. Select one or more disk groups and click Delete Disk Group.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

246 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing disk groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

Use this list view to view and manage disk groups.

The following properties display:

Name Name of disk group name, format: number -- name.

Technology Technology type for the disk group.

Disk Location Indicates whether disk is internal or external.

Disks Number of disks in the disk group.

Used Capacity (%) Percent total used capacity of the disk group, displayed in bar graph

format and the actual percent number.

Total Capacity (GB) Total capacity in GB of the disk group.

The following controls are available:

View Details See Viewing disk group details on the next page.

Delete Disk Group See Deleting disk groups on the previous page.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Disk groups 247

Viewing disk group details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

3. Select the disk group from the list and click View Details to open the disk group Details view.

The disk group Details view allows you to view and manage disk groups. This view contains Properties, Related Objects, Performance Views, and Graphs panels.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name User-defined disk group name, format: number -- name.

Technology Technology type for the disk group.

Number of Disks Number of disks in the disk group.

Used Capacity (GB) Total used capacity in GB of the disk group.

Free Capacity (GB) Total free capacity in GB of the disk group.

Total Capacity (GB) Total capacity in GB of the disk group.

Speed (RPM) Speed of the disks in the group.

Form Factor Physical size of the disks in the group.

Disk Location Whether the disks in the group are internal or external.

The following controls are available:

Rename See Renaming disk groups on page 246.

Delete See Deleting disk groups on page 246.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the disk group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Disks - 2 opens the view listing the two disks contained in the disk group.

Performance panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance analyze views for the group.

This panel only displays when the Performance option is installed. This panel will display with inactive links if the selected storage system is not registered for data collection.

Graph panel

The Graph panel provides a graphic representation of the percentage of disk group used capacity to the disk group total capacity.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

248 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing disks in disk group 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Groups list view.

3. Select the disk group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Disks to open the Disks list view.

Use the Disks list view to view and manage data disks in the disk group.

The following properties display:

Spindle Disk Spindle ID.

Dir Disk director ID.

Int DA SCSI path.

TID Disk SCSI ID.

Vendor ID Disk vendor.

Product Revision Product version number.

Hypers Number of disk hypers.

Total Capacity (GB) Disk capacity.

Used (%) Percent of disk capacity.

The following controls are available:

View Details See Viewing disk details below.

Remove Disks See Removing disks from disk groups on page 246.

Viewing disk details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Disk Groups to open the Disk Group list view.

3. Select the disk group from the list and click View Details to open the Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, select Disks to open the Disks for Disk Group list view.

5. From this list view, select a disk and click View Details to open the details view for the disk.

This view allows you to view the data disk details. This view contains three panels, Properties, Related Objects, and Graphs.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Spindle Spindle ID.

Disk ID Disk Identification.

Int DA SCSI path.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Disk groups 249

TID Disk SCSI ID.

External WWN World Wide Name of the external LUN.

Disk Group Disk group number.

Disk Location Location of disk.

Disk Technology Disk technology type.

Speed (RPM) Physical disk revolutions per minute.

Form Factor Form factor of the disk.

Vendor ID Disk vendor ID.

Product ID Product ID.

Product Revision Product revision number.

Serial ID Serial number.

Disk Blocks Number of disk blocks.

Actual Disk Blocks Actual number of disk blocks.

Block Size Size of each block.

Total Capacity (GB) Useable disk capacity in Gigabytes.

Free Capacity (GB) Free disk capacity in Gigabytes.

Actual Capacity (GB) Actual disk capacity in Gigabytes.

Used (%) Percentage of used disk capacity to the total disk capacity.

Rated Disk Capacity (GB) Rated capacity of the disk.

Spare Disk Indicates if disk is a spare.

Encapsulated If the disk is external, this indicates if it is encapsulated (True) or not (False).

Disk Service State Indicates disk service state.

The following control is available:

Remove See Removing disks from disk groups on page 246.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the disk group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Hypers - 2 opens the view listing the two hypers contained in the disk.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

250 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Graph panel

The Graph panel provides a graphic representation of the percentage of used disk capacity to the total disk capacity.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Disk groups 251

Virtual Provisioning

DATA volumes

Creating DATA volumes

This procedure explains how to create DATA volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5671 - 5876:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Private.

4. Select DATA as the Configuration.

5. Select the Disk Technology.

External disk technology is an option if the storage system has FTS (Federated Tiered Storage) enabled and available external storage.

6. Select the Emulation type.

7. Select the RAID Protection level.

8. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

9. To add the new volumes to a specific thin pool, select one from Add to Pool. Pools listed are filtered on technology, emulation, and protection type.

10. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

The advanced options presented depend on the value selected for Add to Pool. Complete any of the following steps that are appropriate:

a. Select the Disk Group (number and name) in which to create the volumes. The list of disk groups is already filtered based on technology type selected above.

b. To enable the new volumes in the pool, select Enable volume in pool.

c. To rebalance allocated capacity across all the DATA volumes in the pool, select Start Write Balancing.

1. Click either of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and

Chapter 4: Storage Management

252 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Activating and deactivating DATA volumes

This procedure explains how to activate or deactivate DATA volumes in a thin pool. Activating volumes is essentially the same thing as enabling volumes; however, the activate operation is not allowed if draining is in progress.

After activation, the volumes will go into the Enabled state.

Before you begin:

You can only activate deactivated DATA volumes with used tracks.

To activate/deactivate DATA volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. To activate volumes, right-click the volumes and select Activate. To deactivate volumes, right- click the volumes and select Deactivate.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Enabling and disabling DATA volumes

This procedure explains how to enable or disable DATA volumes for use in a pool. The volumes in the pool do not all have to be in the same state (enabled or disabled). If all the volumes in a pool are disabled, then the pool is disabled. If at least one volume in a pool is enabled, then the pool is enabled.

Before you begin:

To disable a volume, all sessions must be terminated, and have no used tracks.

To enable/disable DATA volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, expand the Private Volume folder and select DATA. the DATA Volumes list view opens.

4. To enable volumes, right-click them and select Enable. To disable volumes, right-click them and select Disable.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 253

Start draining DATA volumes

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, expand the Private Volume folder and select DATA.

4. Click View to open the DATA Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes, click more and select Start Draining.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Stop draining DATA volumes

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, expand the Private Volume folder and select DATA.

4. Click View to open the DATA Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Stop Draining.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Viewing DATA volumes

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes view.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

The DATA volumes list view allows you to view and manage DATA volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

254 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following properties display:

Depending on the storage environment, some of the following properties may not apply.

Name Volume name.

Type Volume configuration.

Pool Name Pool in which the volume resides.

Pool Type Type of pool in which the volume resides.

Capacity (GB)Volume capacity.

Status Volume status.

Reserved Whether the volume is reserved.

Emulation Volume emulation.

State Whether the volume is enabled or disabled in the pool.

Session Status Whether volume is active or inactive.

The following controls are available:

Depending on the storage environment, some of the following controls may not be available.

Create Volume See Virtual Provisioning on page 252.

Delete See Deleting volumes on page 222.

Enable See Enabling and disabling DATA volumes on page 253.

Disable See Enabling and disabling DATA volumes on page 253.

Activate See Activating and deactivating DATA volumes on page 253.

Deactivate See Activating and deactivating DATA volumes on page 253.

View Details See Viewing DATA volume details below.

Start Draining See Start draining DATA volumes on the previous page.

Stop Draining See Stop draining DATA volumes on the previous page.

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867

Duplicate Volume Duplicating volumes on page 222

Viewing DATA volume details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 255

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select a DATA volume and click View Details to open its Details view.

The Details view allows you to view and manage a volume. This view contains two panels: Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Depending on the storage environment, some of the following properties may not apply.

Name Volume name.

Physical Name Physical name.

Volume Identifier Volume identifier.

Type Volume configuration.

Encapsulated Volume Whether external volume is encapsulated. Relevant for external disks

only.

Encapsulated WWN World Wide Name for encapsulated volume. Relevant for external disks

only.

Status Volume status.

Reserved Whether the volume is reserved.

Capacity (GB) Volume capacity in GBs.

Capacity (MB) Volume capacity in MBs.

Capacity (Cylinders) Volume capacity in cylinders.

Emulation Volume emulation.

Symmetrix ID Symmetrix system on which the volume resides.

Symmetrix Volume ID Symmetrix volume name/number.

HP Identifier Name User-defined volume name (1-128 alpha-numeric characters),

applicable to HP-mapped devices. This value is mutually exclusive of the VMS ID.

VMS Identifier Name Numeric value (not to exceed 32766) with relevance to VMS systems.

This value is mutually exclusive of the HP ID.

Nice Name Nice name generated by Symmetrix Enginuity.

WWN World Wide Name of the volume.

DG Name Name of the device group in which the volume resides, if applicable.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

256 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

CG Name Name of the device group in which the volume resides, if applicable.

Attached BCV Defines the attached BCV to be paired with the standard volume.

Attached VDEV TGT Volume Volume to which this source volume would be paired.

RDF Type RDF configuration.

Geometry - Type Method used to define the volume's geometry.

Geometry - Number of Cylinders Number of cylinders.

Geometry - Sectors per Track Number of sectors per track, as defined by the volume's

geometry.

Geometry - Tracks per Cylinder  Number of tracks per cylinder, as defined by the volume's

geometry.

Geometry - 512 Block Bytes Number of 512 blocks, as defined by the volume's geometry.

Geometry - Capacity (GB) Geometry capacity in GBs.

Geometry - Limited Indicates whether the volume is geometry limited.

SSID Subsystem ID.

Capacity (Tracks) Capacity in tracks.

SA Status Volume SA status.

Host Access Mode Host access mode.

Pinned Whether the volume is pinned.

RecoverPoint tagged Indicates whether volume is tagged for RecoverPoint.

Service State Service state.

Defined Label Type Type of user-defined label.

Dynamic RDF Capability RDF capability of the volume.

Mirror Set Type Mirror set for the volume and the volume characteristic of themirror.

Mirror Set DA Status Volume status information for each member in the mirror set.

Mirror Set Invalid Tracks Number of invalid tracks for each mirror in the mirror set.

Priority QoS Priority value assigned to the volume. Valid values are 1 (highest) through 16

(the lowest).

Dynamic Cache Partition Name Name of the cache partition.

The following controls are available:

Depending on the storage environment, some of the following controls may not be available.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 257

Create Volume Virtual Provisioning (page 252)

Delete Deleting volumes (page 222)

Enable Enabling and disabling DATA volumes on page 253

Disable Enabling and disabling DATA volumes on page 253

Activate See Activating and deactivating DATA volumes on page 253.

Deactivate See Activating and deactivating DATA volumes on page 253.

Start Draining See Start draining DATA volumes on page 254.

Stop Draining See Stop draining DATA volumes on page 254.

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867

Duplicate Volume Duplicating volumes on page 222

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the DATA volume. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Back End Paths- 2 will open a view listing the two directors associated with the volume.

Thin pools

Creating thin pools

When creating thin pools, Unisphere for VMAX works on a best effort basis, meaning that it attempts to satisfy as much as possible of the requested pool from existing DATA volumes, and then creates the volumes necessary to meet any shortfall.

Before you begin:

Thin pools contain DATA volumes of the same emulation and the same configuration.

When creating thin pools, Unisphere for VMAX will attempt to instill best practices in the

creation process by updating the default Protection level according to the selected Disk Technology:

Technology Default protection level

EFD RAID5(3+1)

FC 2-Way Mirror

SATA RAID6(6+2)

To create a thin pool:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

258 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Click Create Thin Pool to open the Create Thin Pool dialog box. When this dialog box first opens, the chart displays the configured and unconfigured space on the selected Symmetrix system. Once you select a disk technology later in this procedure, and therefore a disk group, this chart will display the configured and unconfigured space of the selected group.

4. Type the Pool Name. Thin pool names can contain up to 12 alpha-numeric characters. The only special character allowed is the underscore ( _ ); however, the name cannot start or end with an underscore.

5. Select the Disk Technology on which the pool will reside.

6. Select the RAID Protection level for the DATA volumes to use in the pool.

7. Select an Emulation type for the pool.

8. Specify the capacity that the template will find or create by doing one of the following:

Typing the Number of Volumes and selecting the capacity for each volume (Volume

Capacity.

Selecting the Volume Capacity.

9. Click one of the following:

OK to review your selections and ultimately create the pool.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. Select the Disk Group containing the DATA volumes to use in the pool.

2. To specify the percentage of the pool's capacity to enable, select Enable Max Subscription (0- 65534) and type a percentage.

3. Type the Rebalancing Variance (1-50). This is the target volume utilization variance for the rebalancing algorithm. The rebalancing algorithm attempts to level data distribution in a pool so that the percentage utilization of any volume in the pool is within the target variance of the percentage utilization of any other volume in the pool. Possible values range from 1 to 50%, with the default value being 1%. This field is only available when creating a thin pool on a Symmetrix system running Enginuity 5875 or higher.

4. Type the Maximum Rebalancing Scan Device Range (2-1024). This is the maximum number of volumes in the pool on which the rebalancing algorithm will concurrently operate. Possible values range from 2 to 1024, with the default value being 256. This field is only available when creating a thin pool on a Symmetrix system running Enginuity 5875 or higher.

5. To specify the percentage of the capacity of the thin pool that will be reserved for non-FAST activities, select Pool Reserved Capacity (1-80) and type a value. If the free space in the pool (as a percentage of pool-enabled capacity) falls below this value, the FAST controller does not move any more chunks into the pool. Specifying a value here will override the system-wide PRC value. Possible values range from 1 to 80.

6. To enable the DATA volumes in the pool for use, select Enable DATA Volume for Use.

7. To enable FAST VP compression for the volumes in a thin pool, select Enable VP Compression. This feature maximizes the storage capacity usage within the pool by compressing its volumes.

8. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 259

9. Verify your selections in the Create Thin Pool - Summary page, and click one of the following:

Add to Job List to create the pool at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on page

843, or from the job list as described in Viewing the job list on page 845.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to create the pool now.

Expanding thin pools

Expanding thin pools refers to the process of increasing the amount of pool storage accessible to a thin volume by either adding a predefined capacity to the pool, or by increasing the pool's capacity by a percentage.

Before you begin:

Unisphere for VMAX supports best practices, which state that volumes from different drive technologies should not be mixed in the same thin pool. To this end, Unisphere for VMAX will only expand a thin pool with volumes from the same disk group as the volumes already in the pool. This is an important distinction from Solutions Enabler, which does not impose this restriction.

To expand a thin pool:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click Expand to open the Expand Thin Pool dialog box. The chart on this dialog box displays the configured and unconfigured space of the disk group containing the pool's DATA volumes.

4. Select how to expand the pool, either by Capacity or Percentage:

Capacity The Volume Capacity field defaults to the first data volume size in the pool. All

volume sizes contained in the pool are available. Type the Extra Pool Capacity and select the unit of capacity.

Percentage Type an amount in the Percentage Increase field.

5. Optional: Click Show Advanced and complete the following steps:

Select Volume Capacity, in GB.

Click Start Write Balancing to enable write balancing.

6. Click OK.

7. Verify your selections in the Expand Thin Pool - Summary page, and click Add to Job List or Run Now.

Draining thin pools

This procedure explains how to re-balance data across all the DATA volumes in a thin pool. This procedure is typically performed after expanding a thin pool.

Before you begin:

The drain operation is not supported with any ongoing replication operation.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

260 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

You can only drain deactivated DATA volumes. For instructions, refer to Activating and

deactivating DATA volumes on page 253.

The drain must not cause the enabled volumes to end up with greater than 90% utilization in

the pool. To calculate this, Unisphere for VMAX adds the total used tracks on the enabled volumes and the total used tracks on the volumes that will be drained and divides this sum by the total number of tracks on all the enabled volumes. If the result is greater than 90% the drain request is blocked.

The number of volumes that are draining at any time are limited to 20% total ofthe number of

volumes to drain (or draining) plus the number of enabled volumes. This limits the impact on the system.

This feature is only supported on Symmetrix DMX systems running Enginuity 5773.150 or

higher.

To drain thin pools:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click DATA Volumes to open the DATA Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Start Draining.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message. This will put the volumes in a Draining state.

7. Monitor the draining until it reaches an acceptable percentage. This will require you to refresh the view. If you do not monitor the draining, eventually all data will be drained from the volumes and they will go into a Disable state.

8. When a volume reaches an acceptable level, select it, click more , and select Stop Draining.

9. Click OK in the confirmation dialog. This will put the volume in an Enabled state.

10. If you are draining multiple devices, repeat steps 8-10 until all the volumes are drained to an acceptable percentage.

For more information about thin pools and thin provisioning concepts, refer to the VMAX Product Guide.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 261

Starting and stopping thin pool write balancing

Write balancing thin pools refers to the process of rebalancing allocated capacity across all the DATA volumes in the pool. This procedure is typically performed after expanding a thin pool.

Before you begin:

You can only perform this procedure on an enabled thin pool with at least one thin volume

bound to it.

While write balancing is going on, all pool operations can still occur.

Write balancing requires Enginuity 5874.207.166 or higher.

To write balance a thin pool:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click View Details to open the thin pool's details view.

4. Start write balancing by clicking more , and selecting Start Write Balancing.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message. This will put the pool in a Balancing state.

6. Monitor the balancing until it reaches an acceptable percentage.

7. Select the thin pool, click more , and select Stop Write Balancing.

Deleting thin pools

Before you begin:

You can only delete empty thin pools. For instructions, refer to Adding/Removing thin pool members.

To delete a thin pool:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click Delete.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Adding/Removing thin pool members

This procedure explains how to add/remove members from a thin pool.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

262 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

The Symmetrix system must be running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

Before you can remove a thin pool member (DATA volume), you must first disable it.

Unisphere for VMAX supports best practices, which state that volumes from different drive

technologies should not be mixed in the same thin pool. To this end, the Add Volumes to Thin Pool dialog box will only allow you to add volumes from the same disk group as the volumes already in the pool. This is an important distinction from Solutions Enabler, which does not impose this restriction.

To add/remove thin pool members:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click View Details to open the thin pool's details view.

4. In Related Objects, click DATA Volumes to open the DATA Volumes view.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 263

5. Do the following, depending on whether you are adding or removing volumes from the pool:

Adding volumes:

a. Click Add Volumes to Pool to open the Add Volumes to Thin Pool wizard.

b. Locate the volumes by selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

c. Click Find Volumes to run the query now, or specify Additional Criteria to add conditional expressions to your query, as described next.

1. Select values for the following:

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Operator Establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

2. Click Add Another and repeat the previous step for each additional expression.

3. Click Find Volumes.

d. In the Available Volumes table, select the volumes.

e. (Optional): Select Start Write Balancing.

f. Click Add to Pool.

Removing volumes:

a. Select one or more volumes and click Remove.

b. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Enabling and disabling thin pool members

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click View Details to open the thin pool's details view.

4. In Related Objects, click DATA Volumes to open the DATA Volumes for Thin Pool view.

5. To enable members, select them and click Enable. To disable members, select them and click Disable.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Managing thin pool allocations

The following describes how to start and stop allocating thin pool capacity from the Volumes view. In addition, you can also perform this operation from the following views:

Storage Groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher): Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard

> Storage Groups

Chapter 4: Storage Management

264 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Storage Groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876): Storage > Storage Groups

Device Groups: Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > Device Groups

File Storage Groups: System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups

Before you begin:

You can only allocate thin pool capacity to bound thin volumes.

Thin pool allocation for individual thin volumes requires Enginuity 5773 - 5876, or

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Thin pool allocation for thin volumes in a storage group requires Enginuity 5875 - 5876, or

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the Volumes view. You can also

perform this procedure from storage group views. Depending from where you are performing this procedure, some of the following steps may not apply.

To start thin pool allocation:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog box.

5. Select Allocate Volumes. In addition, on storage systems running Enginuity 5875.139.93 - 5876 or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, you can optionally specify to persist preallocated capacity on the thin volumes by selecting the Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy option. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

To stop thin pool allocation:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 265

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog box.

5. Select Stop Allocate.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

For more information about thin pools and thin provisioning concepts, refer to the VMAX Product Guide.

Managing space reclamation

The following describes how to start and stop the space reclamation option, freeing unused pool capacity and reclaiming unwritten tracks from thins volumes. In addition, you can also perform this operation from the following views:

Storage Groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher): Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard

> Storage Groups

Storage Groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876): Storage > Storage Groups

Device Groups: Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > Device Groups

File Storage Groups: System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups

Before you begin:

You can only reclaim thin pool capacity from bound thin volumes.

Thin pool reclamation for individual thin volumes requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876 or

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Thin pool reclamation for thin volumes in a storage group requires Enginuity 5875 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the Volumes view. You can also

perform this operation from storage group views. Depending from where you are performing this procedure, some of the following steps may not apply.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

266 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To start space reclamation:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog  box.

5. To start reclaiming unwritten tracks and those written completely with zeros, select Reclaim Volumes. This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5875.139.93 or higher, or storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

6. Optional: To reclaim tracks that are unwritten or zero-based, even if they are marked as persistent, select Reclaim persistent capacity.

7. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

To stop space reclamation:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog  box.

5. Select one or more volumes, click more and select Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog  box.

6. Select Stop Reclaim. In addition, on storage systems running Enginuity 5875 Q2 20011 SR, you can optionally specify to free tracks that are unwritten or zero-based, even if they are marked persistent.

7. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 267

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

For more information about thin pools and thin provisioning concepts, refer to the VMAX Product Guide.

Managing thin pool capacity

The following describes how to start and stop the process of freeing allocated thin pool capacity from the Volumes view. In addition, you can also perform this operation from the following views:

Storage Groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher): Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard

> Storage Groups

Storage Groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876): Storage > Storage Groups

Device Groups: Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > Device Groups

File Storage Groups: System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Storage Groups

Before you begin:

You can only reclaim thin pool capacity from bound thin volumes.

Thin pool reclamation for individual thin volumes requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876 or

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the Volumes view. You can also

perform this operation from storage group views. Depending from where you are performing this procedure, some of the following steps may not apply.

To start freeing unused capacity:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Start Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog  box.

5. Select Free Volumes.

6. Optional: To free all allocations associated with the volumes, regardless of whether the data is written, select Free all allocations (written and unwritten). This option is only available on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

268 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

7. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

To stop freeing unused capacity:

1. Select the VMAX system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes.

3. Locate the volumes using the volumes filter (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher), or the tree menu in the Volumes dashboard (Enginuity 5671 - 5876). For information on using these components, refer to Managing volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 209 and Managing volumes (Enginuity 5671 - 5876) on page 209, respectively.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim to open the Stop Allocate/Free/Reclaim dialog  box.

5. Select Free Volumes. In addition, on storage systems running Enginuity 5875 Q2 20011 SR, you can optionally specify to free tracks that are unwritten or zero-based, even if they are marked persistent. This option is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5875.139.93.

6. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date. The default values for Reserve and Comments are set in Symmetrix Preferences for volumes reservations. If the volumes are not automatically reserved you can optionally reserve them here.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

For more information about thin pools and thin provisioning concepts, refer to the Solutions Enabler Symmetrix Array Management CLI Product Guide.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 269

Viewing thin pools

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

The Thin Pools list view allows you to view and manage thin pools on a Symmetrix system.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the thin pool.

Technology Disk technology on which the pool resides.

Configuration Configuration of the pool.

Emulation Emulation of the pool.

Allocated Capacity Percentage of the pool that is allocated.

Enabled Capacity (GB) Capacity of the pool in GB.

The following controls are available:

Create Thin Pool See Thin pools on page 258.

Expand See Expanding thin pools on page 260.

View Details See Viewing thin pool details below.

Delete See Deleting thin pools on page 262.

Viewing thin pool details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the pool and click View Details to open its Details view.

The thin pool Details view allows you to display and manage a thin pool. It contains Properties, Related Objects, Performance, and Graphs panels.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name Name of the pool. To rename a pool, type a new name over the existing and click

Apply. Thin pool names can contain up to 12 alpha-numeric characters. The only special character allowed is the underscore ( _ ); however, the name cannot start or end with an underscore.

RAID Protection RAID protection level for the DATA volumes in the pool.

Type The pool type.

Technology Disk technology on which the pool resides.

Disk Location Whether the disk group is Internal to the storage system or an External

storage system or storage device.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

270 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Emulation Emulation type for the pool.

Total Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the pool.

Free Capacity (GB) Free capacity in the pool.

Thin Volumes Number of thin volumes bound to the pool.

Enabled Volumes Number of enabled DATA volumes in the pool.

Disabled Volumes Number of disabled DATA volumes in the pool.

% Allocated Percent of pool used.

Set Maximum Subscription Enable oversubscription for the pool.

Maximum Subscription (0-65534) Acceptable oversubscription ratio for the pool.

% Subscription Current subscription percentage.

Enabled Capacity (GB) Sum of capacity of all enabled DATA volumes in the pool.

Allocated Capacity (GB) Pool capacity allocated to thin volumes.

State Pool state (Enabled, Disable, Balancing).

Rebalance Variance (0-50) Target volume utilization variance for the rebalancing algorithm.

The rebalancing algorithm attempts to level data distribution in a pool so that the percentage utilization of any volume in the pool is within the target variance of the percentage utilization of any other volume in the pool. Possible values range from 1 to 50%, with the default value being 1%.

Maximum Volumes per Rebalance Scan Maximum number of volumes in the pool on which

the rebalancing algorithm will concurrently operate. To change this number, type a new value over the existing and click Apply. Possible values range from 1 to 1024, with the default value being 256. This field only applies to thin pool on a Symmetrix system running Enginuity 5875 or higher.

Pool Reserved Capacity Enabled Whether a percentage of the capacity of the thin pool is

reserved.

Pool Reserved Capacity The percentage of the capacity of the thin pool that will be reserved

for non-FAST activities

Pool Egress Counter Number of track groups freed from the thin pool as a result of a FAST

related data movement.

Pool Ingress Counter Number of track groups allocated in the thin pool as a result of a FAST

related data movement.

Enable VP Pool Compression Enables (when selected) or disables (when cleared) VP pool

compression for the pool. VP pool compression compresses data on the volumes in the pool to save space. VP Pool compression is available for thin pools only not Snap or DSE pool types. VP compression cannot be enabled on a thin pool of encapsulated volumes.

Saved By Compression (Tracks) The number of tracks saved by using VP Pool Compression.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 271

Pool Compression Ratio (%) Percentage of allocated pool capacity that is compressed.

The following controls are available:

Expand See Expanding thin pools on page 260.

Bind See Binding/Unbinding/Rebinding thin volumes on page 274.

Stop Write Balancing See Starting and stopping thin pool write balancing on page 262.

Start Write Balancing See Starting and stopping thin pool write balancing on page 262.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the thin pool.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the thin pool. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking DATA Volumes - 2 will open a view listing the two DATA volumes in the pool.

Performance panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance monitor and analyze views for the thin pool.

This panel only displays when the Performance option is installed. This panel will display with inactive links if the selected Symmetrix system is not registered for data collection.

Graphs panel

The Graphs panel provides a graphic representation of the thin pool's allocation as a percentage.

Thin volumes

Creating thin volumes (Enginuity 5773 - 5876)

This procedure explains how to create thin volumes on storage systems running Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. For instructions on creating thin volumes on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, refer to Creating thin volumes (HYPERMAX OS 5977) on page 218.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Hover the cursor over the Storage menu and select Create Volumes under Common Tasks to open the Create Volume dialog box.

3. In Volume Type, click Virtual.

4. Select Configuration (TDEV or BCV + TDEV) or thin volumes.

5. Select the Emulation type.

6. Specify the capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity. You can also manually enter a volume capacity.

7. To bind the new volumes to a specific thin pool, select one from Bind to Pool. Only thin pools with enabled DATA volumes and matching emulation are available for binding (except AS/400 which will bind to an FBA pool).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

272 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To name the new volumes, select one of the following Volume Identifiers and type a Name:

None Allows the system to name the volumes (Default).

Name Only All volumes will have the same name.

Name + VolumeID All volumes will have the same name with a unique Symmetrix

volume ID appended to them. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

Name + Append Number All volumes will have the same name with a unique decimal

suffix appended to them.The suffix will start with the value specified for the Append Number and increment by 1 for each additional volume. Valid Append Numbers must be from 0 to 1000000. When using this option, the maximum number of characters allowed is 50.

For more information on naming volumes, refer to Setting volume names on page 232

2. To Allocate Full Volume Capacity, select the option.

3. If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

4. To assign Dynamic Capability to the volumes, select one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to None.

RDF1_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 RDF volume.

RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R2 RDF volume.

RDF1_OR_RDF2_Capable Creates a dynamic R1 or R2 RDF volume.

5. If Auto Meta is enabled on the system, and if you are attempting to create volumes larger than the Minimum Meta Capacity, specify values for the following in the Define Meta panel:

Member capacity (Cyl/MB/GB) Size of the meta members to use when creating the

meta volumes.

Configuration (Striped/Concatenated) Whether to create striped or concatenated meta

volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 273

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Binding/Unbinding/Rebinding thin volumes

This procedure explains how to bind/unbind/rebind thin volumes to a thin pool of DATA volumes.

You can bind /unbind/rebind thin volumes at the volume, pool, or storage group level.

Before you begin:

Only one bind, unbind, or rebind operation can be performed on the same volume in any one

config session.

To bind/unbind thin volumes from the group level, requires Enginuity 5875 or higher.

As an alternative to unmapping/unmasking a volume prior to unbinding, you can make the

volume Not Ready.

A thin volume cannot be unbound from a pool if any of the following are true:

Volume is mapped to a front-end port or is in the Ready state

Volume is masked by VCM

Volume has active snap sessions

Volume is held

Volume is a source or target of a clone (src or tgt) session

Volume is a metamember

Volume is a part of enabled RDF CG group

Volume is an RDF volume

Chapter 4: Storage Management

274 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following apply just to the rebind operation:

The thin volume has to be in the Bound state.

The new binding has to comply with the oversubscription ratio of the new pool. The entire size of the volume being rebound will be considered when calculating the oversubscription.

If volumes in a range, device group, or storage group are bound to different pools, then all the volumes will be rebound to the specified pool.

If a thin volume is part of a storage group that is under FAST management, the thin volume can only be bound to a pool in a tier that is part of the FAST policy associated with the storage group. Therefore, the volume can only be rebound to a pool that is within the policy.

If all the volumes that are being rebound are already bound to the destination pool, an error returns. If some volumes get bound to a pool different than what they are currently bound to, the operation will return a success status.

For more information about thin pools and thin provisioning concepts, refer to the Solutions

Enabler Array Management CLI Product Guide.

To bind/unbind/rebind thin volumes at the volume level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

3. In the Volume Type panel, select the type of volume to bind/unbind.

4. Click View to open the volume list view.

5. Do the following, depending on whether you are binding or unbinding thin volumes:

Binding:

a. Select one or more volumes and click Bind to open the Bind Thin Volumes dialog box.

b. From Pool Name, select the thin pool with which to bind the volume.

c. Optional: Specify to Allocate Full Volume capacity.

d. To view additional information on the selected volumes, click Show selected volumes.

e. If you selected to allocate capacity in the previous step, you can mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

f. Click OK.

Unbinding:

a. Select one or more volumes and click Unbind to open the Unbind Thin Volumes dialog box.

b. To view additional information on the selected volumes, click Show selected volumes.

c. Click OK .

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 275

Rebinding:

a. Select one or more volumes and click and select Rebind to open the Rebind Thin Volumes dialog box.

b. Select the Pool Name with which to rebind the volumes.

c. To reserve the volumes, select Reserve. In addition you can also type reserve Comments and select an Expiration Date.

d. Click OK.

To bind/unbind/rebind thin volumes at the pool level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Thin Pools to open the Thin Pools list view.

3. Select the thin pool and click View Details to open the thin pool's details view.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you are binding or unbinding volumes:

Binding:

a. Click Bind to open the Bind Thin Volumes wizard.

b. Locate the volumes by selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

Additional Criteria Allows you to add conditional expressions to your query, as

describe next:

1. Select values for the following:

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Operator Establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

2. To add another expression, click Add Another, and repeat the previous step. To clear your criteria, click Clear All.

c. Click Find Volumes to run the query. Results are displayed on the next page in the wizard.

d. Optional: To modify your query, click Modify Criteria and repeat steps 5 and 6; otherwise continue with the remaining steps in this procedure.

e. Select the volumes.

f. Optional: Specify to Allocate Full Volume capacity, and then whether to mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

g. Click Bind.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

276 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Unbinding:

a. In Related Objects, click Bound Volumes to open the Bound Volumes detail view.

b. Select one or more volumes and click Unbind.

c. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Rebinding:

a. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select Rebind to open the Rebind thin volumes dialog box.

b. Select the Pool Name with which to rebind the volumes.

c. Click OK.

To bind/unbind/rebind thin volumes at the storage group level:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups list view.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you are binding or unbinding thin volumes:

Binding:

a. Select the storage group, click more , and select Bind SG to open its Bind Thin Volumes dialog box.

b. From Pool Name, select the thin pool with which to bind the volume.

c. Optional: Specify to Allocate Full Volume capacity, and then whether to mark the allocation as persistent by selecting Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy. Persistent allocations are unaffected by standard reclaim operations and any TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, or SRDF copy operations.

d. Click OK.

Unbinding:

a. Select the storage group, click more , and select Unbind SG to open its Unbind Thin Volumesdialog box.

b. To view additional information on the selected volumes, click Show selected volumes.

c. Click OK.

Rebinding:

a. Select the storage group, click more , and select Rebind SG to open the Rebind Thin Volumes dialog box.

b. Select the Pool Name with which to rebind the volumes.

c. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Virtual Provisioning 277

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration Virtual LUN Migration (VLUN Migration) enables transparent, nondisruptive data mobility for both disk group provisioned and virtually provisioned Symmetrix system volumes between storage tiers and between RAID protection schemes. Virtual LUN can be used to populate newly added drives or move volumes between high performance and high capacity drives, thereby delivering tiered storage capabilities within a single Symmetrix system. Migrations are performed while providing constant data availability and protection.

Virtual LUN migration requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

Virtual LUN Migration performs tiered storage migration by moving data from one RAID group to another, or from one thin pool to another. It is also fully interoperable with all other Symmetrix system replication technologies such as SRDF, TimeFinder/Clone, TimeFinder/Snap, and Open Replicator.

RAID Virtual Architecture allows, for the purposes of migration, two distinct RAID groups, of different types or on different storage tiers, to be associated with a logical volume. In this way, Virtual LUN allows for the migration of data from one protection scheme to another, for example RAID 1 to RAID 5, without interruption to the host or application accessing data on the Symmetrix system volume.

Virtual LUN Migration can be used to migrate regular Symmetrix system volumes and metavolumes of any emulation FBA, CKD, and IBM i series. Migrations can be performed between all drive types including high-performance enterprise Flash drives, Fibre Channel drives, and large capacity SATA drives.

Migration sessions can be volume migrations to configured and unconfigured space, or migration of thin volumes to another thin pool.

Migrating regular storage group volumes This procedure explains how to migrate all the regular volumes in a storage group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

278 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

Virtual LUN migration requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To migrate volumes when access control is enabled, you must grant Symmetrix Optimizer

access rights to the volumes.

To migrate regular storage group volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups view.

3. Select a storage group, click more , and select VLUN Migration to open the VLUN Migration dialog box.

4. Type a Migration session name. Migration session names must be less than 32 characters long and are case sensitive.

5. Select a Migration Type. Available options are Disk Group and Virtual Pool.

6. Select a Target Disk Group.

7. Select the RAID Protection type.

8. Select Target type. Choose Create new volumes to migrate to unconfigured volumes or Use existing volumes to migrate to configured volumes.

9. Select whether to Pin volumes so that they cannot be moved by any FAST automated process.

10. Click OK to create the migration session.

Migrating regular volumes This procedure explains how to migrate individual regular volumes.

Before you begin:

Virtual LUN migration requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To migrate volumes when access control is enabled, you must grant Symmetrix Optimizer

access rights to the volumes.

To migrate regular volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes view.

3. Expand the Regular Volumes folder, select the desired Volume Type, and click View to open the volume list.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select VLUN Migration to open the VLUN Migration dialog box.

5. Type a Migration session name. Migration session names must be less than 32 characters and are case sensitive.

6. Select a Target Disk Group.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 279

7. Select the RAID Protection type.

8. Select the Target type. Choose Create new volumes to migrate to unconfigured volumes or Use existing volumes to migrate to configured volumes.

9. Select wether to Pin volumes so that they cannot be moved by any FAST automated process.

10. Click OK.

Migrating thin storage group volumes This procedure explains how to migrate all the thin volumes in a storage group.

Before you begin:

Virtual LUN migration requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To migrate volumes when access controls is enabled, you must grant Symmetrix Optimizer

access rights to the volumes.

For instructions on migrating volumes on Symmetrix systems running Enginuity levels lower

than 5874, see Migrating volumes.

To migrate thin storage group volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups to open the Storage Groups view.

3. Select a storage group, click more , and select VLUN Migration to open the VLUN Migration dialog box.

4. Type a Migration session name. Migration session names must be less than 32 characters and are case sensitive.

5. Select a Target Pool.

6. Select whether to Pin volumes so that they cannot be moved by any FAST automated process.

7. Optional: Expand Show Advanced. From the Migrate allocations from pool menu, select a pool from which to migrate allocations.

8. Click OK.

Migrating thin volumes This procedure explains how to migrate individual thin volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

280 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

Virtual LUN migration requires Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

To migrate volumes when access controls is enabled, you must grant Symmetrix Optimizer

access rights to the volumes.

To migrate selected thin volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volumes view.

3. Expand the Virtual Volumes folder, select TDEV Volume Type, and click View to open the Thin Volumes list.

4. Select one or more volumes, click more , and select VLUN Migration to open the VLUN Migration dialog box.

5. Type a Migration session name. The session name must be less than 32 characters long and is case sensitive.

6. Select a Target Pool.

7. Select wether to Pin volumes so that they cannot be moved by any FAST automated process.

8. Optional: Expand Show Advanced. From the Migrate allocations from pool menu, select a pool from which to migrate allocations.

9. Click OK.

Terminating a VLUN migration session 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Virtual LUN Migration to open the Virtual LUN Migration sessions list view.

3. Select the migration session and click Terminate to open the Terminate confirmation dialog.

4. Click OK.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 281

Viewing VLUN migration sessions 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Virtual LUN Migration to open the Virtual LUN Migration sessions list view.

Use the this view to display and manage migration sessions.

The following properties display:

Name Migration session name.

Invalid Tracks Number of invalid tracks for the volume pair.

Status Migration session status.

Percentage Percentage of the session completed.

The following controls are available:

Terminate Terminating a VLUN migration session on the previous page

View Details Viewing VLUN migration session details on page 479

Chapter 4: Storage Management

282 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

External Storage

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 283

Viewing external storage The External Storage page allows you to view and manage external storage as well as validate paths and zoning. The first time you visit the External Storage page, Unisphere scans all of the volumes that are visible from the DX directors.

At least four paths to external volumes is required, meaning that at least four ports belonging to a single DX dual initiator pair must be configured. The best practice for maximum redundancy is achieved by using single initiator/multiple target zoning. This is accomplished by creating individual zones that contain each DX port and all external ports that the external volumes are available on.

To view external storage and validate paths and zoning:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > External Storage to open the External Storage page.

Use the tree view lists to filter the list of external LUNs by selecting various combinations of members within a tree list view (control ports, external ports, and external LUNs). You can select a single item, multiple items in consecutive rows (hold shift key and select), or multiple items in non-consecutive rows (hold control key and select). As each selection is made, the filtered results table is updated to reflect the current combination of filter criteria.

Control Ports tree view list

The following properties display:

Director Storage system DX director.

Port Port number on the director.

External Ports tree view list

The following properties display:

Port WWN World Wide Name of the external port.

Array ID External storage ID.

Vendor External storage system vendor.

External LUNs tree view list

The following properties display:

LUN WWN World Wide Name of the external LUN.

Capacity (GB) Capacity in GB of the external LUN.

Filtered results table

The following properties display:

External LUN WWN World Wide Name of the external LUN.

Vendor Vendor name of the external LUN.

Capacity (GB) Capacity in GB of the external LUN.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

284 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Volume Volume ID on the external storage system.

LUN Displays 0 for EMC storage systems.

Virtualizing Status The mode of operation that the eDisk is using. Possible values are

External, Encapsulated, and None.

Emulation Emulation type of the external LUN.

Disk Group Disk group that contains the virtualized LUN.

Spindle Spindle ID of the external spindle.

Service State Availability of the external LUN. Possible values are Normal, Degraded, and

Failed. Failed means that there are no network paths available to the external LUN. Degraded means that there are paths from only one of the supporting DX directors. Normal means that there are network paths available from both supporting DX directors.

The following controls are available:

Virtualize See Virtualizing external LUNs on page 294. (Only displays for Enginuity 5876)

Rescan See Rescanning external storage below.

Remove Removing external LUNs on page 289 (Only displays for HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher)

Rescanning external storage The first time you visit the External Storage page, Unisphere scans all of the volumes that are visible from the DX directors. When you return to the page, Unisphere populates the list views with cached data.

To rescan external storage:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > External Storage to open the External Storage page.

3. Click Rescan to rescan the volumes that are visible from the DX directors. Note that the Last External Storage Updated field below the filtered list view updates with the data and time of the most recent scan.

Understanding ProtectPoint ProtectPointTM integrates your primary storage (VMAX system) with your protection storage (Data Domain system), thereby eliminating application servers from the data path. This integration reduces the cost and complexity associated with traditional backup applications while still providing the benefits of native backups.

TimeFinder/SnapVX operations are not supported on working ProtectPoint snapshots. TimeFinder/SnapVX operations are, however, supported to help repair failing ProtectPoint snapshots.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 285

Protecting storage groups using ProtectPoint

This procedure explains how to backup thin volumes to Data Domain arrays.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977.

You must have StorageAdmin permission.

The Data Domain appliance must be connected and zoned to the storage system.

Provide the Data Domain Admin the number and size of volumes in the production storage

group and request that they provide you with double the number of similar volumes (masked/visible to the storage system). For example, if the production storage group contains 10 volumes, the Data Domain Admin should provide you with the LUN numbers of 20 similar volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

286 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To protect storage groups using ProtectPoint:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard.

5. Select Backup Using ProtectPoint.

6. Click Next.

7. Type the name of the Point In Time Copy Name and click Next.

8. Type a name for the Backup Storage Group, or leave the system-generated suggestion.

9. Select the external LUNs to add to the backup storage group and click Add to Storage Group. Note that the external LUNs you select must match in number and capacity the volumes in the production storage group.

10. Click Next.

11. Type a name for the New Restore Storage Group, or leave the system-generated suggestion.

12. Select the external LUNs to add to the restore storage group and click Add to Storage Group. Note that the external LUNs you select must match in number and capacity the volumes in the production storage group.

13. Click Next.

14. Verify your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

15. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

16. Once the job completes successfully, provide the following information to the Data Domain Admin:

The LUN numbers used in the backup storage group

The LUN numbers used in the restore storage group

The name of the point in time copy

Expanding ProtectPoint storage groups

This procedure explains how to increase the amount of storage in a storage group protected by ProtectPoint.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 287

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must have StorageAdmin permission.

The Data Domain appliance must be connected and zoned to the VMAX storage system.

Provide the Data Domain Admin the number and size of volumes that you added to the

production storage group and request that they provide you with double the number of similar volumes (masked/visible to the VMAX storage system). For example, if the production storage group contains 10 volumes, the Data Domain Admin should provide you with the LUN numbers of 20 similar volumes.

To expand protected storage groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total to open the Storage Groups list view.

4. Select the storage group, click , and click Expand ProtectPoint to open the Expand ProtectPoint wizard.

5. Select the Point In Time Copythat you want to expand and click Next.

6. Select the external LUNs to add to the backup storage group and click Add to Group. Note that you need to select the same number of external LUNs as the number of volumes added to the production storage group.

7. Click Next.

8. Select the Restore Storage Group.

9. Select the external LUNs to add to the restore storage group and click Add to Group. Note that you need to select the same number of external LUNs as the number of volumes added to the production storage group.

10. Click Next.

11. Verify your selections. To change any of them, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

12. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

13. Once the job has completed, provide the following information to the Data Domain Admin:

The LUN numbers added to the backup storage group

The LUN numbers added to the restore storage group

The name of the point in time copy

Chapter 4: Storage Management

288 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Removing external LUNs

This procedure explains how to remove external LUNs from storage groups protected with ProtectPoint.

Before you begin:

This feature requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

LUNs must be virtualized.

Encapsulated LUNs whose volumes are in a storage group cannot be removed.

To remove external LUNs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > External Storage to open the External Storage page.

3. Optional: Use the tree view lists to filter the list of external LUNs by selecting various combinations of members within a tree list view (control ports, external ports, and external LUNs). You can select a single item, multiple items in consecutive rows (hold shift key and select), or multiple items in non-consecutive rows (hold control key and select). As each selection is made, the filtered results table is updated to reflect the current combination of filter criteria.

4. From the filtered results table, select one or more LUNs and click Remove to open the Remove External LUNs dialog box.

5. Optional: To view details on the selected LUNs, click Show selected external LUNs.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Understanding FAST.X FAST.X allows the seamless integration of VMAX3 Family storage systems and heterogeneous arrays. It enables LUNs on external storage to be used as raw capacity. Data services such as SRDF, TimeFinder, and Open Replicator are supported on the external device.

FAST.X requires HYPERMAX OS 5977, or higher.

For additional information on FAST.X, refer to the following documents:

Solutions Enabler Array Management CLI Guide

Solutions Enabler TimeFinder CLI User Guide

VMAX3 Family Product Guide

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 289

Viewing external disks

The external disk list is available only for HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You must refresh the external disks list to view the latest status.

To view the external disks list using the Storage Groups Dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

To view the external disks list using the Storage Resource Pools view:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Resource Pools to open the Storage Resource Pools view.

3. Select the tab for the SRP.

4. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

Filtered results table

The following properties display:

External LUN WWN World Wide Name of the external disk.

Spindle Spindle ID of the external spindle.

Vendor Vendor name of the external disk.

Capacity (GB) Capacity in GB of the external disk.

Volume Volume ID on the external storage system.

Array ID ID of the storage system.

Service State Availability of the external disk. Possible values are Normal, Degraded, and

Failed. Failed means that there are no network paths available to the external LUN. Degraded means that there are paths from only one of the supporting DX directors. Normal means that there are network paths available from both supporting DX directors.

Disk State The state of the disk. Valid values are Active, Drained, Draining, and Disabled.

Drained Drain information about the disk if it is in Drained or Draining state. Otherwise it

displays "-".

Chapter 4: Storage Management

290 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following controls are available:

Add eDisks Adding external disks

Remove Removing external disks on the next page

Start Draining Start draining external disks

Stop Draining Stop draining external disks

Activate Activating external disks

Adding external disks

You can add an external disk to the external disk group of a storage resource pool (SRP). You can complete the action from the SRP detailed view or from the external disk list view.

When adding an external disk for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, if there is no pre-existing external disk group, it is created automatically when the external disk is added to the selected SRP. If an external disk group exists for the external arrays external LUN WWN, the external LUN WWN is added to it.

This action can be performed only for HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To add an external disk:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. Do one of the following:

Click Add eDisk.

If the SRP is an EMC CloudArray SRP and one or more external disks have already been added, further disks can be added only from the external disk list view.

In the Disk Groups panel, click the name of the disk group. In the external disk list view, click Add eDisk.

The Add eDisks dialog box displays the available external LUN WWNs from multiple external arrays.

6. Select the external disk to be added.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 291

Removing external disks

You can remove an external disk from a storage resource pool (SRP) if it is in a Drained state.

This action can be performed only for HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To remove an external disk:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP from which you want to remove an external disk.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

6. Select the external disk that you want to remove and click Remove. The Remove External LUNs dialog box displays and prompts for confirmation that you want to remove the external disk.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Start draining external disks

Before you begin:

The storage resource pool (SRP) containing the external disk you want to drain must have sufficient free space to absorb the allocated tracks from the external disk that is being drained.

You can drain a disk only if it is not currently draining or already drained.

To start a drain operation on an external disk:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

6. Click Start Draining. The Drain eDisk Dialog displays and prompts for confirmation that you want to start a draining operation.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

292 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Stop draining external disks

Before you begin:

You can stop the drain operation on an external disk only if it is currently draining.

To stop a draining operation on an external disk:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

6. Click Stop Draining. The Drain eDisk Dialog displays and prompts for confirmation that you want to stop a draining operation.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Activating external disks

You can activate an external disk if it is in a draining, drained, or disabled state.

Before you begin:

This action can be performed only for HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To activate an external disk:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

3. In the Storage Resource Pools section, select the SRP.

4. In the Reports section, click View SRP Details.

5. In the Disk Groups section, click the disk group name. The external disks list displays.

6. Select one or more external disks. Click Activate.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 293

Understanding Federated Tiered Storage Federated Tiered Storage (FTS) allows you to attach external storage to a VMAX system. Attaching external storage allows you to use physical disk space on existing VMAX systems while gaining access to VMAX features such as local replication, remote replication, storage tiering, data management, and data migration.

FTS requires Enginuity 5876 and is not supported on VMAX systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

For additional information on FTS, refer to the following documents:

Symmetrix Federated Tiered Storage (FTS) Technical Notes

Solutions Enabler Array Management CLI Product Guide

Solutions Enabler TimeFinder Family CLI User Guide

Symmetrix VMAX Family with Enginuity (10K, 20K, 40K) Product Guide

Virtualizing external LUNs

When you attach external storage to a Symmetrix system, FAST.X virtualizes an external Symmetrix systems SCSI logical units as Symmetrix disks called eDisks. eDisks have two modes of operation:

Encapsulation Allows you to preserve existing data on external Symmetrix systems and

access it through Symmetrix volumes. These volumes are called encapsulated volumes.

External Provisioning Allows you to use external storage as raw capacity for new Symmetrix

volumes. These volumes are called externally provisioned volumes. Existing data on the external volumes is deleted when they are externally provisioned.

The following restrictions apply to eDisks:

Can only be unprotected volumes. The RAID protection scheme of eDisks is dependent on the

external Symmetrix system.

Cannot be AS400, CKD, or gatekeeper volumes.

Cannot be used as VAULT, SFS, or ACLX volumes.

Encapsulation

Encapsulation has two modes of operation:

Encapsulation for disk group provisioning (DP encapsulation) The eDisk is encapsulated

and exported from the Symmetrix system as disk group provisioned volumes.

Encapsulation for virtual provisioning (VP encapsulation) The eDisk is encapsulated and

exported from the Symmetrix system as thin volumes.

In either case, Enginuity automatically creates the necessary Symmetrix volumes. If the eDisk is larger than the maximum Symmetrix volume capacity or the configured minimum auto meta capacity, Enginuity creates multiple Symmetrix volumes to account for the full capacity of the eDisk. These Symmetrix volumes are concatenated into a single concatenated meta volume to allow access to the complete volume of data available from the eDisk.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

294 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

External provisioning

When you virtualize an eDisk for external provisioning, you can then create Symmetrix volumes from the external disk group and present the storage to users. You can also use this storage to create a new FAST VP tier.

If you use external provisioning, any data that is currently on the external volume is deleted.

Geometry of encapsulated volumes

Enginuity builds storage volumes based on the storage system cylinder size (fifteen 64 K tracks), so the capacity of storage volumes will not always match the raw capacity of the eDisk. If the capacity does not match, Enginuity sets a custom geometry on the encapsulated volume. For created meta volumes, Enginuity defines the geometry on the meta head, and only the last member can have a capacity that spans beyond the raw capacity of the eDisk.

Encapsulated volumes that have a cylinder size larger than the reported user-defined geometry are considered geometry limited. For additional details and a list of restrictions that apply to geometry- limited volumes, refer to the Solutions Enabler Array Controls CLI Guide.

To virtualize external LUNs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > External Storage to open the External Storage page.

3. Optional: Click the Not Virtualized checkbox above the filtered list view to see a list of external LUNs that have not been virtualized.

4. Select the external LUNs that you want to virtualize.

5. Click Virtualize to open the Virtualize External LUNs dialog box.

6. Select an import method from the Import Method drop-down menu. This will determine the mode of operation for the eDisk.

If you select Raw Space - External Provisioning, any data that is currently on the external volume is deleted.

7. Select an external disk group from the Disk Group drop-down menu, or type a disk group name to create a new external disk group. Enginuity will add the virtualized external LUNs to the specified external disk group.

8. If you are using Virtual Provisioning, select an empty pool or an existing pool composed of externally provisioned data volumes from the Thin Pool drop-down menu. Type a pool name if you want to create a new pool.

9. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To override the auto meta member capacity configured on the Symmetrix system, specify the

Chapter 4: Storage Management

External Storage 295

unit of measurement by selecting GB, MB, or CYL from the drop-down menu, and then select a capacity from the Meta Member Capacity drop-down menu.

The Total Enabled Pool Capacity in GB is displayed.

2. If you want all of the created storage volumes to be the same capacity, click the Create Equal Meta Member Capacity check box. If you do not select this check box, the meta tail will be smaller than the other volumes in the meta.

3. If you want to specify a DX director for the path to the eDisk, select a director from the DX Director drop-down menu.

4. Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

296 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Understanding storage templates Storage templates are a reusable set of storage requirements that simplify storage management for virtual data centers by eliminating many of the repetitive tasks required to create and make storage available to hosts/applications. With this feature Administrators and Storage Administrators create templates for their common provisioning tasks and then invoke them later when performing such things as:

Creating or expanding storage groups (Auto-provisioning Groups).

Creating volumes (regular and thin).

In addition, storage templates can be shared (using import and export) between administrators and among Unisphere servers to help facilitate consistency across the storage environment.

Storage templates require Enginuity 5874 - 5876 and storage groups.

Creating storage templates This procedure explains how to create storage templates.

Before you begin:

Storage templates require Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

This feature is only available for a user with Admin or StorageAdmin permission.

To create a storage template:

1. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

2. Click Create to open the Create Storage Template wizard.

3. Type a Storage Template Name. Storage template names can be up to 64 character long.

4. Select the Symmetrix ID with which the template will be associated or select Any to associate the template with any supported storage system.

5. Select whether to include Virtual or Regular volumes in the template.

6. Specify the capacity that the template will find or create capacity by typing the Number of Volumes, and selecting a Volume Capacity.

7. Click Next.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding storage templates 297

8. Do the following, depending on whether you are including virtual or regular volumes in the template:

Virtual volumes:

a. Select a Volume Configuration.

b. Select the Thin Pool to which you are going to bind the volumes.

Regular volumes:

a. Select the RAID Protection level.

b. Select Create BCV Volume, if required.

c. If the template will be associated with a specific storage system, select the target Disk Technology and Disk Group (name and number).

9. Click one of the following:

Next to verify your selection and create the template.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. If you are including virtual volumes in the template, complete the following steps:

a. To preallocate the entire volume, select Allocate Full Volume Capacity.

b. To maintain the amount of preallocated space through thin volume reclaims and volume copies, select Persist preallocated capacity through reclaim or copy.

2. To specify the Method to use when selecting volumes, select one of the following:

Best Effort Specifies to satisfy as much as possible of the total requested capacity from existing volumes, and then create the volumes necessary to meet any shortfall.

Existing Volumes Specifies to select from existing volumes.

Create New Volumes Specifies to create new volumes.

3. To use SRDF volumes in the template, select one of the following; otherwise, leave this field set to None.

None Specifies to not use SRDF volumes.

RDF Dynamic Specifies to only use dynamic SRDF volumes.

R1 Specifies to only use R1 volumes. This option is only available when you are creating or modifying a template that uses the Find Existing method for locating volumes; except when the volumes are thin (TDEVs), in which case this option is not available.

4. Select the volume Emulation. The storage template uses only volumes of the specified emulation.

5. To include metavolumes in the template, select Create Meta and complete the following steps:

a. Select the Meta Volume Configuration. The storage template uses only meta volumes of the specified configuration.

b. Select the Meta Volume Member Capacity. The storage template uses only meta volumes of the specified capacity.

6. Click Next.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

298 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

7. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

8. Click Finish.

Exporting storage templates This procedure explains how to export storage templates to a temporary directory on the Unisphere server.

Before you begin:

Storage templates require Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The user must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

To export storage templates:

1. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

2. Select one or more templates and click Export.

3. Click OK in the confirmation message.

4. Copy the templates from one Unisphere server to the other. Templates reside in the server's template directory (Install_directory\EMC\SMAS\jboss\domain\servers\server- 0\data\Template Files).

Importing storage templates This procedure explains how to import storage templates to a Unisphere server.

Before you begin:

Storage templates require Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

The user must have Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

One or more exported storage templates.

To import storage templates:

1. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

2. Click Import to open the Import Storage Template list.

All previously exported storage templates display.

3. Select one or more templates and click OK.

Deleting storage templates This procedure explains how to delete storage templates.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding storage templates 299

Before you begin:

Storage templates require Enginuity 5874 - 5876.

This feature is only available for a user with Administrator or StorageAdmin permission.

To delete a storage template:

1. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

2. Select the template and click Delete.

3. Click Delete in the confirmation box.

Viewing storage templates 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

The Storage Template list view allows you to view and manage storage templates.

The following properties display:

Storage Template Name Name of the template.

Symmetrix ID Storage system associated with the template. Any indicates that the

template is associated with any Symmetrix system running Enginuity 5874 or higher connected to the server.

Volume Type Type of volume specified in the template.

Protection/Volume Configuration RAID protection level/Thin or Thin BCV.

Total Request Capacity (GB) Capacity the template will find or create.

Emulation Emulation type of the disks specified in the template.

Method Method the template is using to select volumes. Possible values are:

Best Effort Specifies to satisfy as much as possible of the total requested capacity from existing volumes, and then create the volumes necessary to meet any shortfall.

Existing Volumes Specifies to select from existing volumes.

Create New Volumes Specifies to create new volumes.

The following controls are available:

Create See Creating storage templates on page 297.

View Details See Viewing storage template details on the facing page.

Import See Importing storage templates on the previous page.

Export See Exporting storage templates on the previous page.

Delete See Deleting storage templates on the previous page.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

300 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing storage template details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Storage Templates to open the Storage Template list view.

3. Select the storage template and click View Details to open its Details view.

The storage template Details view allows you to view and manage storage templates.

Depending on configuration, some of the following properties display:

Template Name Name of the template. To rename a template, type a new name over

the existing and click Apply. Storage template names can contain up to 64 characters.

Symmetrix ID The identifier of the associated storage system. Any indicates that the

template is associated with all supported storage systems.

Volume Type The template specifies virtual or regular volumes.

Number of Volumes The number of volumes the template will find/create.

Volume Capacity Capacity of each volume.

Total Requested Capacity Total requested capacity.

Create Meta Whether the template will find/create meta volumes.

Meta Volume Configuration Configuration of the meta volumes (Striped or

Concatenated).

Meta Volume Member Capacity Capacity of each meta member.

Meta Volume Member Count Including Head Number of meta members, including the

head.

Protection/Volume Configuration Protection level/configuration of the volumes used in

the template.

Disk Group Disk group from which the template is finding/creating volumes.

Disk Technology Disk technology type.

Thin Pool Thin pool to which the thin volumes are bound.

Preallocated Capacity for each volume How much of each volume is preallocated.

Persist Preallocation Through Reclaim or Copy Whether to maintain the amount of

preallocated space through thin volume reclaims and volume copies.

Method Method used to select volumes. Possible values are:

Best Effort Specifies to satisfy as much as possible of the total requested capacity from existing volumes, and then create the volumes necessary to meet any shortfall.

Existing Volumes Specifies to select from existing volumes.

Create New Volumes Specifies to create new volumes.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding storage templates 301

Dynamic RDF Capability RDF capability of the volumes in the template. Possible values

are:

None Specifies to not use SRDF volumes.

RDF Dynamic Specifies to only use dynamic SRDF volumes.

R1 Specifies to only use R1 volumes. This option is only available when you are creating/modifying a template that uses the Find Existing method for locating volumes; except when the volumes are thin (TDEVs), in which case this option is not available.

Emulation Emulation of the volumes in the template.

The following controls are available:

Create See Creating storage templates on page 297.

Delete See Deleting storage templates on page 299.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the storage

group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

302 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Reservations

Reserving volumes The following explains how to reserve volumes and front-end mapping addresses for future configuration and masking operations. When using this feature, you reserve the volumes/addresses you plan on using, verify that no one else has reserved the resources, and release the reservations when the task is complete.

All reservations are assigned a reserve ID, indicating that the specified volumes/addresses are reserved. Any attempt to use the reserved volumes/addresses will return a message indicating that the volumes/addresses are reserved.

Before you begin:

Verify that the reservation feature is enabled for the storage system. For more information, refer to See Setting system preferences on page 38.

To reserve volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the system Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

4. Click Create to open the Create Reservation wizard.

5. Locate the volumes by selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

Additional Criteria Allows you to add conditional expressions to your query, as describe

next:

a. Select values for the following:

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Is equal to Operator that establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

b. To add another expression, click Add Another, and repeat the previous step. To clear your criteria, click Clear All.

6. Click Find Volumes.

7. Select the Volumes .

8. Type any Comments regarding the reservation. The requirement for this field is set in system preferences.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Reservations 303

9. Select Expiration and click calendar to open the Reservation Expiration dialog box.

10. Select an Expiration Date and Expiration Time.

11. Click OK to close the Reservation Expiration dialog box.

12. Click Reserve to create the reservation.

Adding volumes to reservations 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the system Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

4. Select the reservation and click View Details to open its Details view.

5. Click Add to open the Add Volumes to Reservations wizard.

6. Locate the volumes by selecting/typing values for any number of the following criteria:

Capacity equal to Filters the list for volumes with a specific capacity.

Volume ID Filters the list for a volume with specific ID.

Volume Identifier Name Filters the list for the specified volume name.

7. Click Find Volumes to run the query now, or Show Advanced to add conditional expressions to your query, as described next.

a. Select values for the following, and then click Add.

Category Specifies the broad category.

Attribute Refines the category.

Operator Establishes the relationship between the attribute and the value.

Value Conditions for the specified attribute.

b. Repeat the previous step for each additional expression.

c. Click Find Volumes.

8. Select the Volumes and click Add to Reservation.

Removing volumes from reservations 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the system Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

4. Select a reservation and click View Details.

5. In the Related Objects section of the Properties dialog, click Reserved Volumes.

6. In the Reserved Volumes list, select the reservation and click Remove.

7. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

304 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Releasing reservations 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the system Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

4. Select one or more reservations and click Release.

5. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Viewing reservations 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the System Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

Use the Reservations list view to display and manage reservations for a Symmetrix system.

The following properties display:

Reservation Reservation ID.

Owner User that created the reservation.

Application Application used to create the reservation.

Host Host from which the reservation was created.

Reserved Volumes Number of reserved volumes.

Creation Date/time the reservation was created.

Expiration Date/time the reservation will expire. Never is the default.

User Comment User-supplied comments.

The following controls are available:

Create Reserving volumes on page 303

View Detail See Viewing reservation details below.

Release Releasing reservations above

Viewing reservation details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select System > Dashboard to open the system Dashboard.

3. In the Summary panel, click View Reservations to open the Reservations list view.

4. Select the reservation and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the reservation Details view to display and manage a reservation. This view contains two panels, Properties, and Related Objects.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Reservations 305

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Reservation Reservation ID.

Owner User that created the reservation.

Application Application used to create the reservation.

Host Host from which the reservation was created.

Reserved Volumes Number of reserved volumes.

Creation Date/time the reservation was created.

Expiration Date/time the reservation will expire. Never is the default.

User Comment User-supplied comments.

The following controls are available:

Create Reserving volumes on page 303

Release Releasing reservations on the previous page

Add Adding volumes to reservations on page 304

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in and associated with the reservation. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Reserved Volumes - 2 will open a view listing the two volumes held in the reservation.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

306 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Understanding Optimizer Optimizer improves storage system performance by continuously monitoring the back-end activity and swapping highly active volumes with idle volumes to achieve a balanced workload across the disks. This automated, continuous process is based on user-defined parameters and is completely transparent to end users, hosts, and applications in the environment.

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running Enginuity version 5671 - 5876.

For information on Optimizer concepts, refer to the VMAX Product Guide.

Managing Optimizer The Optimizer dashboard provides you with a single place from which to manage Optimizer.

Before you begin:

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running an Enginuity version lower than 5977.

To access the Optimizer dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer.

Optimizer dashboard

The Optimizer dashboard provides access to the following Optimizer parameters:

Shared Parameters:

The following parameters are shared between Optimizer and FAST. Therefore, changes made to these parameters will affect both Optimizer and FAST:

Data Movement Mode Specifies whether to move data automatically (Automatic) or to wait for user approval before moving data (User Approved).

Maximum Number of Volumes Moved Per Day Specifies the maximum number of moves to perform in a 24 hour period, starting at 12:00 AM. Possible values range from 2 to 200.

Maximum Simultaneous Volumes Moved Specifies the maximum number of moves that can be performed at one time. Possible values range from 2 to 32.

The following parameters are shared between Optimizer and FAST VP:

Workload Analysis Period Specifies the amount of workload sampling to maintain for sample analysis. Possible values are specified in units of time (hours, days, or weeks) and can range from 2 hours to 4 weeks, with the default being one week.

Time to Sample before First Analysis Specifies the minimum amount of workload sampling to complete before analyzing the samples for the first time. When setting this

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding Optimizer 307

parameter, be sure to allow enough time (usually a week) to establish a good characterization of the typical workload. This parameter allows you to begin operations before the entire Workload period has elapsed. Possible values range from 2 hours to the value specified for the Workload Analysis Period parameter, with the default being eight hours.

Optimizer Specific Settings:

Startup Mode Specifies whether Optimizer starts automatically with the service processor (Automatic), or if it requires manual intervention (Manual). This option does not apply/display for Symmetrix arrays running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Hot Spot Analysis Specifies whether to run the hot spot analysis algorithm. The hot spot analysis algorithm attempts to improve Symmetrix performance by swapping devices that it determines will reduce disk access times.

Maintain Physical Mirror Specifies whether Optimizer should maintain any RAID 5 groups. This option does not apply/display for Symmetrix arrays running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Maintain RAID 5 Groups Specifies whether Optimizer should maintain any RAID 5 groups. This option does not apply/display for Symmetrix arrays running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

DMX Lock Status:Host that currently holds the Optimizer lock on the Symmetrix service

processor. This option does not apply/display for Symmetrix arrays running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Optimizer Status:Optimizer's current state.

The Optimizer dashboard provides access to the following Optimizer controls:

Swap/Move List See Viewing Optimizer swap/move lists on page 311.

Swap/Move History Viewing Optimizer swap/move history on page 311

Approve Swap See Approving Optimizer Swaps on page 310.

Start/Lock Lock/Unlock/Start/Stop dialog box (Does not apply/display for Enginuity 5874 or

higher).

Enable/Disable Enabling/Disabling Optimizer on the facing page (Does not apply/display for

versions lower than Enginuity 5874)

Apply Applies changes made in the parameter list.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the parameter list.

Starting/Stopping Optimizer The following explains how to start/stop Optimizer on a Unisphere client.

Before you begin:

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running an Enginuity version lower than 5977.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

308 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

This procedure is only required when performing operations on a storage system running an

Enginuity version lower than 5874.

To start/stop Optimizer:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Start/Lock to open the Lock/Unlock/Start/Stop dialog box.

4. Click Start or Stop.

5. Click OK.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Enabling/Disabling Optimizer

Before you begin:

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running an Enginuity version lower than 5977.

This procedure explains how to enable/disable Optimizer on a Symmetrix system running

Enginuity 5874 or higher:

To enable/disable Optimizer:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Enable/Disable to open the Enable/Disable dialog box.

4. Click Enable or Disable.

5. Click OK.

6. Click Close in the confirmation message.

Locking/Unlocking Optimizer The following explains how to lock/unlock Optimizer controls. Locking Optimizer prevents other uses from making changes while you are working with the software.

Before you begin:

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running an Enginuity version lower than 5977.

This procedure is only required when performing operations on a storage system running an

Enginuity version lower than 5874.

To start/stop Optimizer:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Start/Lock to open the Lock/Unlock/Start/Stop dialog box.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding Optimizer 309

4. Click Lock or Unlock.

5. Click OK.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Approving Optimizer Swaps

Before you begin:

Optimizer is supported on storage systems running an Enginuity version lower than 5977.

To approve Optimizer swaps:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Approve Swap to open the Approve Swap dialog box.

The following properties display, depending on the Enginuity version running on the storage system:

Group Group number associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume 1 First volume involved in the swap/move.

Volume 2 Second volume involved in the swap/move.

Status Status of the swap/move.

Execution Time Time the swap/move started.

Type Whether the plan was manually defined or auto generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

Enginuity versions lower than 5874:

Group Group associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume 1 Volume being moved/swapped.

Mirror/Member Mirror position of the volume.

From Original location of the volume.

To New location of volume.

Status Status of the swap/move.

Execution Time Time the swap/move started.

Type Whether the plan was Manually Defined or Auto Generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

4. Select a swap.

5. Select the Schedule for execution. Do one of the following:

Select According to Optimizer policy.

Chapter 4: Storage Management

310 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Specify a date and time.

Select Decline Plan.

Viewing Optimizer swap/move lists The following explains how to view information on the current Optimizer/FAST plan:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Swap/Move List to open the Swap/Move List dialog box.

The following properties display, depending on the Enginuity version running on the storage system:

Enginity 5874 or higher:

Group Group associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume 1 First volume involved in the swap/move.

Volume 2 Second volume involved in the swap/move.

Status Status of the swap/move.

Execution Time Time the swap/move started.

Type Whether the plan was Manually Defined or Auto Generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

Group Percent Complete How much (%) of the plan is complete.

Estimated Time to Completion How long until the plan is complete.

Enginuity versions lower than 5874:

Group Group associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume Volume being moved/swapped.

Mirror/Member Mirror position of the volume.

From Original location of the volume.

To New location of volume.

Status Status of the swap/move.

Execution Time Time the swap/move started.

Type Whether the plan was Manually Defined or Auto Generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

4. Optional: To refresh the list of swaps/moves, click Refresh.

Viewing Optimizer swap/move history The following explains how to view information on the past Optimizer/FAST swaps/moves:

Chapter 4: Storage Management

Understanding Optimizer 311

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Storage > Optimizer to open the Optimizer dashboard.

3. Click Swap/Move History to open the Swap/Move History dialog box.

4. Specify the time range you are interested in and click Run Filter.

The following properties display, depending on the Enginuity version running on the storage system:

Enginity 5874 or higher:

Group Group associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume 1 First volume involved in the swap/move.

Volume 2 Second volume involved in the swap/move.

Start Time Time (in Eastern Daylight Time) the swap/move started. EDT is 4 hours behind

of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

End Time Time (in Eastern Daylight Time) the swap/move completed. EDT is 4 hours

behind of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Type Whether the plan was Manually Defined or Auto Generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

Enginuity versions lower than 5874:

Group Group associated with the swaps/moves.

Volume Volume being moved/swapped.

Mirror/Member Mirror position of the volume.

Hyper From Original location of the volume.

Hyper To New location of volume.

Attributes Whether the plan was Manually Defined or Auto Generated by FAST or by

Optimizer.

Start Time Time (in Eastern Daylight Time) the swap/move started. EDT is 4 hours behind

of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

End Time Time (in Eastern Daylight Time) the swap/move completed. EDT is 4 hours

behind of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Chapter 4: Storage Management

312 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host Management

This chapter contains the following:

Hosts 314

Host Groups 323

Masking views 330

Initiators 335

Port groups 342

Virtual servers 349

CU images 354

Host aliases 361

Host Cache Adapters 365

Chapter 5: Host Management 313

CHAPTER 5

Hosts

Creating hosts

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher.

The maximum number of initiators allowed in a host depends on the storage operating

environment:

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876, the maximum allowed is 32.

For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, the maximum allowed is 64.

To create hosts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Click Create Host to open the Create Host dialog.

4. Type a Host Name. Host names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host names are case-insensitive.

5. Select the Fibre radio button to filter the available initiators table to display Fibre Channel initiators only or select the ISCSI radio button to filter the table to display iSCSI initiators only. The Fibre radio button is selected by default.

6. Add initiators to the host:

a. Specify the initiator by typing its name or by selecting it from the list. To filter the list, type part of a initiator name. Repeat this step for each additional initiator.

Initiators can only belong to one host at a time; therefore, any initiators that do not appear in the list already belong to another host.

Chapter 5: Host Management

314 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

b. Click Add.

c. Repeat these steps for each additional initiator.

7. Optional: Set the host port attributes:

a. Click Set Host Flags to open the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

b. Optional: Select a host whose flag settings you want to copy.

c. Modify any of the attributes, by selecting the corresponding Override option (thereby activating the Enable option) and enable (select) or disable (clear) the flag.

d. Optional: Select Consistent LUNs to specify that LUN values for the host must be kept consistent for all volumes within each masking view of which this host is part. When set, any masking operation involving this host that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations.

e. Click OK to close the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

8. Click either of the following:

Run Now to start the task now.

Add to Job List to schedule it for a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on page 843.

Adding initiators to hosts This procedure explains how to add host initiators.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, iSCSI and fibre initiators cannot be

mixed in the same host.

To add initiators to hosts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Initiators to open the host's Initiators list view.

5. Click Add Initiators to open the Add Initiators dialog box.

6. Specify the initiator by typing its name or by selecting it from the list. The Initiators table is a filtered list based on whether the initiator is Fibre Channel or iSCSI.To filter the list, type part of the initiator name. Click Add. Repeat this step for each additional host.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Hosts 315

Removing initiators from hosts

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

To remove initiators from hosts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Initiators to open the host's Initiators list view.

5. Select the initiator and click Remove.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Modifying hosts

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

Modifying hosts:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host, click more , and select Modify to open the Modify Host dialog box.

4. To change the Host Name, highlight it and type a new name over it. Host names must be unique from other hosts on the Symmetrix system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host names are case- insensitive.

Chapter 5: Host Management

316 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

5. Do the following, depending on whether you are adding or removing initiators:

6. Adding initiators:

a. In the Select Initiators list box, type the initiator name or select it from the list. To filter the list, type part of a initiator name.

Initiators can only belong to one host at a time; therefore, any initiators that do not appear in the list already belong to another host. The Add Initiators table is a filtered list based on whether the host is Fibre Channel or iSCSI.

b. Click Add.

c. Repeat these steps for each additional initiator.

Removing initiators:

a. In the Initiators Added to Host list, select the initiator and click Remove.

b. Click OK in the confirmation message.

c. Repeat these steps for each additional initiator.

7. Click either of the following:

Run Now to start the task now.

Add to Job List to schedule it for a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on page 843.

Renaming hosts/host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

To rename host/host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group from the list and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Properties panel, type a new name for the host/host group and click Apply. Host/host group names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host/host group names are case-insensitive.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Hosts 317

Setting host/host group flags 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group, click more , and select Set Flags to open the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

4. Optional: Select a host/host group whose flag settings you want to copy.

5. Modify any of the flags, by selecting the corresponding Override option (thereby activating the Enable option) and enable (select) or disable (clear) the flag.

6. Optional: Select Consistent LUNs to specify that LUN values for the host must be kept consistent for all volumes within each masking view of which this host is part. When set, any masking operation involving this host that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations.

7. Click OK.

Deleting hosts/host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

Deleting hosts/host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group, click more , and select Delete.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation dialog box.

Viewing hosts/host groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

Use the Hosts list view to view and manage hosts.

The following properties display:

Chapter 5: Host Management

318 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Name Host/host group name. An arrow icon at the beginning of the name indicates that

the host is a host group. Click the icon to view hosts contained in the group.

Masking Views Number of masking view associated with the host.

Initiators Number of initiators in the host.

Consistent LUNs Flag indicating if the Consistent LUNs flag is set. When set, any

masking operation involving this host/host group that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations. indicates that the feature is set.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden for the host.

indicates that there are overridden port flags.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the host.

The following controls are available:

Create Host See Creating hosts on page 314.

Create Host Group Creating host groups on page 323

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 110

View Details See Viewing host/host group details on page 328.

Modify Modifying hosts on page 316 /Modifying host groups on page 325

Set Flags Setting host/host group flags on page 326

Delete Deleting hosts/host groups on page 326

Viewing host/host group details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the host Details view to view and manage hosts/host groups. This view contains two panels, the Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The properties and controls available in this panel depend on whether you are viewing details of an individual host or of host group, and on the storage operating environment.

The following properties display:

Chapter 5: Host Management

Hosts 319

Name Host/host group name. To rename the host/host group, type a new name over the

existing and click Apply. Host/host group names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host names are case-insensitive.

Number of Hosts Number of hosts in the group. This field only displays for host groups.

Number of Host Groups Number of host groups in which this host is a member. This field

only displays for individual hosts.

Number of Initiators Number of initiators in the host/host group. For host groups, the value

includes initiators in any child host groups.

Number of Masking Views Number of masking views with which the host/host group is

associated.

Consistent LUNs Flag indicating if the Consistent LUNs flag is set. When set, any masking

operation involving this host/host group that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations. indicates that the feature is set.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden for the host. indicates

that there are overridden port flags.

Enabled Port Flags List of any enabled port flags overridden by the host/host group.

Disabled Port Flags List of any disabled port flags overridden by the host/host group.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the host/host group.

The following controls are available:

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 110

Modify Modifying hosts on page 316/Modifying host groups on page 325

Set flags See Setting host/host group flags on page 326.

Delete See Deleting hosts/host groups on page 326.

Apply Applies new host group name entered in the Name field.

Cancel Cancels the rename action.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the initiator group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Initiators - 2 opens the view listing the two initiators contained in the initiator group.

Chapter 5: Host Management

320 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing host initiators 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, click Initiators to open the host Initiators list view.

The following properties display:

Initiator WWN or IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name) ID of the initiator.

Alias User-defined initiator name.

Masking Views Number of associated masking views.

The following controls are available:

Add Initiator Adding initiators to hosts on page 315

Remove Removing initiators from hosts on page 316

View Details See Viewing initiator details on page 339.

Host/Host group flags

Attribute Description

Common Serial Number

Enables a unique serial number. This attribute is only available on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

Volume Set Addressing**

Enables the volume set addressing mode.

When using volume set addressing, you must specify a 4-digit address in the following range:

(0)000-(0)007, (0)010-(0)017,... to a maximum of (0)FF0-(0)FF7

Where the first digit must always be set to 0 (storage system does not currently support the upper range of volume set addressing), the second digit is the VBus number, the third digit is the target, and the fourth digit is the LUN.

Avoid Reset Broadcast*

Enables a SCSI bus reset to only occur to the port that received the reset (not broadcast to all channels).

Environ Set* Enables the environmental error reporting by the Symmetrix to the host on the specific port.

Disable Q Reset on UA

When enabled, a Unit Attention (UA) that is propagated from another director does not flush the queue for this volume on this director. Used for hosts that do not expect the queue to be flushed on a 0629 sense (only on a hard reset).

Table 4: Host/Host group flags

Chapter 5: Host Management

Hosts 321

Attribute Description

SCSI 3* Alters the inquiry data (when returned by any volume on the port) to report that the Symmetrix supports the SCSI-3 protocol. When disabled, the SCSI 2 protocol is supported.

SCSI Support1 (OS2007)*

Provides a stricter compliance with SCSI standards for managing volume identifiers, multi-port targets, unit attention reports, and the absence of a volume at LUN 0.

To enable the SCSI Support1 attribute, you must also enable the SPC2 Protocol Version attribute.

SPC2 Protocol Version*

This flag should be enabled (default) in a Windows 2003 environment running Microsoft HCT test version 12.1. When setting this flag, the port must be offline.

AS400 Indicates whether AS/400 is enabled. This attribute is only available on storage system's running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

Open VMS*,** Enables an Open VMS fiber connection.

* To enable/disable this flag when it is already overridden (i.e., the Override option is already selected), you must:

1. Clear the Override option and click OK to close the dialog.

2. Open the dialog again, select Override, and then the desired state (Enable/Disable).

3. Click OK.

** For storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, if Volume Set Addressing is overridden and enabled, the Open VMS flag must be disabled. However, if you do not actually select the Open VMS override option, Solutions Enabler will override and disable it.

If the Open VMS flag is overridden and enabled, the Volume Set Addressing flag must be disabled. However, if you do not actually select the Volume Set Addressing override option, Solutions Enabler will automatically override and disable it.

Chapter 5: Host Management

322 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host Groups

Creating host groups This procedure explains how to create a host group (collection of hosts). For instructions on creating a host, refer to Creating hosts on page 314.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher.

The maximum number of hosts allowed in a host group depends on the HYPERMAX OS:

For Enginuity 5874 - 5876, the maximum allowed is 32.

For HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, the maximum allowed is 64.

To create host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Click Create Host Group to open the Create Host Group dialog box.

4. Type a Host Group Name. Host group names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host group names are case-insensitive.

5. Select the Fibre radio button to filter the available hosts table to display Fibre Channel hosts only or select the ISCSI radio button to filter the table to display iSCSI hosts only. The Fibre radio button is slected by default.

6. Add hosts to the group:

To create new hosts to add to the group, click Create New Host to open the Create New

Host dialog box. For instructions on creating hosts, refer to Creating hosts on page 314.

To add existing hosts to the group:

a. Specify the host by typing its name or by selecting it from the list. To filter the list, type part of the host name. Repeat this step for each additional host.

b. Click Add.

c. Repeat these steps for each additional host.

7. Optional: Set the host port attributes:

a. Click Set Host Flags to open the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

b. Optional: Select a host whose flag settings you want to copy.

c. Modify any of the attributes, by selecting the corresponding Override option (thereby activating the Enable option) and enable (select) or disable (clear) the flag.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host Groups 323

d. Optional: Select Consistent LUNs to specify that LUN values for the host must be kept consistent for all volumes within each masking view of which this host is part. When set, any masking operation involving this host that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations.

e. Click OK to close the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

8. Click either of the following:

Run Now to start the task now.

Add to Job List to schedule it for a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on page 843.

Adding hosts to host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 - 5876, or HYPERVMAX OS 5977 or

higher.

Adding hosts to host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host group (or empty host) and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Hosts to open the group's Hosts list view.

5. Click Add Hosts to open the Add Host dialog box.

6. Specify the host by typing its name or by selecting it from the list. The hosts table is a filtered list based on whether the host selected is Fibre Channel or ISCSI.To filter the list, type part of the host name. Click Add. Repeat this step for each additional host.

7. Click OK.

Removing hosts from host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The VMAX array must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

Chapter 5: Host Management

324 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Modifying host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Hosts to open the group's Hosts list view.

5. Select the host and click Remove.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Modifying host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

Modifying host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host group, click more , and select Modify to open the Modify Host Group dialog box.

4. To change the host group Name, highlight it and type a new name over it. Host names must be unique from other hosts on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host names are case- insensitive.

5. Do the following, depending on whether you are adding or removing hosts:

6. Adding Host:

a. Optional: To create a new host to add to the group, click Create Host to open the Create Host dialog box. For help, refer to Creating hosts on page 314.

b. Select the host and click Add. To filter the list, type part of the host name. Repeat this step for each additional host.

Removing Hosts:

a. In the list of hosts, select the host and click Remove.

b. Click OK in the confirmation message.

c. Repeat these steps for each additional host.

7. Click either of the following:

Run Now to start the task now.

Add to Job List to schedule it for a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on page 843.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host Groups 325

Renaming hosts/host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

To rename host/host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group from the list and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Properties panel, type a new name for the host/host group and click Apply. Host/host group names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host/host group names are case-insensitive.

Setting host/host group flags 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group, click more , and select Set Flags to open the Set Host/Host Group Flags dialog box.

4. Optional: Select a host/host group whose flag settings you want to copy.

5. Modify any of the flags, by selecting the corresponding Override option (thereby activating the Enable option) and enable (select) or disable (clear) the flag.

6. Optional: Select Consistent LUNs to specify that LUN values for the host must be kept consistent for all volumes within each masking view of which this host is part. When set, any masking operation involving this host that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations.

7. Click OK.

Deleting hosts/host groups

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running Enginuity version 5874 or higher.

Chapter 5: Host Management

326 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting hosts/host groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group, click more , and select Delete.

4. Click Delete in the confirmation dialog box.

Viewing hosts/host groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

Use the Hosts list view to view and manage hosts.

The following properties display:

Name Host/host group name. An arrow icon at the beginning of the name indicates that

the host is a host group. Click the icon to view hosts contained in the group.

Masking Views Number of masking view associated with the host.

Initiators Number of initiators in the host.

Consistent LUNs Flag indicating if the Consistent LUNs flag is set. When set, any

masking operation involving this host/host group that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations. indicates that the feature is set.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden for the host.

indicates that there are overridden port flags.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the host.

The following controls are available:

Create Host See Creating hosts on page 314.

Create Host Group Creating host groups on page 323

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 110

View Details See Viewing host/host group details on the next page.

Modify Modifying hosts on page 316 /Modifying host groups on page 325

Set Flags Setting host/host group flags on the previous page

Delete Deleting hosts/host groups on the previous page

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host Groups 327

Viewing host/host group details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host/host group and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the host Details view to view and manage hosts/host groups. This view contains two panels, the Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The properties and controls available in this panel depend on whether you are viewing details of an individual host or of host group, and on the storage operating environment.

The following properties display:

Name Host/host group name. To rename the host/host group, type a new name over the

existing and click Apply. Host/host group names must be unique from other hosts/host groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Host names are case-insensitive.

Number of Hosts Number of hosts in the group. This field only displays for host groups.

Number of Host Groups Number of host groups in which this host is a member. This field

only displays for individual hosts.

Number of Initiators Number of initiators in the host/host group. For host groups, the value

includes initiators in any child host groups.

Number of Masking Views Number of masking views with which the host/host group is

associated.

Consistent LUNs Flag indicating if the Consistent LUNs flag is set. When set, any masking

operation involving this host/host group that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations. indicates that the feature is set.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden for the host. indicates

that there are overridden port flags.

Enabled Port Flags List of any enabled port flags overridden by the host/host group.

Disabled Port Flags List of any disabled port flags overridden by the host/host group.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the host/host group.

The following controls are available:

Provision Storage to Host Using the Provision Storage wizard (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or

higher) on page 106/Using the Provision Storage wizard (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 110

Modify Modifying hosts on page 316/Modifying host groups on page 325

Set flags See Setting host/host group flags on page 326.

Chapter 5: Host Management

328 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Delete See Deleting hosts/host groups on page 326.

Apply Applies new host group name entered in the Name field.

Cancel Cancels the rename action.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the initiator group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Initiators - 2 opens the view listing the two initiators contained in the initiator group.

Viewing hosts in host groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Hosts to open the Hosts list view.

3. Select the host group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Hosts to open the host group - Hosts list view.

Use the host group - Hosts list view to view and manage hosts in the host group.

The following properties display:

Name Host/host group name.

Masking Views Number of masking view associated with the host.

Initiators Number of initiators in the host.

Consistent LUNs Flag indicating if the Consistent LUNs flag is set. When set, any

masking operation involving this host/host group that would result in inconsistent LUN values, will be rejected. When not set, the storage system will attempt to keep LUN values consistent, but will deviate from consistency if LUN conflicts occur during masking operations. indicates that the feature is set.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden for the host.

indicates that there are overridden port flags.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the host.

The following controls are available:

Add Hosts Adding hosts to host groups on page 324

Remove Removing hosts from host groups on page 324

Set flags See Setting host/host group flags on page 326.

View Details Viewing host/host group details on the previous page

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host Groups 329

Masking views

Creating masking views The following explains how to mask volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher. For instructions on masking volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 or lower, refer to Masking volumes on page 361.

Before you begin:

To create a masking view you need to have created initiator groups, port groups, and storage groups. For instructions, refer to Creating hosts on page 314, Creating port groups on page 342, and Creating storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 121.

To create a masking view:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Masking view to open the Masking view list view.

3. Click Create Masking View to open the Create Masking View dialog box.

4. Type the Masking View Name. Masking view names must be unique from other masking views on the array and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Masking view names are case-insensitive.

5. Select the Host.

6. Select the Port Group.

7. Select the Storage Group.

8. Optional: To manually set the host LUN addresses:

a. Click Set Dynamic LUNs to open the Set Dynamic LUN Address dialog box.

b. Select a volume, and notice the address displayed in the Starting LUN field. To accept this automatically generated address, click Apply Starting LUN. To move to the next available, click Next Available LUN.

c. Click OK to close the Set Dynamic LUN Address dialog box.

9. Click OK.

Renaming masking views 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Masking view to open the Masking Views list view.

3. Select the masking view from the list and click View Details to open the Details view.

4. Type the new Name, and click Apply. Masking view names must be unique from other masking views on the array and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Masking view names are case-insensitive.

Chapter 5: Host Management

330 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting masking views This procedure explains how to delete masking views from the Masking Views list view. In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from File Masking Views page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Masking Views).

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Masking view to open the Masking View list view.

3. Select the masking view from the list, click Delete to open the Delete Masking View confirmation dialog box.

4. To unmap volumes in the masking view from their mapped ports, select Unmap.

5. Click OK.

Viewing masking views 1. Select the storage system.

2. Do one of the following:

Select Hosts > Masking view to open the Masking Views list view.

Select Storage > VVols Dashboard > PE Masking Views to open the PE Masking Views list view.

Use the Masking view list view to view and manage masking views.

The following properties display:

Name User-defined masking view name.

Host Name of the associated host.

Port Group Name of the associated port group.

Storage Group Name of the associated storage group.

The depending on the options chosen, some of the following controls are available:

Create Masking View See Creating masking views on the previous page.

Provision PE to Host Provisioning protocol endpoints to hosts

View Connections See Viewing masking view connections below.

Delete See Deleting masking views above.

View Details See Viewing masking view details on page 333.

Viewing masking view connections This procedure explains how to view masking view connections.

This procedure explains how to perform the operation from the Masking Views list view. In eNAS operating environments, you can also perform this operation from File Masking Views page (System > Dashboard > File Dashboard > File Masking Views).

Chapter 5: Host Management

Masking views 331

To view masking view connections:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Masking Views to open the Masking Views list view.

3. Select the masking view from the list and click View Connections to open the masking view connections view.

Use the Masking View view to filter a masking view by selecting various combinations of members within a group (initiators, ports, volumes) and display the masking view details from the group level to the object level.

Filtering a masking view

The Masking view view contains three tree view lists for each of the component groups in the masking view, initiator groups, ports groups, and storage groups.

The parent group is the default top-level group in each expandable tree view and contains a list of all components in the masking group including child entries which are also expandable.

To filter the masking view, single or multi-select (hold shift key and select) the items in the list view. As each selection is made the filtered results table is updated to reflect the current combination of filter criteria.

Masking view tree view lists

The following properties display:

Hosts Name of top-level host.

Initiator WWN or IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name ) ID and the alias of the initiator group.

Port Group Name of top-level port group.

Director:Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Storage Group Name of top-level storage group.

Volume Symmetrix system volume number.

Capacity (GB) Capacity, in GB, of the volume.

Filtered results table

The following properties display:

LUN Address LUN address number.

Volume Symmetrix system volume number.

Capacity (GB) Capacity, in GB, of the volume.

Initiator WWN or IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name ) ID of the initiator.

Alias Alias of the initiator.

Director:Port Symmetrix system director and port in the port group.

Chapter 5: Host Management

332 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Logged In Indicates if the initiator is logged into the host/target.

On Fabric Indicates if the initiator is zoned in and on the fabric.

The following additional filters are available to filter the results table:

Show logged in Shows only the entries for LUNs where the associated initiator is logged in.

Show On Fabric Shows only the entries for LUNs where the associated initiator is zoned in

and on the fabric.

Viewing masking view details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Masking view to open the Masking Views list view.

3. Select the masking view from the list and click View Details to open the Details view.

Use the Details view to view and manage masking views. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Name User-defined masking view name.

Host Name of the associated host.

Number of initiators Number of initiators in the masking view.

This is the number of primary initiators contained in the masking view and does not include any initiators included in cascaded initiator groups that may be part of the masking view.

Port Group Name of the associated port group.

Number of ports Number of ports contained in the masking view.

Storage Group Name of the associated storage group.

Number of volumes Number of volumes in the storage group contained in the masking view.

Capacity (GB) Total capacity, in GB, of all volumes in the masking view.

The following controls are available:

Delete See Deleting masking views on page 331.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the masking

view.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Masking views 333

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the masking view. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Volumes - 2 opens the view listing the two volumes associated with the masking view.

Chapter 5: Host Management

334 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Initiators

Masking volumes The following explains how to mask volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 or lower. For instructions on masking volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher, refer to See Creating masking views on page 330..

You can perform this operation at the initiator or host alias level.

To mask volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. To mask at the initiator level:

a. Select Hosts>Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

b. Select an initiator, and click Mask to open the Masking dialog box.

To mask at the host alias level:

a. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

b. Select a host alias, and click Mask to open the Masking dialog box.

3. Optional: Select another Director Port for the operation. (One director at a time.)

4. Optional: Select another Initiator/Alias for the operation. (One director at a time.)

5. Optional: Select to Include volumes not mapped to the port in the Available Volumes list.

6. Select one or more Available Volumes, and click Add to move them to Selected Volumes, or click Add All to move all Available Volumes to the Selected Volumes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To manually set the host LUN addresses:

a. Select the Dynamic LUN Addressing option.

b. Click Set Dynamic LUN Address to open the Set Dynamic LUN Address dialog box.

c. Select a volume, and notice the address displayed in the Starting Host LUN field. To accept this automatically generated address, click Apply Starting LUN. To move to the next available, click Next Available LUN.

d. Click OK once you are satisfied with the address.

2. To automatically map new volumes to all ports, select Map Volumes. (This feature is only available on Symmetrix DMX systems running Enginuity 5773.150 or higher.)

Chapter 5: Host Management

Initiators 335

3. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB after OK.

4. Click OK.

Unmasking volumes The following explains how to unmask volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 or lower.

You can perform this operation at the initiator or host alias level.

1. Select the storage system.

2. To unmask at the initiator level:

a. Select Host > Initiators to open the Initiator list view.

b. Select the initiator from the list, and click View Details to open the Details view.

c. In the Related Objects panel, select Volumes to open the Volumes list view.

To unmask at the host alias level:

a. Select Host > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

b. Select the alias and and click View Details to open its Details view.

c. In the Related Objects panel, select Volumes to open the Volumes list view.

3. Select a volume, and click Unmask to open the Unmask Volumes dialog box.

4. Optional: Click Show Select Volumes to view details on the selected volumes.

5. To unmap the volumes from their ports , select Unmap Volumes.

6. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB after OK.

7. Click OK.

Setting initiator port flags 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

3. Select an initiator, and click Set Flags to open the Set Initiator Port Flags dialog box.

4. Optional: Select an initiator whose flag settings you want to copy.

5. Modify the attributes, by selecting the corresponding Override option (thereby activating the Enable option), and enable (select) or disable (clear) the flag.

6. Click OK.

Setting initiator attributes This procedure explains how to set an initiator's attributes.

Chapter 5: Host Management

336 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

Any changes made to an initiator's attributes affect the initiator and all its ports.

To set initiator attributes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

3. Select an initiator, and click Set Attributes to open the Set Initiator Attributes dialog box.

The initiator director:port, initiator, and optional alias names display.

4. Type the FCID (Fibre Channel ID) Value.

5. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB after OK.

6. Click OK.

Renaming initiator aliases When the system discovers the attached HBAs, a two-part record is created for the name. The format is NodeName/PortName. For fiber adapters, the HBA name is the WWN or iSCSI name. For native iSCSI adapters, the HBA name is the IP address.

You can rename the HBA identifier by creating a shorter, and easier to remember, ASCII alias name.

To rename an initiator alias:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

3. Select an initiator, and click Rename Alias to open the Rename Initiator Alias dialog box.

4. Type a Node Name and Port Name.

On storage systems running Enginuity 5874 - 5876, node and port names cannot exceed 16 characters.

On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, node and port names cannot exceed 32 characters.

5. Click OK.

This overwrites any existing alias name.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Initiators 337

Replacing initiators If a host adapter fails, or needs replacement for any reason, you can replace the adapter and assign its set of volumes to a new adapter.

To replace an initiator:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

3. Select the initiator, and click Replace Initiator to open the Replace Initiator Alias dialog box.

The existing initiator and optional alias names display.

4. Type the full WWN or iSCSI identifier of the New Initiator. For native iSCSI, type the IP address.

5. Click OK.

This substitutes all occurrences of the old WWN/iSCSI/IP address with the new one.

Removing masking entries 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

There are two ways to delete initiator masking records, from the Initiators view or from the initiator Details view.

3. Select the initiator, click more , and select Remove Masking Entry to open the Remove Masking Entry dialog box.

4. Select the director and port .

5. To remove the entry from the storage system login history tables, select Include login history.

6. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB after OK.

7. Click OK.

Viewing initiators 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

Use the Initiators list view to view and manage initiators.

Chapter 5: Host Management

338 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The properties and controls displayed in the view vary depending on the Enginuity version running on the storage system and on how you arrived at this view.

Initiator WWN or IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name ) ID of the initiator.

Dir:Port Storage system director and port associated with the initiator, for example: FA-

7E:1.

Alias User-defined initiator name.

Logged In Flag indicating if the initiator is logged into the fabric: Yes/No.

On Fabric Flag indicating if the initiator is on the fabric: Yes/No.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden by the initiator:

Yes/No.

Initiator Groups Number of initiator groups the initiator is associated with, including the

immediate initiator group and any parent initiator groups that include this initiator group. This field only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Masking Views Number of masking views the initiator is associated with, including the

masking views that are associated with any cascaded relationships. This field only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Port Flag Overrides Whether any of the initiator's port flags are overridden. This field

only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5774 or lower.

Volumes Number of masked volumes. This field only applies/appears for Symmetrix

systems running Enginuity 5774 or lower.

The following controls are available:

Add Adding initiators to host aliases on page 362

Remove Removing initiators from host aliases on page 362

Mask Masking volumes on page 361

Set Flags See Setting initiator port flags on page 336.

Set Attributes See Setting initiator attributes on page 336.

Rename Alias See Renaming initiator aliases on page 337.

Replace Initiator See Replacing initiators on the previous page.

View Details See Viewing initiator details below.

Remove Masking Entry See Removing masking entries on the previous page.

Viewing initiator details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

3. Select the initiator from the list, and click View Details to open the initiator Details view.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Initiators 339

Use the initiator Details view to view and manage initiators This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The properties and controls displayed in the view vary depending on the Enginuity version running on the storage system and on how you arrived at this view.

Initiator WWN or IQN (iSCSI Qualified Name ) ID of the initiator.

Dir:Port Storage system director and port associated with the initiator, for example: FA-7E:1

Alias The user-defined initiator name.

Number of Initiator Groups Number of associated initiator groups, including the immediate

initiator group and any parent initiator groups that include this initiator group. This field only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Number of Masking Views Number of associated masking views, including the masking

views that are associated with any cascaded relationships. This field only applies/appears for Symmetrix systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher.

Logged In Flag indicating if the initiator is logged into the fabric: Yes/No.

On Fabric Flag indicating if the initiator is on the fabric: Yes/No.

Port Flag Overrides Flag indicating if any port flags are overridden by the initiator: Yes/No.

Enabled Flags List of any enabled port flags overridden by the initiator.

Disabled Flags List of any disabled port flags overridden by the initiator.

Flags in Effect Flags that are in effect for the initiator.

Last Login Timestamp for the last time this initiator was logged into the system.

FCID Fibre Channel ID for the initiator.

FCID Value Value that is enabled for FCID lockdown.

FCID Lockdown Flag indicating if port lockdown is in effect: Yes/No.

IP Address IP address for the initiator.

LUN Offset Wether LUN offset is enabled. This feature allows you to skip over masked holes

in an array of volumes.

Offset Value Number of address spaces required to skip over the hole.

Base Value Host's first missing LUN in the skip hole.

Dynamic Addressing Wether dynamic LUN addressing is enabled. With this feature, the

system assigns the address based on availability.

The following controls are available:

Mask Masking volumes on page 361

Chapter 5: Host Management

340 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Set Flags See Setting initiator port flags on page 336.

Set Attributes See Setting initiator attributes on page 336.

Rename Alias See Renaming initiator aliases on page 337.

Replace Initiator See Replacing initiators on page 338.

Removing Masking Entry See Removing masking entries on page 338.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the initiator. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Initiators Groups- 1 opens the view listing the initiator group that contains the initiator.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Initiators 341

Port groups

Creating port groups

Before you begin:

Note the following recommendations:

Port groups should contain four or more ports.

Each port in a port group should be on a different director.

A port can belong to more than one port group. However, for storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, you cannot mix different types of ports (physical FC ports, virtual ports, and iSCSI virtual ports) within a single port group.

Creating port groups:

1. Select the VMAX system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Click Create Port Group to open Create Port Group dialog box.

4. Type a Port group name.Port group names must be unique from other port groups on the storage system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Port group names are case-insensitive.

5. Select the appropriate filter to filter the port list by iSCSI or FC.

6. Select the available ports from Ports list, and click Add to add them to the Ports to add list.

The following properties display:

Dir:Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Identifier Port identifier

Port Groups Number of port groups where the port is a member.

Masking Views Number of masking views where the port is associated.

Volumes Number of volumes in the port group.

VSA Flag An indicator to show if Volume Set Addressing flag is set for the port.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 5: Host Management

342 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting port groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

There are two ways to delete a Port Group, from the Port Groups list view or from the port group Details view.

3. Select the port group and click Delete.to open the Delete Port Group confirmation message.

4. For mapped ports only: Select Unmap.

5. Click OK.

Adding ports to port groups

Before you begin:

Note the following recommendations:

Port groups should contain four or more ports.

Each port in a port group should be on a different director.

A port can belong to more than one port group. However, for storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, you cannot mix different types of ports (physical FC ports, virtual ports, and iSCSI virtual ports) within a single port group.

Adding ports to port groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open the port group Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, click Ports to open the Ports in port group list view.

5. Click Add Port to open the Add Ports dialog box.

If the port group already contain FC ports, the dialog is populated with all available FC ports. If the port group already contain iSCSI ports, this dialog is populated with all available iSCSI ports.If there are no ports in the port group, select the appropriate filter to filter the port list by iSCSI or FC.

6. Select the available ports from the Ports to add list, and click Add Ports to add them to the Ports to Add list.

The following properties display:

Dir:Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Identifier IQN of an iSCSI target or WWN of an FC port.

Ports Number of port groups where the port is a member.

Masking Views Number of associated masking views.

7. Click OK.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Port groups 343

Removing ports from port groups

Before you begin:

Note the following recommendations:

Port groups should contain four or more ports.

Each port in a port group should be on a different director.

Removing ports from port groups:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open the port group Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, click Ports to open the Ports from Ports Group list view.

5. Select the port to remove or hold down the shift key to multi-select the ports to be removed from the port group.

6. Click Remove to open the Remove Ports confirmation message.

7. For mapped ports only: You can optionally select to Unmap any affected volumes from their respective ports.

8. Click OK.

Renaming port groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open the initiator group Details view.

4. Type the new port group Name and click Apply.

Chapter 5: Host Management

344 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing port groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

The Port Groups list view allows you to view and manage port groups on a storage system.

There are multiple ways to open this view. Depending on the one you used, some of the following properties and controls may not appear.

The following properties display (Click a column heading to sort the list by that value):

Name User-defined port group name, accompanied by an icon indicating the port group

type. Possible types are:

Standalone port group

Port group in masking view

Ports Number of ports in the group.

Masking Views Number of masking views where the port group is associated.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the port group.

The following controls are available:

Create Port Group See Creating port groups on page 342.

View Details See Viewing port groups details below.

Delete See Deleting port groups on page 343.

Viewing port groups details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open the port group Details view.

4. Use the port groups Details view to view and manage a port group. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display (Click a column heading to sort the list by that value):

Name User-defined port group name.

Number of Ports Number of ports in the group.

Number of Masking Views Number of masking views where the port group is associated.

Last Update Timestamp of the most recent changes to the port group.

Host I/O Limit (I/O/Sec) Total host I/O limit on the specified port group in IO/Sec. Zero

indicates that there is no limit set.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Port groups 345

Host I/O (MB /Sec) Total host I/O limit on the specified port group in MB/Sec. Zero

indicates that there is no limit set.

Negotiated Speed (MB/Sec) Bandwidth in MB/sec for that port group (that is, the

aggregated port negotiated speed for the ports in the group).

Percent Capacity Percentage of the bandwidth demand over the port group negotiated

speed.

Excess (MB/Sec) Amount of bandwidth in MB/sec that is left available on the port group

after the host I/O limits have been accounted for.

The following controls are available:

Create See Creating port groups on page 342.

Delete See Deleting port groups on page 343.

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the port group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the port group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Host I/O Limits - 2 opens the view listing the host I/O limits set for the two storage groups associated with the port group.

Chapter 5: Host Management

346 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing ports in port group 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, click Ports to open the Ports list view.

Use the Ports list view to view and manage ports.

The following properties are displayed:

Dir:Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Identifier IQN of an iSCSI target or WWN of an FC port.

Port Groups Number of port groups where the port is a member.

Masking Views Number of masking views where the port is associated.

Mapped Volumes Number of volumes mapped to the port.

The following controls are available:

Add Ports See Adding ports to port groups on page 343.

Remove See Removing ports from port groups on page 344.

View Details See Viewing port details on the next page.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Port groups 347

Viewing port details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Port Groups to open the Port Groups list view.

3. Select the port group and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. From the Related Objects panel, click Ports to open the Ports list view.

5. Select a port and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the port Details view to view and manage a port. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Dir:Port Storage system director and port in the port group.

Identifier IQN of an iSCSI target or WWN of an FC port.

Number of Port Groups Number of port groups where the port is a member.

Number of Masking Views Number of masking views where the port is associated.

Number of Masked Volumes Number of volumes visible through the port.

Number of Mapped Volumes Number of volumes mapped to the port, including meta

members.

Volume Set Addressing Whether volume set addressing is on or off.

Port Status Whether the port is online or offline.

Number of IP Interfaces Number of IP interfaces associated with the iSCSI target.

Number of iSCSI Ports Number of physical iSCSI ports associated with IP interfaces which

are in turn attached to the iSCSI target.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects associated with the port. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Masking Views - 2 will open a view listing the two masking views associated with the port.

Chapter 5: Host Management

348 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Virtual servers

Adding a new virtual server This procedure explains how to register a virtual server (VMware or Hyper V). You must complete this procedure before you can add the virtual server's storage to the VM.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

For more information on integrating Unisphere for VMAX in a virtual environment, refer to the

Techbook, Using Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments.

To add a new virtual server:

1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Click Add VM Server to open the Add New Server dialog box.

4. Type the fully qualified name or IP address of the server (Server/IP Address).

5. Type the Username used to connect to the server. The user must have root privileges on the server.

6. Type the Password used to connect to the server.

7. Retype the password for confirmation.

8. Select the type of server to add (VMware or Hyper-V).

9. Optional: Select Retrieve Info to have Unisphere retrieve all the information on the server. If Unisphere returns an error message when retrieving information on an ESX server, verify that the ESX server's domain name matches the name in the credential file.

10. Click OK.

Adding storage to a VM This procedure explains how to add a virtual server's storage to a VM.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Virtual servers 349

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

To add a new virtual server:

1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Select the virtual server and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. Click Volumes - nn in the Related Objects panel to open the Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes and click Add VM Storage to open the Add VM Storage dialog box.

6. Select the VM to which you are adding the volumes.

7. Click OK.

Removing a virtual server This procedure explains how to remove a virtual server.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

To add a new virtual server:

1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Select the virtual server and click Remove.

4. Click OK in the confirmation message.

A virtual server can also be removed from the virtual server Details view.  

Removing storage from a VM This procedure explains how to remove storage from a virtual server.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

Chapter 5: Host Management

350 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To add a new virtual server:

1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Select the virtual server and click View Details to open the Details view.

4. Click Volumes - nn in the Related Objects panel to open the Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes and click Remove VM Storage.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Changing the password on a virtual server This procedure explains how to change the password used to access a virtual server.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be an Administrator or StorageAdmin.

To add a new virtual server:

1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Select the virtual server and click Change Password.

4. Click OK on the confirmation message to open the Change Virtual Server Password dialog box.

5. Type a new Password and repeat it for confirmation.

6. Click OK.

The virtual server password can also be changed from the virtual server Details view.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Virtual servers 351

Viewing virtual servers 1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

The following properties display:

Server/IP Address The fully-qualified server name or IP Address.

Server Type The virtual server type. Possible values are VMware and Hyper-V.

VMs The number of VMs.

Volumes The number of volumes.

Last Updated The timestamp of the refresh for the virtual server. If the server does not

have a timestamp, click View Details to rescan the server.

The following controls are available:

Add See Adding a new virtual server on page 349.

View Details See Viewing the details of a virtual server below.

Change Password See Changing the password on a virtual server on the previous page.

Remove See Removing a virtual server on page 350.

Viewing the details of a virtual server 1. Select the storage system or All Symmetrix systems.

2. Select Hosts > Virtual Servers to open the Virtual Servers list view.

3. Select the virtual server and click View Details to open itsDetails view.

This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Server/IP Address The fully-qualified server name or IP Address.

Server Type The virtual server type. Possible values are VMware and Hyper-V.

Total Memory Total memory of the virtual server.

Build The virtual server's build number.

Version The virtual server's version number.

Last Updated The timestamp of the last refresh of the virtual server.

The following controls are available:

Change Password See Changing the password on a virtual server on the previous page.

Remove See Removing a virtual server on page 350.

Chapter 5: Host Management

352 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for the objects contained in or associated with the virtual server. Each link provides the name of the related object and the number of items. For example, clicking Volumes - 34 opens the Volumes list view showing the 34 volumes related to the virtual server.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Virtual servers 353

CU images

Mapping CKD volumes The following explains how to map CKD volumes to ESCON/FICON ports.

You can perform this operation at the volume level or the CU image level.

1. Select the storage system.

2. To map at the volume level:

a. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

b. In the Volumes panel, select the type of CKD volume.

To display only CKD volumes in the Volumes panel, set the Emulation filter to CKD.

c. Click View to open the CKD Volumes list view.

d. Select a CKD volume, and click z/OS Map to open the z/OS Map Volumes dialog box.

To map at the CU image level:

a. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

b. Select an image and click z/OS Map to open the z/OS Map dialog box.

3. Type or Select a Volume Range.

4. Type the Base Address to be assigned to the first volume in the mapping request. Base addresses increases incrementally by one for each volume in the range of volumes being mapped. To view base addresses already in use, click Show.

5. Type or Select an SSID. Valid SSIDs must only have unmapped volumes using them and the number of volumes cannot exceed 256.

6. Select the Port to which you want to map the volumes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Unmapping CKD volumes The following explains how to unmap CKD volumes from ESCON/FICON ports.

You can perform this operation at the volume level or the CU image level.

1. Select the storage system.

2. To unmap at the volume level:

a. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Volume Dashboard.

b. In the Volumes panel, select the type of CKD volume.

To display only CKD volumes in the Volumes panel, set the Emulation filter to

Chapter 5: Host Management

354 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

CKD.

c. Click View to open the CKD Volumes list view.

d. Select a CKD volume, and click z/OS Unmap to open the z/OS Unmap Volumes dialog box.

To unmap at the CU image level:

a. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

b. Select an image and click z/OS Unmap to open the Unmap CU Image dialog box.

3. Type or Select the Volume Range to be unmapped.

4. Type or Select the Base Address.

5. Type or Select an SSID. Valid SSIDs must only have unmapped volumes using them, and the number of volumes cannot exceed 256.

6. Select the Port to which you want to map the volumes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Assigning alias addresses The following explains how to assign PAV aliases to mapped CKD volumes on a storage system running Enginuity 56xx or lower. For instructions on assigning aliases on storage systems running 5771 or higher, refer to Assigning an alias range.

Before you begin:

PAV alias must be enabled on the storage system.

To assign an alias address:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Assign Alias Addresses to open the Assign Alias Addresses dialog box.

4. Type or Select a Volume Range.

5. Type a Starting Alias address.

6. Click one of the following:

Chapter 5: Host Management

CU images 355

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Removing alias addresses The following explains how to remove alias addresses from CKD volumes on a storage system running Enginuity 56xx or earlier. For instructions on removing aliases on storage systems running 5771 or higher, refer to See Assigning alias ranges below.

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Remove Alias Addresses to open the Remove Alias Addresses dialog box.

4. Type or Select a Volume Range. Alternately, you can also select a different CU image.

5. Type a Starting Alias.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Assigning alias ranges The following explains how to assign a range of PAV aliases to mapped CKD volumes on a storage system running 5771 or higher. For instructions on assigning aliases on storage systems running Enginuity 56xx or lower, refer to See Assigning alias addresses on the previous page.

Before you begin:

PAV alias must be enabled on the storage system.

To assign an alias address:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Assign Alias Range to open the Assign Alias Range dialog box.

4. Type the Starting Alias address.

5. Type the Ending Alias address.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and

Chapter 5: Host Management

356 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Removing alias ranges The following explains how to remove aliases from CKD volumes on a storage system running 5771 or higher. For instructions on removing aliases on storage systems running Enginuity 56xx or earlier, refer to See Removing alias addresses on the previous page.

Before you begin:

PAV alias must be enabled on the storage system.

To remove alias ranges:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Remove Alias Range to open the Remove Alias Range dialog box.

4. Type the Starting Alias address.

5. Type the Ending Alias address.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Assigning alias counts The following explains how to add a number of aliases to mapped CKD volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 57xx or higher:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Add Alias Count to open the Add Alias Count dialog box.

4. Type or Select the Volume Range to which the aliases will be added.

5. Type the number of aliases to add to each volume in the range (Alias Count).

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 5: Host Management

CU images 357

Removing alias counts The following explains how to remove a number of aliases from mapped CKD volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 57xx or higher:

1. Select a storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select an image, click more , and select Remove Alias Count to open the Remove Alias Count dialog box.

4. Type or Select the Volume Range from which to remove the aliases.

5. Type the number of aliases to remove from each volume in the range (Alias Count).

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Viewing CU images 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

Use the CU Images list view to view and manage CU images.

The following properties display:

Image SSID CU image number 0x0-0xFF.

SSID SSID (subsystem ID) for the image.

Number of Ports The number of ports to which the CU image is mapped.

Number of Volumes The number of volumes in the CU.

Number of Base Addresses The number of base addresses assigned.

Number of Aliases The number of aliases assigned.

Status The status of volumes in the CU image.

Chapter 5: Host Management

358 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following controls are available:

z/OS Map See Mapping CKD volumes on page 354.

z/OS Unmap See Unmapping CKD volumes on page 354.

View Details See Viewing CU image details below.

Assign Alias Range See Assigning alias ranges on page 356.

Remove Alias Range See Removing alias ranges on page 357.

Assign Alias Count See Assigning alias counts on page 357.

Remove Alias Count See Removing alias counts on the previous page.

Viewing CU image details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > CU Images to open the CU Images list view.

3. Select the CU image, and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the CU image Details view to display and manage a CU image. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Image SSID CU image number 0x0-0xFF.

SSID SSID (subsystem ID) for the image.

Number of Ports The number of ports to which the CU image is mapped.

Number of Volumes The number of volumes in the CU.

Number of Base Addresses Number of base addresses assigned.

Number of Aliases The number of aliases assigned.

Status The status of volumes in the CU image.

The following controls are available:

z/OS Map See Mapping CKD volumes on page 354.

z/OS Unmap See Unmapping CKD volumes on page 354.

Assign Alias Range See Assigning alias ranges on page 356.

Remove Alias Range See Removing alias ranges on page 357.

Assign Alias Count See Assigning alias counts on page 357.

Remove Alias Count See Removing alias counts on the previous page.

Chapter 5: Host Management

CU images 359

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in and associated with the CU image. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Volumes - 2 opens a view listing the two volumes in the image.

Chapter 5: Host Management

360 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host aliases

Masking volumes The following explains how to mask volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 or lower. For instructions on masking volumes on storage systems running Enginuity 5874 or higher, refer to See Creating masking views on page 330..

You can perform this operation at the initiator or host alias level.

To mask volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. To mask at the initiator level:

a. Select Hosts>Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

b. Select an initiator, and click Mask to open the Masking dialog box.

To mask at the host alias level:

a. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

b. Select a host alias, and click Mask to open the Masking dialog box.

3. Optional: Select another Director Port for the operation. (One director at a time.)

4. Optional: Select another Initiator/Alias for the operation. (One director at a time.)

5. Optional: Select to Include volumes not mapped to the port in the Available Volumes list.

6. Select one or more Available Volumes, and click Add to move them to Selected Volumes, or click Add All to move all Available Volumes to the Selected Volumes.

7. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the task

at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To manually set the host LUN addresses:

a. Select the Dynamic LUN Addressing option.

b. Click Set Dynamic LUN Address to open the Set Dynamic LUN Address dialog box.

c. Select a volume, and notice the address displayed in the Starting Host LUN field. To accept this automatically generated address, click Apply Starting LUN. To move to the next available, click Next Available LUN.

d. Click OK once you are satisfied with the address.

2. To automatically map new volumes to all ports, select Map Volumes. (This feature is only available on Symmetrix DMX systems running Enginuity 5773.150 or higher.)

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host aliases 361

3. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB after OK.

4. Click OK.

Creating host aliases The following explains how to create host aliases:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Click Create to open the Create Host Alias dialog box.

4. Type a Host Alias Name (up to 16 alpha-numeric characters).

5. Select one or more Initiators and click OK.

Adding initiators to host aliases 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select the host alias, and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

5. Click Add to open the Add Initiator to Host Alias dialog box.

6. Select one or more initiators and click OK.

Removing initiators from host aliases 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select the host alias, and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Initiators to open the Initiators list view.

5. Select one or more initiators and click Remove.

6. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Unmasking volumes from host aliases 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select the host alias, and click View Details to open its Details view.

4. In the Related Objects panel, click Volumesto open the Volumes list view.

5. Select one or more volumes and click Unmask.

6. To automatically unmap the volumes from all ports, select Unmap Volumes.

7. To refresh all the host-related profile data in the volume masking database (VCMDB), select Refresh VCMDB.

8. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Chapter 5: Host Management

362 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Deleting host aliases The following explains how to delete host aliases:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select one or more aliases and click Delete.

4. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Renaming host aliases When a storage system discovers the attached HBAs, a two-part record is created of the name. The format is HostName/HBAname. For fiber adapters, the HBA name is the WWN or iSCSI name. For native iSCSI adapters, the HBA name is the IP address.

You can rename the HBA identifier by creating a shorter, and easier to remember alias name:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select an alias and click Rename Alias to open the Rename Alias dialog box.

4. Type the two-part Initiator Alias (HostName/NewAdapterAlias). For example: api172/20000000920dc290 to api172/p2.

5. Click OK.

This operation will overwrite any existing alias name.

Viewing host aliases 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

Use the Host Aliases list view to display and manage host aliases.

The following properties display

Host Alias Name The name of the host alias.

Number of Initiators The number of masking records in the host alias.

Number of Volumes The number of volumes masked to the initiators.

The following controls are available:

Mask See Masking volumes on page 361.

Create See Creating host aliases on the previous page.

Set Flags See Setting initiator port flags on page 336.

View Details See Viewing host alias details on the next page.

Delete Host Alias See Deleting host aliases above.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host aliases 363

Viewing host alias details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > Host Aliases to open the Host Aliases list view.

3. Select the host alias, and click View Details to open its Details view.

Use the host alias Details view to display and manage a host alias. This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Host Alias Name the name of the host alias.

Number of Initiators The number of masking records in the host alias..

Number of Volumes The number of volumes masked to the initiators .

The following controls are available:

Mask See Masking volumes on page 361.

Set Flags See Setting initiator port flags on page 336.

Delete Host Alias See Deleting host aliases on the previous page.

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in and associated with the host alias. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Initiators - 2 opens a view listing the two initiators in the host alias.

Chapter 5: Host Management

364 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Host Cache Adapters

Viewing host cache adapters 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Hosts > XtremSW Cache Adapters to open the XtremSW Cache Adapters list view.

The following properties display:

Card S/N Adapter serial number.

Card Version Adapter version.

Vender Adapter vender.

Card Size (GB) Adapter size.

Card Used (GB) Amount of card used.

Volumes Number of accessible volumes.

Host Host name.

IP Address Host IP address.

Host OS Host operating system.

Chapter 5: Host Management

Host Cache Adapters 365

Chapter 5: Host Management

366 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Data Protection

This chapter contains the following:

Monitoring protection 368

Local Replication 371

Device Groups 425

Remote Replication 433

Understanding Virtual LUN Migration 476

Replication Groups and Pools 481

Understanding RecoverPoint 509

Open Replicator 533

Understanding Federated Live Migration 544

Chapter 6: Data Protection 367

CHAPTER 6

Monitoring protection The Protection Dashboard provides you with a single place from which to monitor the replication features running on or associated with local storage systems.

Before you begin:

To access this dashboard, you must be a Monitor, StorageAdmin or higher.

This dashboard is only available for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The information displayed in this dashboard is static, in that it reflects the system's status at the

moment you opened the dashboard. To refresh the data, click refresh in the status bar.

To access the Protection Dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard.

Protection Dashboard: The Protection Dashboard includes the following panels: Summary panel:

Remote Arrays Number of SRDF connected storage systems.

Technologies Lists the replication technologies employed on the storage system.

Storage Group Protection panel:

Displays high-level information obtained from protected and unprotected storage groups on the storage system. All of the storage groups on the storage system are organized into the following categories:

Partially protected storage groups will not appear on the dashboard. For example, after adding a volume to a storage group protected by ProtectPoint, the storage group is considered partially protected, in which case it will no longer appear in the dashboard. The storage group will remain in this state until you expand it using ProtectPoint, after which it will be considered fully protected, and reappear on the dashboard.

Total  Total number of storage groups on the storage system, regardless of protection.

For more information, refer to Viewing total storage groups on page 164.

High Availability Number of SRDF/Metro storage groups protected by SRDF/Metro. Both

R1 and R2 are included in the totals.

Remote Replication Number of storage groups protected by SRDF. Storage groups

involved in multiple SRDF sessions are only counted once. Only R1s or R2s that are an R1 of an R21 setup are displayed. For more information, refer to Viewing remote replication storage groups on page 163.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

368 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Point in Time Number of storage groups protected by TimeFinder. Depending on the

storage operating environment, this can include TimeFinder/SnapVX, TimeFinder/Clone, or TimeFinder/Mirror snapshots. Storage groups involved in multiple Timefinder sessions are only counted once. Also, ProtectPoint storage groups with SnapVX snapshots as a source are also included. For more information, refer to Viewing point-in-time storage groups on page 161.

Backup Number of storage groups with SnapVX snapshots linked to ProtectPoint

storage groups. For more information, refer to Viewing backup storage groups (HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher) on page 160.

Unprotected Number of storage groups not covered by Continuous, Point in Time or High

Availability. For more information, refer to Viewing unprotected storage groups on page 165.

Application Protection Panel:

Allows you to view and manage storage groups that serve as sources in replications sessions.

The following properties display:

State Replication state severity of the storage group. The value is calculated at the

volume level, with the highest (worst) severity being reported for the group. Possible values are:

Normal All volumes are in a normal state.

Warning One or more volumes in the group are in a warning state, with none higher.

Error One or more volumes in the group are in an Error state.

Replication state severities maps states of the various replication technologies to severities.

Storage Group Storage group name.

Replication Management Group Replication management group associated with the

storage group. For example, SRDF Group xx (Remote SymmetrixID) for SRDF , the device group name for Clone, or Mirror, and snapshot name for Snap/VX.

Technology Replication technology used to protect the storage group.

The following controls available, depending on the replication technology protecting the selected storage group:

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on page 401

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Manage Protection Viewing snapshots on page 409

Establish Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453

Split Splitting SRDF pairs on page 469

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Monitoring protection 369

Suspend Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470

Restore Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466

Resume Resuming SRDF links on page 462

Failover Failing over on page 454

Failback Failing back on page 455

Manage Protection Select a Storage Group and click Manage Protection to navigate

to the group list view of the selected technology

Chapter 6: Data Protection

370 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Local Replication

TimeFinder/Clone

Understanding TimeFinder/Clone operations

Clone copy sessions allow you to create clone copies of a source volume on multiple target volumes. The source and target volumes can be either standard volumes or BCVs, as long as they are the same size and emulation type (FBA/CKD). Once you have activated the session, the target host can instantly access the copy, even before the data is fully copied to the target volume.

TimeFinder operations are not supported directly on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. Instead, they are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

An overview of a typical clone session is:

1. Create a device group, or add volumes to an existing device group.

2. Create the session; restore the session.

3. Activate the session.

4. View the session's progress.

5. Terminate the session.

For more information on TimeFinder/Clone concepts, refer to the Solutions Enabler TimeFinder Family CLI Product Guide and the TimeFinder Family Product Guide.

Managing TimeFinder/Clone sessions

The TimeFinder/Clone dashboard provides you with a single place to monitor and manage TimeFinder/Clone sessions on a storage system.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. On HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents using Clone emulation.

Managing TimeFinder/Clone sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

The following properties display:

Source Group Lists the groups containing volumes using TimeFinder/Clone. Information

in this column is organized in a tree format, with groups organized into folders according to their type. To view information on a specific group, expand the appropriate folder.

Standard The number of standard volumes in the group.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 371

BCV  The number of BCVs in the group.

Target The number of target volumes in the group.

State The combined state of the sessions in the group. If all the sessions are in the

same state, then that state appears; otherwise, Mixed appears.

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are RDF1, RDF2, RDF21, and Regular.

Group Valid Indicates whether the group is valid. The possible values are Yes or No.

The following controls are available:

Create Pairs See Creating clone copy sessions below.

Activate See Activating clone copy sessions on page 374.

Recreate See Recreating clone copy sessions on page 375.

View Storage Groups Viewing storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 156

View Details See Viewing clone copy sessions on page 383.

Split See Splitting clone volume pairs on page 380.

Restore See Restoring data from target volumes on page 379.

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on page 401

Terminate See Terminating clone copy sessions on page 381.

Set Mode See Modifying clone copy sessions on page 377.

Creating clone copy sessions

This procedure explains how to create clone copy sessions.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You can only perform this operation on a group containing source and target volumes.

You can use the target volume of a clone session as the source volume for other clone

sessions. To use this feature, you must first enable the SYMAPI_ALLOW_DEV_IN_MULT_GRPS option in the SYMAPI options file. For more information on enabling SYMAPI options, refer to the Solutions Enabler CLI Command Reference.

Data Domain volumes are not supported.

The clone copy does not become available to the host until the session is activated.

To create clone copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

372 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group and click Create Pairs to open the Create Pairs - Clone Pair dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Create Pairs to open the Create Pairs dialog box.

c. Click Set Pairs to open the Set TimeFinder Clone Pairs dialog box.

d. Select a source volume, and a target volume and click Add to make them a pair. Repeat this step as required.

e. Click OK to return to the Create Pairs - Clone Pair dialog box.

4. Optional: Select Use TGT Volumes to use volumes from a local target list as targets.

5. Optional: If you selected Use TGT Volumes, you can also select to Use BCV Volumes as the source.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. If performing this operation at the group level, you can optionally select a Pairing Type by expanding the menu and selecting one of the following. If you are not using thePairing Type option, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that they

were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local Symmetrix system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 373

2. To select a Copy Mode, expand the menu, and select one of the following:

Use Background Copy Specifies to start copying tracks in the background at the same

time as target I/Os are occurring.

Use VP SNAP Specifies to create the session with TimeFinder VP Snap, which allows

multiple sessions to share allocations within a thin pool, thus reducing the storage required for saved tracks.

Use No Copy Specifies to change the session to CopyOnAccess once the session is

activated and no full-volume copy will initiate.

Use Pre-Copy Specifies to start copying tracks in the background before you activate

the clone session.

3. By default, when creating a clone session, the system will create an SDDF session for maintaining changed track information. To change this default behavior, expand the Differential Mode menu, and select Use No Differential. Otherwise, leave this field set to Use Differential.

4. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

5. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Activating clone copy sessions

This procedure explains how to activate the copy operation from the source volume to the target volume. Activating the copy session places the target volume in the Read/Write state. The target host can access the cloned data and has access to data on the source host until you terminate the copy session.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You can only activate clone sessions that are in the Created or Recreated state.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To activate clone copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

374 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group and click Activate to open the Activate - Device Groupdialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Activate to open the Activate Clone Pair dialog box.

4. Optional: To attach Session Options to the operation, click Show Advanced and select any number of options.

5. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Recreating clone copy sessions

This procedure explains how to incrementally copy all subsequent changes made to the source volume (made after the point-in-time copy initiated) to the target volume.

While in the Recreated state, the target volume remains Not Ready to the host.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

The copy session must not have been created with the No Copy or No Differential option.

The session must have been activated to establish the new point-in-time copy.

With Enginuity 5876.159.102 or higher, you can recreate a clone copy without terminating

TimeFinder/Snap or VP Snap sessions that are cascading off of the clone target.

To recreate clone copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group and click Recreate to open the Recreate - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 375

b. Select one or more pairs and click Recreate to open the Recreate - Clone Pairdialog box.

4. Optional: To attach Session Options to the operation, click Show Advanced, and select any number of options.

5. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Creating clone snapshots

This procedure explains how to create and immediately activate clone snapshots.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

The create operation sets the target volume to Not Ready for a short time. If you are using a file

system, unmount the target host before performing the create operation.

To create clone snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Create Snapshot to open the Create Snapshot - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Create Snapshot to open the Create Snapshot - Clone Pair dialog box.

4. Specify whether to perform an Incremental or Full create.

5. If performing this operation at the pair level and performing a Full create, do the following:

a. Click Set Pairs to open the Set Pairs dialog box.

b. Select a source volume and a target volume and click Add to make them a pair. Repeat this step as required.

c. Click OK to close the dialog box.

6. Select the Source Type.

7. Select the Target Type.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

376 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To specify Full Snapshot Options, expand the menu, and do the following:

a. Select one of the following options. If you are not using the Full Snapshot Options, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that

they were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

b. To create the session with TimeFinder VP Snap, select Use VP Snap. Using this option allows multiple sessions to share allocations within a thin pool, thus reducing the storage required for saved tracks.

2. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

3. Do one of the follwing:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Modifying clone copy sessions

This procedure explains how to modify the mode in which a clone copy session is operating.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You can modify the mode between Copy, NoCopy, and Precopy on clone pairs that are in a

Created, Recreated, or Activated state.

Do not attempt to change a session created with the Differential option to the No Copy mode,

as the session will fail.

To modify clone copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 377

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Set Mode to open the Set Mode - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Set Mode to open the Set Mode - Clone Pair dialog box.

4. Select a Copy Mode:

Use Copy If the session was created without the Copy option, it can be changed now to

Copy mode. A copy initiates once the session is activated.

Use No Copy If the session was created with Copy mode, you can change the session to

Nocopy mode. The session becomes CopyOnAccess once the session is activated and no full-volume copy will initiate.

Use Precopy If the session was created without Precopy, you can change the session to

Precopy mode, which implies a copy. You cannot change to NoCopy mode. Once the session is activated, the session changes to Copy mode.

5. Optional: To set session options, click Show Advanced, and select any number of options.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

378 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Restoring data from target volumes

This procedure explains how to copy target data to another volume (full restore), or back to the original source volume (incremental restore).

In the case of a full restore, the original session terminates and a copy session to the target of the restore starts.

In the case of an incremental restore, the original session copy direction is reversed and changed data is copied from the target volume to the source volume. To support this operation, the session must have been created with the Differential option and the volume must be in a fully Copied state.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

With Enginuity 5875 or higher, you can:

Use ORS control volumes as clone restore targets when the volumes are in PUSH sessions and in the ORS Copied state.

Perform an incremental restore to a cascaded clone target. For example, in the relationship A->B->C, you can copy data from volume C to volume A.

With Enginuity 5875.139.93, you can perform an incremental restore on volume pairs in a

NoCopy/NoDiff clone session.

With Enginuity 5876.159.102 or higher, you can perform an incremental restore of clone targets

to source volumes with active snap and VP snap sessions.

For a clone session in the Created state, the target volume must be in a fully copied state.

To restore data from a target volume:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Restore to open the Restore - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Restore to open the Restore - Clone Pair dialog box.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 379

4. Select a Restore Type:

Full Restore Terminates the original session and starts a copy session to the target of

the restore.

Incremental Restore Terminates the original session and starts an incremental copy

session back to the original source volume. The session must have been created with the Differential option.

5. If performing the operation at the group level, select the type of source volumes (Source Type) and the type of target volumes Target Type .

6. To attach Session Options to the operation, click Show Advanced, and select any number of options.

7. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Splitting clone volume pairs

This procedure explains how to split clone volume pairs. Splitting volume pairs changes the direction of the clone relationship (that is, the original source volume becomes the source volume for a future copy), which enables you to use either the establish or recreate command.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

The clone session must be in the Restored state.

To split clone volume pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Split to open the Split - Device Groupdialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Split to open the Split - Clone Pair dialog box.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

380 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

4. To attach Session Options to the operation, click Show Advanced, and select any number of options.

5. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Terminating clone copy sessions

This procedure explains how to terminate a clone copy session, thereby deleting the pairing information from the storage system, and removing any hold on the target volume.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Clone requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Clone operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You need a clone copy session in any pair state.

Terminating a session while the pairs are in the CopyOnAccess, CopyOnWrite, or CopyInProg

state causes the session to end. If the application has not finished accessing all of the data, the target copy is not a full copy.

To terminate clone copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Terminate to open the Terminate - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Terminate to open the Terminate - Clone Pair dialog box.

4. If performing the operation at the group level, select the type of source volumes (Source Type) and the type of target volumes Target Type .

5. To attach Session Options to the operation, click Show Advanced, and select any number of options.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 381

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Viewing clone copy sessions

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > Time/Finder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone view.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Clone Pair List view.

Use the Clone Pair List view to display and manage a group's clone pairs.

The following properties display:

Group Details Lists additional group details, including:

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are: Regular, R1, R2, or R21.

Vender ID The company who's application created the group.

Group Valid Whether the group is valid (Yes) or invalid (No).

Group Creation Time Date/Time the group was created.

Application ID The application that created the group.

Group Modify Time Date/Time the group was last modified.

Session List Lists the group's clone pairs and their attributes, including:

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Source LDev The logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume The name of the target volume.

Target LDev The logical name of the target volume.

State The session state of the pair.

CDGP Flags specific to the pair session in the form:

(C): X = The background copy setting is active for this pair.

. = The background copy setting is not active for this pair.

(G): X = The Target volume is associated with a group.

. = The Target volume is not associated with a group.

(D): X = The Clone session is a differential copy session.

. = The Clone session is not a differential copy session.

(P): X = The precopy operation has completed one cycle.

. = The precopy operation has not completed one cycle.

Percent Copied The percentage of copying that is complete.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

382 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

The following controls are available:

Create Pairs See Creating clone copy sessions on page 372.

Activate See Activating clone copy sessions on page 374.

Recreate See Recreating clone copy sessions on page 375.

View Details Viewing clone session details on the next page

Split See Splitting clone volume pairs on page 380.

Restore See Restoring data from target volumes on page 379.

Create Snapshot See Creating clone copy sessions on page 372.

Terminate See Terminating clone copy sessions on page 381.

Set Mode See Modifying clone copy sessions on page 377.

Viewing clone copy sessions

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > Time/Finder/Clone to open the TimeFinder/Clone view.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Clone Pair List view.

Use the Clone Pair List view to display and manage a group's clone pairs.

The following properties display:

Group Details Lists additional group details, including:

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are: Regular, R1, R2, or R21.

Vender ID The company who's application created the group.

Group Valid Whether the group is valid (Yes) or invalid (No).

Group Creation Time Date/Time the group was created.

Application ID The application that created the group.

Group Modify Time Date/Time the group was last modified.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 383

Session List Lists the group's clone pairs and their attributes, including:

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Source LDev The logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume The name of the target volume.

Target LDev The logical name of the target volume.

State The session state of the pair.

CDGP Flags specific to the pair session in the form:

(C): X = The background copy setting is active for this pair.

. = The background copy setting is not active for this pair.

(G): X = The Target volume is associated with a group.

. = The Target volume is not associated with a group.

(D): X = The Clone session is a differential copy session.

. = The Clone session is not a differential copy session.

(P): X = The precopy operation has completed one cycle.

. = The precopy operation has not completed one cycle.

Percent Copied The percentage of copying that is complete.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

The following controls are available:

Create Pairs See Creating clone copy sessions on page 372.

Activate See Activating clone copy sessions on page 374.

Recreate See Recreating clone copy sessions on page 375.

View Details Viewing clone session details below

Split See Splitting clone volume pairs on page 380.

Restore See Restoring data from target volumes on page 379.

Create Snapshot See Creating clone copy sessions on page 372.

Terminate See Terminating clone copy sessions on page 381.

Set Mode See Modifying clone copy sessions on page 377.

Viewing clone session details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Clone to open the TimeFinder Clone view.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Clone pair list view.

4. Select a pair and click View Details to open its Details view.

5. Use the clone session Details view to view and manage a clone session.

The following properties display:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

384 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Group The type of group. Possible values are: Regular, R1, R2, or R21.

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Source LDev The logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume The name of the target volume.

Target LDev The logical name of the target volume.

Pair State The session state of the pair.

Source protected tracks Number of protected tracks on the source volume.

Source modified tracks Number of tracks modified on the source volume.

Target protected tracks Number of protected tracks on the target volume.

Target modified tracks Number of modified tracks on the target volume.

CDGP Flags specific to the pair session in the form:

(C): X = The background copy setting is active for this pair.

. = The background copy setting is not active for this pair.

(G): X = The Target volume is associated with a group.

. = The Target volume is not associated with a group.

(D): X = The Clone session is a differential copy session.

. = The Clone session is not a differential copy session.

(P): X = The precopy operation has completed one cycle.

. = The precopy operation has not completed one cycle.

Percent Copied The percentage of copying that is complete.

Timestamp Date and time the pair was created.

Clone copy session options

The following table describes the TimeFinder/Clone session options:

Session option

Description Available with action

Both Sides Activates all locally and remotely associated clone pairs in an SRDF group.

Activate

Establish

Concurrent Performs the action for an additional clone pair in a group. Create

Recreate

Establish

Table 5: TimeFinder/Clone session options

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 385

Session option

Description Available with action

Activate

Verify

Consistent Creates clone copies that are consistent with the database up to the point in time that the activation occurs. It suspends writes to the source volumes during the activation.

Activate

Copy Creates a full data copy. By omitting this option (default), the volume pair state will be in the CopyOnAccess state when activated. Actual copying of the data is deferred until either tracks on the source volume are written to, or tracks on the target volume are read or written.

This option is only applicable when the target volume is a regular volume (not a virtual volume).

Create

Establish

Differential Used with either the Copy or Precopy option to create an SDDF session for maintaining changed track information. It must be used when creating copy sessions on which you plan on issuing a Restore action.

Create

Establish

Force Overrides any restrictions and forces the operation, even though one or more paired volumes may not be in the expected state. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Create

Establish

Activate

Restore

Split

Terminate

Not Ready Sets the target volumes as Not Ready. Establish

Activate

Restore

Optimize Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups. For remote volumes, use the Optimize Rag option.

Create

Establish

Optimize Rag

Uses optimization rules to create remote BCV pairs from volumes within the same RDF (RA) group on a storage system.

Create

Establish

Precopy Copies tracks in the background before the clone session is activated. Used with the create and recreate actions.

Create

Recreate

Restored With the verify command, verifies that the copy sessions are in the Restored state. With the terminate command, terminates a restored VP Snap session.

Verify

Terminate

Chapter 6: Data Protection

386 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Session option

Description Available with action

Star Targets the action at volumes in SRDF/Star mode. Create

Recreate

Establish

Activate

Restore

Split

Terminate

Symforce Forces an operation on the volume pair including pairs that would be rejected. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Terminate

TimeFinder/Snap

Understanding TimeFinder/Snap operations

TimeFinder/Snap operations enable you to create and manage copy sessions between a source volume and multiple virtual target volumes. When you activate a virtual copy session, a point-in- time copy of the source volume is immediately available to its host through the corresponding virtual volume. Virtual volumes consume minimal physical disk storage because they contain only the address pointers to the data that is stored on the source volume or in a pool of SAVE volumes. SAVE volumes are storage volumes that are not host-accessible and can only be accessed through the virtual volumes that point to them. SAVE volumes provide pooled physical storage for virtual volumes.

Snapping data to a virtual volume uses a copy-on-first-write technique. Upon a first write to the source volume during the copy session, Enginuity copies the preupdated image of the changed track to a SAVE volume and updates the track pointer on the virtual volume to point to the data on the SAVE volume.

The attached host views the point-in-time copy through virtual volume pointers to both the source volume and SAVE volume, for as long as the session remains active. If you terminate the copy session, the copy is lost, and the space associated with the session is freed and returned to the SAVE volume pool for future use.

TimeFinder operations are not supported directly on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. Instead, they are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

The following are the basic actions performed in a TimeFinder/Snap operation:

Create Creates the relationship between the source volume and the virtual target volume.

Activate Makes the virtual target volume available for read/write access and starts the copy-

on-first-write mechanism.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 387

Recreate Creates a new point-in-time copy.

Restore Copies tracks from the virtual volume to the source volume or another volume.

Terminate Causes the target host to lose access to data pointed to by the virtual volume.

For more information about TimeFinder concepts, refer to the Solutions Enabler TimeFinder Family CLI Product Guide and the TimeFinder Family Product Guide.

Managing TimeFinder/Snap sessions

The TimeFinder/Snap dashboard provides you with a single place to monitor and manage TimeFinder/Snap sessions on a storage system.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

Managing TimeFinder/Snap sessions:

1. Select the Symmetrix system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

The following properties display:

Source Group Groups containing volumes using TimeFinder/Snap.

Standard The number of standard volumes in the group.

BCV  The number of BCVs in the group.

VDEV The number of virtual volumes in the group.

Target The number of target volumes in the group.

State The session state of the pair.

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are: Regular, R1, R2, or R21.

Group Valid Whether the group is valid or invalid.

The following controls are available:

Create Pairs See Creating virtual copy sessions on the facing page.

Activate See Activating virtual copy sessions on page 390.

Terminate See Terminating virtual copy sessions on page 396.

View Storage Groups Viewing storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 156

View Details Viewing snap pair details

Restore See Restoring virtual copy sessions on page 395.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

388 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Recreate See Recreating virtual copy sessions on page 394.

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on page 391

Duplicate See Duplicating virtual copy sessions on page 393.

Creating virtual copy sessions

Virtual copy sessions define and set up the volumes for snap operations.

The Create action defines the copy session requirements and sets the track protection bitmap on the source volume to protect all tracks and detect which tracks are being accessed by the target host or written to by the source host. The target virtual volume remains Not Ready to its host and placed on hold status for copy session usage. This prevents other control operations from using the volume. The volume pair state transitions from CreateInProg to Created when complete. The virtual data becomes accessible to its host when the copy session is activated.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You can create up to 128 copies of a source volume to various virtual target volumes. This

requires that you enable the following SYMCLI environment variable:

SYMCLI_MULTI_VIRTUAL_SNAP = ENABLED

A source volume can concurrently copy data to as many as 15 target volumes at one time. Each

target requires a separate copy session.

For storage systems running Enginuity 5875- 5876, you can:

Use this feature to create multivirtual snap sessions from thin volumes.

Use RDF2 async volumes as source volumes.

Create a snap pair from a clone target in the Split state.

To create a snap session of an R2 volume that is in an SRDF/A session, volume level pacing

must be enabled on the R1 side.

Data Domain volumes are not supported

To create virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 389

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

a. Select a group, and click Create Pairs to open the Create - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select a Snap Pool.

c. Select the type of Source Volumes.

d. Select the type of Target Volumes.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Create Pairs to open the Create Pairs dialog box.

c. Click Set Pairs to open the Set Pairs dialog box.

d. Select a source volume, and a target volume, and click Add to make them a pair. Repeat this step as required.

e. Click OK to return to the Create Sessions dialog box.

4. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To select a Pairing Type, expand the menu, and select one of the following. If you are not using the Pairing Type option, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that they

were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

2. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

3. Do one of the follwing:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Activating virtual copy sessions

Activating the copy session starts the copy-on-first-write mechanism and places the target volume in the Read/Write state. The target host can access the copy and has access to data on the source host until the copy session is terminated.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

390 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

To activate virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, and click Activate to open the Activate dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Activate to open the Activate dialog box.

4. Select the type of Source Volumes to use.

5. Select the type of Target Volumes to use.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

2. Click OK.

Creating snapshots

This procedure explains how to create and immediately activate virtual copy sessions.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

Creating snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 391

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Create Pairs to open the Create Pairs dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Create Pairs to open the Create Pairs dialog box.

4. Optional: Select Use TGT Volumes to use volumes from a local target list as targets.

5. Optional: If you selected Use TGT Volumes, you can also select to Use BCV Volumes as the source.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To select a Pairing Type, expand the menu, and select one of the following. If you are not using the Pairing Type option, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that they

were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

2. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

3. Click OK.

Attaching and detaching preferred pairs

Pre-determining attached volume pairs eliminates the need to specify copy session target volumes from within the device group for create and activate operations.

The attached pairs will be used whenever a snap operation is requested for the specified device group. If a create or activate operation does not specify a volume pair from within the device group, the attached pair will automatically be used for the operation.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

You can only attach a standard source volume with a target VDEV. You cannot attach if the

source volume is a BCV.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

392 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To attach/detach preferred pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Snap Sessions List view.

4. Do the following depending on whether you are attaching or detaching volumes:

Attaching:

a. Select one or more pairs, and click more .

a. Select Attach to open the Attach dialog box.

b. To include BCVs, select the BCV option.

c. Select the volumes to attach and click OK.

Detaching:

a. Select one or more pairs and click Detach.

a. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Duplicating virtual copy sessions

The duplicate TimeFinder/Snap feature allows you to duplicate a point-in-time copy of a virtual volume that is paired in a previously activated snap session to another virtual volume. This second point-in-time copy session actually resides with the source volume of the original snap session and is charged as part of the maximum number of sessions for that source volume. The duplicate snap is an actual copy of the virtual volume to another virtual volume.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

Snap create and activate operations cannot be mixed between normal snap sessions and

duplicate snap sessions within the same operation.

The maximum number of duplicated sessions in the Created state is two.

When a duplicate session is in the Created state, the original session cannot be terminated or

recreated until the duplicate session is activated.

To duplicate virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 393

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Duplicate to open the Duplicate dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Duplicate to open the Duplicate dialog box.

4. Optional: Select Use TGT Volumes to use volumes from a local target list as targets.

5. Optional: If you selected Use TGT Volumes, you can also select to Use BCV Volumes as the source.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

2. Click OK.

Recreating virtual copy sessions

The snap recreate action allows you to recreate a snap session on an existing VDEV in order to prepare to activate a new point-in-time image.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

For storage systems running Enginuity 5875 or higher, you can use this feature to recreate

multivirtual snap sessions from thin and standard volumes.

This feature can only be used on sessions that have been previously activated.

To recreate virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

394 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Select a group, click more , and select Recreate to open the Recreate dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , select Recreate to open the Recreate dialog box.

4. Optional: Select Use TGT Volumes to use volumes from a local target list as targets.

5. Optional: If you selected Use TGT Volumes, you can also select to Use BCV Volumes as the source.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

2. Click OK.

Restoring virtual copy sessions

The following types of restore operations can be performed for virtual copy sessions:

Incremental restore back to the original source volume.

Incremental restore to a BCV, which has been split from its original standard source volume but

maintains the incremental relationship with the source.

Full restore to any standard or split BCV outside of the existing copy session. The target volume

of the restore must be of the same size and emulation type as the source volume.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

With Enginuity 5875 or higher, you can use ORS control volumes as snap restore volumes when

the volumes are in Push sessions and in the ORS Copied state.

With Enginuity 5876.159.102 and higher, you can perform a TimeFinder/Snap restore to a

TimeFinder/Clone target. For example, volumes in an A > B > C cascaded session (where A > B is TimeFinder/Clone and B > C is TimeFinder/Snap) can copy data from volume C to volume A (via volume B). You can complete this operation without terminating the TimeFinder/Clone session, or any existing TimeFinder/Snap sessions off of the TimeFinder/Clone target. This feature is known as Persistent Restore to Target (PTT).

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 395

To restore virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

Select a group, click more , and select Restore to open the Restore dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Restore to open the Restore dialog box.

4. Select the Restore Type.

Restore operations can be used to copy target data to another device (full restore), or back to the original source device (incremental restore). In the case of a full restore, the original session terminates and a copy session to the target of the restore starts. In the case of an incremental restore, the original session copy direction is reversed and changed data is copied from the target device to the source device. Restore operations require that the original session is differential and the source device is fully copied.

5. If performing a Full restore, click Set Pairs to open the Set TimeFinder Snap Pairs dialog box from which you can select the volumes to use in the operation.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu and select any number of options.

2. Click OK.

Terminating virtual copy sessions

This procedure explains how to terminate an active virtual copy session at any time.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Snap requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Snap operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

To terminate virtual copy sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

396 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level:

Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Terminate to open the Terminate dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Details view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Terminate to open the Terminate Sessions dialog box.

4. Optional: Select Use TGT Volumes to use volumes from a local target list as targets.

5. Optional: If you selected Use TGT Volumes, you can also select to Use BCV Volumes as the source.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options.

2. Click OK.

Viewing Snap sessions

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder/Snap dashboard.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Snap Sessions list view.

Use the Snap Sessions list view to display and manage a group's snap pairs.

The following properties display:

Group Details Lists additional group details, including:

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are: Regular, R1, R2, or R21.

Vender ID The company whose application created the group.

Group Valid Whether the group is valid (Yes) or invalid (No).

Group Creation Time Date/Time the group was created.

Application ID The application that created the group.

Group Modify Time Date/Time the group was last modified.

Session List Lists the group's snap sessions and their attributes, including:

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 397

Source LDev Logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume The name of the target volume.

Target LDev The logical name of the target volume.

State The session state of the pair.

Pool The name of the snap pool.

Percent Copied The percentage of copying complete.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

The following controls are available:

Create Pairs See Creating virtual copy sessions on page 389.

Activate See Activating virtual copy sessions on page 390.

Terminate See Terminating virtual copy sessions on page 396.

View Details Viewing snap pair details

Detach See Attaching and detaching preferred pairs on page 392.

Attach See Attaching and detaching preferred pairs on page 392.

Duplicate See Duplicating virtual copy sessions on page 393.

Create Snapshot See Creating snapshots on page 391.

Recreate See Recreating virtual copy sessions on page 394.

Restore See Restoring virtual copy sessions on page 395.

Viewing snap pair details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Snap to open the TimeFinder Snap view.

3. Select a group, and click View Details to open its Snap Sessions list view.

4. Select a pair and click View Details to open its Details view.

5. Use the snap session Details view to view and manage a snap session.

The following properties display:

Group Name of the snap source group.

Source Volume Name of the source volume.

Source LDev Logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume Name of the target volume.

Target LDev Logical name of the target volume.

Pair State Session state of the pair.

Number of Source Protected Tracks Number of protected tracks on the source.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

398 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

SAVE Pool Name Name of the snap pool.

Percent Copied Percentage of copying complete.

Number of Source Modified Tracks Number of tracks modified on the source volume.

Number of Target Modified Tracks Number of tracks modified on the target volume.

Snap session options

The following table describes the TimeFinder/Snap session options:

Session option

Description Available with action

Consistent Causes the source and VDEV pairs to be consistently activated. Activate

Duplicate Indicates that the action is being performed on a duplicate virtual copy session (that is, on a VDEV to a VDEV pair).

Create

Activate

Terminate

Force Overrides any restrictions and forces the operation, even though one or more paired volumes may not be in the expected state. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Create

Activate

Terminate

Restore

Incremental Restore

Not Ready Sets the VDEVs as Not Ready. Activate

Restore

Incremental Restore

Restore Must be used with the terminate action when terminating a restore session.

Terminate

Star Indicates that the action is being performed on a volume that is in SRDF/Star mode.

Create

Activate

Recreate

Terminate

Restore

SymForce Forces an operation on the volume pair including pairs that would be rejected. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Terminate

Table 6: TimeFinder/Snap session options

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 399

TimeFinder SnapVX

Managing TimeFinder SnapVX

TimeFinder SnapVX is a local replication solution designed to non-disruptively create point-in-time copies (snapshots) of critical data. TimeFinder SnapVX creates snapshots by storing changed tracks (deltas) directly in the Storage Resource Pool of the source volume. With TimeFinder SnapVX, you do not need to specify a target volume and source/target pairs when you create a snapshot. If there is ever a need for the application to use the point-in-time data, you can create links from the snapshot to one or more target volumes. If there are multiple snapshots and the application needs to find a particular point-in-time copy for host access, you can link and relink until the correct snapshot is located.

The TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard provides a single place from you can manage TimeFinder SnapVX snapshots and their associated storage groups.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

TimeFinder/SnapVX operations are not supported on working ProtectPoint snapshots.

TimeFinder/SnapVX operations are, however, supported to help repair failing ProtectPoint snapshots.

To access the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard:

The following properties display:

Storage Groups Storage group associated with the snapshot.

Capacity Total capacity of the storage group.

Snapshots Number of snapshots associated with storage group.

Creation Time Date/time the most recent snapshot was created.

The following controls are available:

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on the facing page

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

View Snapshots Viewing snapshots on page 409

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

Chapter 6: Data Protection

400 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Set Mode Setting copy mode for snapshots on page 408

Set Days to Live Setting snapshots to automatically terminate on page 406

Terminate Terminating snapshots on page 407

Creating snapshots

This procedure explains how to create TimeFinder SnapVX snapshots.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The maximum number of snapshots per source volume is 256.

Snapshots off of linked targets are permitted only after the volume is fully defined.

You can perform this operation from the either of the following dashboards:

TimeFinder/SnapVX, Storage, or Protection. Depending on the location from which you are performing this operation, some of the following steps may not apply.

To create snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on the location from which you want to perform the procedure: TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard:

a. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

b. Select a storage group and click Create Snapshot to open the Create Snapshot dialog box.

Storage Groups Dashboard:

a. Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Groups panel, click Total or Unprotected to open the corresponding list view.

c. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard.

d. If not already selected, select Point In Time Protection, and then select Using SnapVX.

e. Click Next. Protection dashboard:

a. Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection Dashboard.

b. In the Storage Group Protection panel, click Total to open the All Storage Groups list view.

c. Select the storage group and click Protect to open the Protect Storage Group wizard.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 401

d. If not already selected, select Point In Time Protection, and then select Using SnapVX.

e. Click Next.

1. Select whether to create a new snapshot or reuse an existing snapshot.

2. If reusing an existing snapshot, select it from the list. When using this method, Unisphere for VMAX assigns generation numbers to the snapshots in the order in which they were created (latest = generation 0, previous incrementing by one). This naming convention allows you to differentiate point-in-time copies of the same volumes.

It is the users responsibility to manage the snapshot names being used. If snapshots are being applied to parent and child storage groups individually, care should be taken to never use the same snapshot name at different levels of the storage group construct. The same applies if some of the volumes are in multiple storage groups being snapshotted; the same snapshot names should also be avoided across the different storage groups.

3. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling

jobs on page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To configure the snapshot to automatically terminate after a period of time, specify the number of Days to live. Once the time has expired, Unisphere for VMAX will automatically terminate the snapshot, provided that it is not linked to any target volumes. If an expired snapshot is linked, Unisphere for VMAX will wait until the last link has been removed before terminating the snapshot. To override this behavior, select the Force option, which will allow Unisphere for VMAX to terminate the snapshot regardless of whether it is linked. When Days to live is set to 0, the snapshot will remain until you manually terminate it.

2. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected states, select Force.

3. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Linking to snapshots

This procedure explains how to link one or more host-mapped target volumes to a snapshot, thereby making the snapshot's point-in-time data available to applications running on the host.

Snapshots can be linked to target volumes in the following modes:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

402 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

NoCopy mode Creates a temporary, space-saving snapshot of only the changed data on the

snapshot's Storage Resource Pool (SRP). Target volumes linked in this mode will not retain data after the links are removed. This is the default mode. This mode cannot be used when either the source or link target volume is a Data Domain volume.

Copy mode Creates a permanent, full-volume copy of the data on the target volume's SRP.

Target volumes linked in this mode will retain data after the links are removed.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The targets must not be linked to any other snapshots.

The target volume must be of equal or greater size than the source volume.

Any pre-existing data that was exclusive to the target will be lost during a link or relink.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To link to snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group and clink Link to open the Link to Storage Group dialog box.

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Creation Date (0 is the latest).

5. Specify whether to link to a new target storage group (one not already linked to a snapshot) or an existing target storage group.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To create a permanent, full-time copy of the data on the target volume's SRP, select Copy.

2. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected state(s), select Force.

3. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 403

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Relinking to snapshots

This procedure explains how to unlink a target storage group from a snapshot, and then automatically link it to another snapshot. After a relink operation, the copy between the original linked snapshot and the newly linked snapshot is differential.

You can also relink storage group to the same snapshot, thereby refreshing the point-in-time copy on the target storage group when it's been modified by host writes.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To relink in Copy mode:

The original link must be fully copied prior to the relink.

The copy will be differential between the original linked snapshot and the newly linked snapshot.

Any pre-existing data that was exclusive to the target will be lost during a link or relink.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To relink snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Relink to open the Relink dialog box.

4. Select the new Snapshot Name and Generation (0 is the latest).

5. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To create a permanent, full-time copy of the data on the target volume's SRP, select Copy.

2. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected state(s), select Force.

3. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

Chapter 6: Data Protection

404 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Unlinking from snapshots

This procedure explains how to unlink target volumes from their snapshots.

For instructions on unlinking target volumes, and then automatically linking to other snapshots, refer to Relinking to snapshots on the previous page.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin or higher.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To unlink from snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Unlink to open the Unlink dialog box.

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Creation Date (0 is the latest).

5. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected state(s), select Force.

2. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Restoring snapshots

This procedure explains how to restore snapshot data back to the original source volumes. TimeFinder SnapVX restore operations are inherently differential, meaning that only tracks that have changed since the snapshot was created are copied back to the source volumes.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 405

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To restore snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group and clink Restore to open the Restore dialog box.

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Creation Date (0 is the latest).

5. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected states, click Show Advanced , and select Force.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting snapshots to automatically terminate

This procedure explains how to configure snapshots to automatically terminate after a period of time.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To set snapshots to automatically terminate:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Set Days to Live to open the Set Days to Livedialog box.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

406 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Generation.

5. Select the number of Days to live. Once the time has expired, Unisphere for VMAX will automatically terminate the snapshot, provided that it is not linked to any target volumes. If an expired snapshot is linked, Unisphere for VMAX will wait until the last link has been removed before terminating the snapshot. To override this behavior, select the Force option, which will allow Unisphere for VMAX to terminate the snapshot regardless of whether it is linked. To remove the Days to live attribute, select None.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected states, select Force.

2. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Terminating snapshots

This procedure explains how to remove snapshots from a system.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The snapshot must not have any links.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To terminate snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Terminate to open the Terminate dialog box.

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Generation.

5. Click one of the following:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 407

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected states, select Force.

2. To force the operation when the operation would normally be rejected, select SymForce.

Use extreme caution with this option. If used when a link is copy in progress or when a restore is restore in progress, this will cause an incomplete copy and data on the copy target would not be usable.

3. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Setting copy mode for snapshots

This procedure explains how to change the copy mode used when linking target volumes and snapshots.

Before you begin:

To perform this operation, you must be a StorageAdmin.

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

This procedure explains how to perform this operation from the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

You can also perform this operation from other locations in the interface. Depending on the location, some of the steps may not apply.

To set the copy mode for snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select the storage group, click more and select Set Mode to open the Set Mode dialog box.

4. Select the Snapshot Name and Generation.

5. Select a new mode:

No Copy Creates a temporary, space-saving snapshot of only the changed data on the

snapshot's Storage Resource Pool (SRP). Target volumes linked in this mode will not retain data after the links are removed. This is the default mode.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

408 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Copy Creates a permanent, full-volume copy of the data on the target volume's SRP.

Target volumes linked in this mode will retain data after the links are removed.

6. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To force the operation even though one or more volumes may not be in the normal, expected state(s), select Force.

2. Click one of the following:

Add to Job List to perform the operation at a later time, as described in Scheduling jobs on

page 843.

Expand Add to Job List and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Viewing snapshots

This procedure explains how to view and manage snapshots of a storage group.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

The storage group Snapshots list view allows you to view and manage the snapshots associated with a storage group.

The following properties display:

Snapshot Name of the snapshot.

Creation Time Date, time, and generation number for the snapshot.

Linked Whether the snapshot is linked to another storage group. A checkmark ( )

indicates that the snapshot is linked.

Restored Whether the snapshot is restored to the source. A checkmark ( ) indicates

that the snapshot is restored.

Tracks Number of tracks that have been allocated to preserve the point in time copy of

the source volume since the snapshot was created.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 409

Non-Shared Tracks Number of tracks uniquely allocated for the snapshot's delta.

The following controls are available:

Create Snapshot Creating snapshots on page 401

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

View Details Viewing snapshot details below

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Set Mode Setting copy mode for snapshots on page 408

Set Days to Live Setting snapshots to automatically terminate on page 406

Terminate Terminating snapshots on page 407

Viewing snapshot details

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

The snapshot Details view allow you to view and manage a snapshot. It contains Properties and Related Objects panels.

Properties panel:

The following properties display:

Name Name of the snapshot. To rename the snapshot, type a new name over the existing

and click Apply. Snapshot names must be unique from other napshots on the system and cannot exceed 64 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores ( _ ), and (-) are allowed. Snapshot names are case-sensitive. You are responsible for naming snaphots,and you should avoid using the same snapshot names in different containers like a storage group.

Generation Generation number assigned to the snapshot. This number is used to

differentiate between point-in-time copies of the same name and same volumes. Unisphere for VMAX assigns generation numbers to the snapshots in the order in which they were created (latest = generation 0, previous incrementing by one).

Chapter 6: Data Protection

410 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Creation Date Date and time the snapshot was created.

Expiry Date Date and time the snapshot is set to automatically terminate. If the snapshot is

not set to automatically terminate, this field displays N/A.

State Snapshot state.

The following controls are available:

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list, for example, renaming the storage

group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in theProperties list.

Related Objects panel:

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the snapshot. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Links - 2 will open a view listing the two links associated with the snapshot.

Viewing snapshot links

This procedure explains how to view storage groups containing the linked volumes.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshot source volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Links to open the snapshot Links list view.

The snapshot Linkslist view allow you to view and manage the storage groups containing the linked volumes.

The following properties display:

Storage Group Name of the storage group.

State Snapshot state.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

Tracks Number of source tracks that the host has not yet overwritten.

Track Size Track size in bytes.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 411

Percent Copied Percent of the total source volume size that has been overwritten by the

host.

The following controls are available:

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

View Details Viewing snapshot link details below

Viewing snapshot link details

This procedure explains how to view snapshot link pairs.

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshot source volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Links to open the snapshot Links list view.

6. Select a link and click View Details to open the snapshot link Details view.

The snapshot link Details view allow you to view and manage the linked volume pairs.

The following properties display:

Source Volume Name of the source volume.

Link Volume Name of the linked volume.

State Snapshot state.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

Flags Snapshot flags. Possible values are: Failed, Links, Restored, Defined (FLRD).

Percent Copied Percent of the total source volume size that has been overwritten by the

host.

The following controls are available:

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Viewing snapshot source volumes

This procedure explains how to view the source volumes in snapshot.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

412 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshot source volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Source Volumes to open the snapshot Source Volumes list view.

The snapshot Source Volumes view allow you to view and manage the source volumes in a snapshot.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the volume.

State Snapshot state.

Creation Date Date and time the snapshot was created.

Flags Snapshot flags. Possible values are: Failed, Links, Restored, Defined (FLRD)

Percent Copied Percent of the total source volume size that has been overwritten by the

host.

The following controls are available:

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

View Details Viewing snapshot source volume details below

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Set Mode Setting copy mode for snapshots on page 408

Set Days to Live Setting snapshots to automatically terminate on page 406

Terminate Terminating snapshots on page 407

Viewing snapshot source volume details

This procedure explains how to view the details on a snapshot source volume.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 413

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshot source volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Source Volumes to open the snapshot Source Volumes list view.

6. Select the volume and click View Details to open the snapshot source volume Details view.

The snapshot source volume Details view allow you to view and manage the source volume in a snapshot.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the volume.

State Snapshot state.

Timestamp Date and time the snapshot was created.

Child Storage Group Name of the child storage group containing this volume. If the

volume is not in a child storage group, this field will display N/A.

Flags Snapshot flags. Possible values are: Failed, Links, Restored, Defined (FLRD)

Tracks Number of source tracks that the host has not yet overwritten.

Track Size Track size in bytes.

The following controls are available:

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Restore Restoring snapshots on page 405

Relink Relinking to snapshots on page 404

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

Set Mode Setting copy mode for snapshots on page 408

Set Days to Live Setting snapshots to automatically terminate on page 406

Terminate Terminating snapshots on page 407

Viewing snapshot source volume linked volumes

This procedure explains how to view linked volumes for a snapshot source volume.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

414 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

The storage system must be running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To view snapshot source volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/SnapVX to open the TimeFinder/SnapVX dashboard.

3. Select a storage group and select View Snapshots to open the storage group Snapshots list view.

4. Select a snapshot and select View Details to open the snapshot Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click Source Volumes to open the snapshot Source Volumes list view.

6. Select the volume and click View Details to open the snapshot source volume Details view.

7. In the Related Objects panel, click Link Volumes to open the snapshot source volume Link Volumes list view.

The snapshot source volume Link Volumes list view allow you to view and manage the linked volumes for a snapshot source volume.

The following properties display:

Name Name of the volume.

Storage Group Storage group that contains the target volume.

State Snapshot state.

Creation Time Date and time the snapshot was created.

Flags Snapshot flags. Possible values are: Failed, Links, Restored, Defined (FLRD).

Percent Copied Percent of the total source volume size that has been overwritten by the

host.

The following controls are available:

Link Linking to snapshots on page 402

Unlink Unlinking from snapshots on page 405

TimeFinder/Mirror

Managing TimeFinder/Mirror sessions

The TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard provides you with a single place to monitor and manage TimeFinder/Snap sessions on a storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 415

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Miorror requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Mirror operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

TimeFinder operations are not supported on ORS control volumes on storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Managing TimeFinder/Mirror sessions:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard.

The following properties display:

Source Group Lists the groups containing volumes using TimeFinder/Mirror. Information

in this column is organized in a tree format, with groups organized into folders according to their type. To view information on a specific group, expand the appropriate folder.

Standard The number of standard volumes in the group.

BCV  The number of BCVs in the group.

State The combined state of the sessions in the group. If all the sessions are in the

same state, then that state appears; otherwise, Mixed appears.

Group Type The type of group. Possible values are RDF1, RDF2, RDF21, and Regular.

Group Valid Indicates whether the group is valid. The possible values are Yes or No.

The following controls are available:

Create Snapshot See Creating Snapshots below.

Restore See Restoring BCV pairs on the facing page.

View Storage Groups Viewing storage groups (Enginuity 5874 - 5876) on page 156

Cancel See Cancelling BCV pairs on page 419.

Split See Splitting BCV pairs on page 419.

View Details See Viewing mirror pair details on page 421.

Creating Snapshots

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Miorror requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Mirror operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

Data Domain volumes are not supported.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

416 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

To create snapshots:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform this operation at the group level or the pair level:

Group level:

Select a device group, and click Create Snapshot to open the Create Snapshot - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a device group, and click View Details to open the Mirror Sessions List view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Create Snapshot to open the Create Snapshot - Mirror Pair dialog box.

4. Select a Snapshot Type:

Incremental Copies to the BCV volume only the new data that was updated on the

standard volume while the BCV pair was split.

Full Copies the entire contents of the standard volume to the BCV volume.

5. If performing a full establish at the pair level, do the following:

a. Click Set Pairs to open the Set TimeFinder Mirror Pairs dialog box.

b. Select a Source Volume and a Target Volume, and click Add to make them a pair. Repeat this step as required.

c. Click OK to return to the Create Snapshot - Mirror Pair dialog box.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To specify Full Snapshot Options, expand the menu, and select one of the following options. If you are not using the Full Snapshot Options, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that

they were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

2. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options. For option descriptions, refer to See TimeFinder/Mirror session options on page 422.

3. Click OK.

Restoring BCV pairs

This procedure explains how to copy data from the BCV volumes to the standard volumes.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 417

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Miorror requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running

HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Mirror operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

To restore BCV pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform this operation at the group level or the pair level:

Group level:

Select a device group, and click Restore to open the Restore - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a device group, and click View Details to open the Mirror Sessions List view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Restore to open the Restore Mirror Pair dialog box.

4. Select a Restore Type:

Incremental Copies to the standard volume only the new data that was updated on the

BCV volume while the BCV pair was split.

Full Copies the entire contents of the BCV volume to the standard volume.

5. If performing a full establish at the pair level, do the following:

a. Click Set Pairs to open the Set TimeFinder Mirror Pairs dialog box.

b. Select a Source Volume and a Target Volume, and click Add to make them a pair. Repeat this step as required.

c. Click OK to return to the Restore - Mirror Pair dialog box.

6. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To specify Full Restore Options, expand the menu, and do the following:

a. Select one of the following options. If you are not using the Full Establish Options, leave this field set to None.

Use Exact Pairs Allows the system to pair up the volumes in the exact order that

they were added to the group.

Use Optimized Pairs Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system

without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups.

2. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options, as described in See TimeFinder/Mirror session options on page 422.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

418 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

3. Click OK.

Splitting BCV pairs

This procedure explains how to split paired volumes to where each holds separate valid copies of the data.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Miorror requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Mirror operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

To split BCV pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform this operation at the group level or the pair level:

Group level:

a. Select a device group, and click Split to open the Split - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a device group, and click View Details to open the Mirror Sessions List view.

b. Select one or more pairs, and click Split to open the Split Mirror Pair dialog box.

4. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options, as described in See TimeFinder/Mirror session options on page 422.

2. Click OK.

Cancelling BCV pairs

This procedure explains how to cancel the relationship between volumes in a BCV pair.

Before you begin:

TimeFinder/Miorror requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876. On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, TimeFinder/Mirror operations are mapped to their TimeFinder/SnapVX equivalents.

To cancel BCV pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 419

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror dashboard.

3. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform this operation at the group level or the pair level:

Group level:

Select a device group, click more , and select Cancel to open the Cancel - Device Group dialog box.

Pair level:

a. Select a device group, and click View Details to open the Mirror Sessions List view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Cancel to open the Cancel Mirror Pair dialog box.

4. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to continue setting the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. To attach Session Options to the operation, expand the menu, and select any number of options, as described in See TimeFinder/Mirror session options on page 422.

2. Click OK.

Viewing mirror pairs

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror view.

3. Select a device group and click View Details to open the Mirror Pairs list view.

4. Use the Mirror Pairs list view to display and manage TimeFinder/Mirror sessions.

The following properties display:

Show Group Details Lists additional group details, including:

Vender ID The company whose application created the group.

Group Creation Time Date/Time the group was created.

Group Valid Whether the group is valid (Yes) or invalid (No).

Group Modify Time Date/Time the group last modified.

Application ID The application that created the group.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

420 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Session List Lists the group's clone pairs and their attributes, including:

Source Volume The hexadecimal ID of the source volume.

Source LDev The logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume The hexadecimal ID of the target volume.

Target LDev The logical name of the target volume.

State The session state of the pair.

Percent Copied The percentage of copying that is complete.

Timestamp Date and time the pair was established.

The following controls are available:

Create Snapshot See Creating Snapshots on page 416.

Restore See Restoring BCV pairs on page 417.

Split See Splitting BCV pairs on page 419.

View Details Viewing mirror pair details below

Cancel See Cancelling BCV pairs on page 419.

Viewing mirror pair details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > TimeFinder > TimeFinder/Mirror to open the TimeFinder/Mirror view.

3. Select a device group and click View Details to open the Mirror Pairs list view.

4. Select a pair and click View Details to open its Details view.

Group Group name.

Source Volume Hexadecimal ID of the source volume.

Source LDev Logical name of the source volume.

Target Volume Hexadecimal ID of the target volume.

Target LDev Logical name of the target volume.

Pair State Session state of the pair.

CDGP Flags specific to the pair session in the form:

(C): X = The background copy setting is active for this pair.

. = The background copy setting is not active for this pair.

(G): X = The Target volume is associated with a group.

. = The Target volume is not associated with a group.

(D): X = The Clone session is a differential copy session.

. = The Clone session is not a differential copy session.

(P): X = The pre-copy operation has completed one cycle.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 421

. = The pre-copy operation has not completed one cycle.

Number of source invalid tracks Number of invalid tracks owed to the target volume.

Number of target invalid tracks Number of invalid tracks owed to the source volume.

Percent Copied Percentage of copying complete.

TimeFinder/Mirror session options

The following table describes the TimeFinder/Mirror session options:

Session option

Description Available with action

Bypass Bypasses the storage system's exclusive locks for the local or remote array during mirror operations.

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Consistent Causes the standard volumes being managed to be consistently split. Cannot be combined with the Instant option.

Split

Differential Indicates that the split operation should initiate a differential data copy from the first mirror set member to the rest of the BCV mirror set members when the BCV pair split is done.

Split

Force Overrides any restrictions and forces the operation, even though one or more paired volumes may not be in the expected state. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Full Establish

Incremental Establish

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Differential Used with either the Copy or Precopy option to create an SDDF session for maintaining changed track information. This must be used when creating copy sessions on which you plan on issuing a Restore action.

Create

Establish

Force Overrides any restrictions and forces the operation, even though one or more paired volumes may not be in the expected state. Use

Create

Establish

Activate

Table 7: TimeFinder/Mirror session options

Chapter 6: Data Protection

422 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Session option

Description Available with action

caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Restore

Split

Terminate

Not Ready Sets the target volumes as Not Ready. Upon completion of a split action, the target volumes are set as Not Ready. When a restore is initiated, the standard volumes are set as Not Ready.

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Optimize Optimizes volume pairings across the local storage system without regard for whether the volumes belong to different RDF (RA) groups. For remote volumes , use the Optimize Rag option.

Full Establish

Optimize Rag

Uses optimization rules to create remote BCV pairs from volumes within the same RDF (RA) group on a Symmetrix system.

Full Establish

Protbcvest Applies to two-way mirrored BCV volumes . Moves all mirrors of the BCV volume to join the mirrors of the standard volume.

Full Establish

Incremental Establish

Protect Indicates that the BCV should be write-protected before initiating a restore operation.

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Remote Applicable only for split operations on a BCV RDF1 volume, or a restore operation from a BCV to a STD RDF2 volume. If this option is not specified, then the mode defaults to not propagate the data to the remote mirror of the RDF volume.

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Reverse With a split operation, initiates a reverse data copy from one or more fixed BCV mirrors to the first (moving) mirror of the BCV upon the completion of the split operation. With an establish or

Full Establish

Incremental Establish

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Local Replication 423

Session option

Description Available with action

restore operation, requests a verification check that the BCVs fixed mirror has valid data. If at establish or restore time you anticipate a need to perform future BCV reverse split operations, you must apply a reverse establish or restore so that no invalid tracks on the fixed BCV mirror become used.

Star Targets the action at volumes in SRDF/Star mode.

Full Establish

Restore

Split

Cancel

SymForce Forces an operation on the volume pair including pairs that would be rejected. Use caution when checking this option because improper use may result in data loss.

Full Establish

Incremental Establish

Split

Full Restore

Incremental Restore

Chapter 6: Data Protection

424 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Device Groups

Creating device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Click Create to open the Create Device Group wizard.

5. Type a Device Group Name.

6. Select a Device Group Type. Possible values are:

Regular Group can only contain REGULAR volumes.

R1 Group can only contain R1 volumes.

R2 Group can only contain R2 volumes.

R21 Group can only contain R21 volumes.

Any Group can contain any volume type.

7. Click Next.

8. Select the Source of the volumes to use when creating the group; either manual selection, or all the volumes in a storage group.

9. Do the following, depending on the source of the volumes:

Manual selection:

a. Select the Source Volume Type.

b. Select one or more volumes and click Add to Group.

Storage group:

Type or select the name of the Storage Group.

10. Click Next.

11. Select how to specify the Target Volumes, either manually or automatically.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Device Groups 425

12. Do the following, depending on how you are specifying the target volumes:

Automatically:

a. Optional: Select to replicate the source volumes using TimeFinder/Snap, TimeFinder Mirror, or TimeFinder/Clone. The required devices (if they are not found to be already existing and unused) will be created. The BCV devices will be automatically created for the TimeFinder Mirror device group. The VDEV devices will be automatically created for the TimeFinder/Snap device group. The required devices will be automatically created for the TimeFinder/Clone device group.

b. If you are replicating the source volumes with TimeFinder/Clone, select whether to add BCV or STD volumes to the device group. The volumes will be added with the TGT flag.

Manually:

a. Click Next.

b. Select the Target Volume Type.

c. Select one or more volumes and click Add to Group.

13. Click Next.

14. Verify your selections in the Summary page. To change any of your selections, click Back. Note that some changes may require you to make additional changes to your configuration.

15. Click Finish.

A window appears that displays the progress of the wizard's tasks.

Adding volumes to device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Select the device group and click Edit to open the Add Volumes to Device Group view.

5. From the list of available volumes select the volumes and click Add to Group.

6. Click OK.

Removing volumes from device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Select the device group and click View Details to open the Details view.

5. In the Related Objects panel, click a volume type to open the list view for the volume type.

6. Select one or more volumes and click Remove.

7. Click OK in the confirmation message.

Enabling consistency protection This procedure explains how to enable consistency protection.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

426 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To enable consistency:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Select a group, click more , and select Enable Consistency to open the dialog box.

5. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Disabling consistency protection This procedure explains how to disable consistency protection.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To disable consistency:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Select a group, click more , and select Disable Consistency to open the dialog box.

5. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Device Groups 427

advanced options and click OK.

Renaming device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Select the device group from the list and click View Details to open the Details view.

5. In the Name field, enter the new device group name and click Apply to save changes.

Deleting device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Select the device group and click Delete.

5. Click Delete in the confirmation message.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

428 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Viewing device groups 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

Use the Device Group list view to view and manage device groups.

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Name User-defined device group name.

Group Type Device configuration of the devices in the group. Possible values are:

Regular, R1, R2, R21, or Any.

Standards Number of standard devices in the device group.

BCVs Number of BCV devices in the device group.

VDEVs Number of virtual devices in the device group.

Targets Number of target devices in the device group.

Gatekeepers Number of gatekeeper devices in the device group. (Does not

apply/display with HYPERMAX OS 5977.)

Valid Indicates whether the device group is valid.

The following controls are available, depending on the operating environment:

Create See Creating device groups on page 425.

Edit See Adding volumes to device groups on page 426.

Delete See Deleting device groups on the previous page.

View Details See Viewing device group details below.

Replication QoS Setting replication QoS on page 233

Assign Dynamic Cache Partition Assigning dynamic cache partitions on page 867

(Does not apply/display with HYPERMAX OS 5977.)

Assign Symmetrix Priority Assigning Symmetrix priority on page 224

Set Optimized Read Miss Setting optimized read miss on page 228 (Does not

apply/display with HYPERMAX OS 5977.)

Viewing device group details 1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools.

3. Click Device Groups to open the Device Group list view.

4. Select the device group and click View Details to open its Details view.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Device Groups 429

The device group Details view allows you to view and manage a device group. This view contains Properties, Related Objects, and Performance Views panels.

Properties panel

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Name User-defined device group name.

Vendor ID System vendor ID.

Application ID Indicates which application created the device group.

Valid Indicates whether the device group is valid.

Device Group Priority QoS QoS priority setting for the device group.

Dynamic Cache Partition Name Dynamic cache partition to which the device group is

assigned.

Dynamic Group Create Time Time the device group was created.

Dynamic Group Modify Time Time the device group was modified.

Symmetrix ID Storage system serial number ID.

Remote Symmetrix ID storage system serial number ID of the remote storage system.

RBCV Symmetrix ID storage system serial number ID for the remote BCV.

RRBCV Symmetrix ID storage system serial number ID for remote RBCV.

Number of Associated Gatekeepers Number of gatekeeper devices in the device

group.

Number of STD Volumes in Group Number of standard devices in the device group.

Number of Locally-Associated BCVs Number of local BCV devices associated with the

device group.

Number of Locally-Associated VDEVs Number of virtual devices associated with the

device group.

Number of Locally-Associated TGTs Number of local target volumes associated with

the device group.

Number of Remotely-Associated BCVs (STD SRDF) Number of remote BCV devices

associated with the device group.

Number of Remotely-Associated BCVs (BCV SRDF) Number of BCV devices, associated

with the device group, to be paired with remotely-attached BCV devices.

Number of Remotely-Associated RBCVs (RBCV SRDF) Number of remote BCV devices

associated with the device group.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

430 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Number of Remotely-Associated VDEVs Number of remote VDEV devices associated

with the device group.

Number of Remotely-Associated TGTs Number of remote target devices associated

with the device group.

Number of Hop2 BCVs (Remotely-associated Hop2 BCV) Number of BCVs on the

second hop of the Cascaded SRDF configuration associated with the device group.

Number of Hop2 VDEVs (Remotely-associated Hop2 VDEV) Number of virtual devices

on the second hop of the Cascaded SRDF configuration associated with the device group.

Number of Hop2 TGTs (Remotely-associated Hop2 TGT) Number of target devices on

the second hop of the Cascaded SRDF configuration associated with the device group.

Pacing Capable Indicates if the device group allows write pacing capability.

Group-level Pacing State Indicates if the device group is write pacing enabled or

disabled.

Volume-level Pacing State Indicates if the volumes in the device group are write pacing

enabled or disabled.

Configured Group-level Exempt State Indicates if group-level write pacing exemption

capability is enabled or disabled.

Effective Group-level Exempt State Indicates if effective group-level write pacing

exemption capability is enabled or disabled.

Group Write Pacing Exempt Volumes Indicates if the volumes in the device group have

write pacing exemption capability enabled or disabled.

Cacheless Read Miss Cacheless read miss status. Possible values are:

Off Feature is disabled.

System Default storage system determines the appropriate optimized read miss mode.

The following controls are available, depending on the operating environment:

Create See Creating device groups on page 425.

Edit See Adding volumes to device groups on page 426.

Delete See Deleting device groups on page 428.

Replication QOS Setting replication QoS on page 233

Apply Applies changes made in the Properties list. For example, renaming the storage

group.

Cancel Cancels changes made in the Properties list.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Device Groups 431

Related Objects panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in or associated with the device group. Each group link is followed the name of the group, or by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking BCVs - 2 opens the view listing the two BCV devices contained in the device group.

Performance Views panel

The Performance panel links you to the performance analyze views for the group.

This panel will display with inactive links if the selected storage system is not registered for data collection.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

432 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Remote Replication

Managing remote replication sessions The SRDF dashboard provides you with a single place to monitor and manage SRDF sessions on a storage system. This includes device groups types R1, R2, and R21.

Unisphere for VMAX provides the ability to monitor and manage the SRDF replication on storage groups directly without the need to map to a device group.

Unisphere for VMAX provides the ability to monitor and manage SRDF/Metro from the SRDF dashboard. SRDF/Metro delivers active-active high availability for non-stop data access and workload mobility within a data center and across metro distance. It provides array clustering for storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher enabling even more resiliency, agility, and data mobility. SRDF/Metro enables hosts and host clusters to directly access a LUN or storage group on the primary SRDF array and secondary SRDF array (sites A and B). This level of flexibility delivers the highest availability and best agility for rapidly changing business environments.

In an SRDF/Metro configuration, SRDF/Metro utilizes the SRDF link between the two sides of the SRDF device pair to ensure consistency of the data on the two sides. If the SRDF device pair becomes Not Ready (NR) on the SRDF link, SRDF/Metro must respond by choosing one side of the SRDF device pair to remain accessible to the hosts, while making the other side of the SRDF device pair inaccessible. There are two options which enable this, bias and Witness.

The first option, bias, is a function of the two VMAX3 arrays taking part in the SRDF/Metro and is a required and integral component of the configuration. The second option, Witness, is an optional component of SRDF/Metro which allows a third VMAX or VMAX3 system to act as an external arbitrator to avoid an inconsistent result in cases where the bias functionality alone may not result in continued host availability of a surviving non-biased array.

SRDF

Configuration

Creating SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to create SRDF pairs.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 433

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773-5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Starting with Enginuity 5875, you can:

Block the creation of an SRDF pair when the R2 is larger than the R1. This feature requires that you disable the SYMAPI_RDF_CREATEPAIR_LARGER_R2 option in the SYMAPI options file (enabled by default). For more information on disabling SYMAPI options, refer to the Solutions Enabler Installation Guide.

Create SRDF pairs containing standard and thin volumes, or thin and diskless volumes. To use this feature, the thin and diskless volumes must be on a storage system running Enginuity 5875 or higher, and the standard volume must be on a storage system running Enginuity 5875, 5773, or 5671.

Meta volumes are supported on storage systems running Enginuity 5773 - 5876.

On storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, you can specify a RecoverPoint

volume as the R1 volume.

The cascaded R1 -> R21 -> R2 configuration of which an SRDF pair can be part, depends on the

Enginuity/HYPERMAX OS version of each of the devices. The following combinations are supported:

  R1 R21 R2   5977 5977 5977   5977 5977 5876   5977 5876 5876   5977 5876 5977   5876 5876 5977   5876 5977 5977   5876 5977 5876

To create an SRDF pair:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools > SRDF Groups to open the SRDF Groups list view.

3. Select the SRDF group and click Create Pairs to open the Create SRDF Pairs dialog box. This selection will determine the remote storage system.

4. Select the SRDF Mirror Type to add the volumes.

5. Select the SRDF Mode for the volume pairs. Depending on the existing configuration of the volumes in the group, not all modes may be available. The SRDF mode Active Active can only be selected if the SRDF Group is empty. If the SRDF Group already contains an Active Active session then the SRDF mode selector is not visible. For a list of possible modes, refer to SRDF group modes on page 507.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

434 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

6. Optional: Select the Adaptive Copy Mode. Possible values are:

Enabled: Disk Mode When set, the storage system acknowledges all writes to source

(R1) volumes as if they were local volumes. New data accumulates on the source (R1) volume and is marked by the source (R1) side as invalid tracks until it is subsequently transferred to the target (R2) volume. The remote director transfers each write to the target (R2) volume whenever link paths become available.

Enabled: WP Mode When set, the storage system acknowledges all writes to the source

(R1) volume as if it was a local volume. The new data accumulates in cache until it is successfully written to the source (R1) volume and the remote director has transferred the write to the target (R2) volume. This option requires that the source volume is on a storage system running Enginuity version 5773-5876.

7. Type the Number of Volumes in the Range.

8. Type or select the number of the first volume in the range of volumes on the local storage system (Local Start Volume).

9. Type or select the number of the first volume in the range of volumes on the remote storage system (Remote Start Volume).

10. Optional: Depending on the Mirror Type, select to Include Larger R2 volumes in the pair. or to Include Smaller R1 volumes in the pair.

11. Optional: Click Add to local Storage group.

12. Optional: Select storage group to which the local SRDF devices will be added.

13. Optional: Click Add to remote Storage group.

14. Optional: Select storage group to which the remote devices will be added.

15. Click one of the following:

OK to create the pair now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced options, as described next.

Setting Advanced options:

1. Select any number of the following options:

Invalidate Specifies the mirror to invalidate upon creation, if any. Possible values are:

R1 Invalidate the R1 mirror. This option is not supported on a volume pair with an R2 volume larger than the R1.

R2 Invalidates the R2 mirror. Starting with Enginuity 5875, this option is supported on a volume pair with an R2 volume larger than the R1.

None Invalidates neither mirror.

Establish Starts the RDF data copy upon creation.

Restore Resumes remote mirroring and initiates a data copy from the target (R2) side to

the source (R1) side. Depending on the operation, all (full) or only changed track (incremental) are copied to the source (R1) side.

Use RecoverPoint Tag Specifies that the operation will be performed on RecoverPoint volumes.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 435

Format Specifies to clear all tracks on the R1 and R2 sides, ensuring no data exists on

either side, and makes the R1 read write to the host

Establish Starts the RDF data copy upon creation.

Consistency Exempt Allows you to move volumes to an RDF group supporting an active

SRDF/A session without requiring other volumes in the group to be suspended.

Remote Requests a remote data copy flag.

No WD Specifies to not include volumes enabled for reads only.

When launching the Create Pairs dialog from a SRDF/Metro group, radio buttons

indicating Witness or Bias will be displayed. If Witness is detected this radio button is defaulted to Witness. If Witness is not detected, the radio button group is disabled and defaulted to Bias.

2. Click OK.

Deleting SRDF pairs

Deleting SRDF pairs cancels the dynamic SRDF pairing by removing the pairing information from the storage system and converting the volumes from SRDF to regular volumes. This operation can be performed on a storage group, a SRDF/Metro, or a device group.

Half deleting SRDF pairs cancels the dynamic SRDF pairing information for one side (R1s or R2s) of the specified volume pairs and converts the volumes from RDF to regular volumes. This operation can only be performed on a device group.

If you select all pairs for a delete pair action, then the option to remove the devices from the device group, or the local or remote Storage Group is not displayed, as it will not render the device group, storage group, or SRDF/Metro unmanageable.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To delete SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups, Device Groups or SRDF/Metro.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Delete Pair to open the Delete Pair dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select the Half Delete option if deleting one side of the volume pair.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

436 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

d. Optional: Select Remove from local Storage Groups, Remove from remote Storage Groups, and Remove from local Storage Groups if the pair deletion results in devices that are no longer SRDF protected, and results in the related device groups becoming invalid.

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run

the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select

the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Delete Pair to open the Delete Pair dialog box.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

d. Select the Half Delete option if deleting one side of the volume pair.

e. Optional: Deselect the selected (by default) Remove from Local Storage Groups, Remove from Remote Storage Groups, and Remove from Device Groups check boxes. If you deselect the selected defaults, you will be warned if the pair deletion results in devices that are no longer SRDF protected, and results in the related device groups becoming invalid. This option is not displayed if all pairs are selected.

f. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run

the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select

the advanced options and click OK.

Deleting SRDF pairs from details view

Moving SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to move the SRDF pair from one SRDF group to another. The move type can be a full move or a half move. A half move specifies to move only the local half of the RDF pair. When using this action on an RDF 1 type pair, only the R1 volume is moved. When using this action on an RDF 2 type pair, only the R2 volume is moved.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 437

To move SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Select a group, click more , and select Move to open the Move - Device Group dialog box.

5. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

6. Select New SRDF Group.

7. Select Move Type.

8. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Setting SRDF mode

This procedure explains how to set the mode of operation for an SRDF configuration. SRDF modes determine the following:

How R1 volumes are remotely mirrored to R2 volumes across the SRDF links

How I/OS are processed in an SRDF solution

When acknowledgments are returned to the production host that issued a write I/O command

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

The Adaptive Copy Mode value Enabled: WP Mode is not available if the R1 mirror of an SRDF pair is on a storage system running HYPERMAX OS 5977, or higher.

To set SRDF mode:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Set Mode to open the Set Mode -

Chapter 6: Data Protection

438 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select SRDF Mode, Adaptive Copy Mode and AC Skew to set the type of SRDF session modes (page 475).

d. Select Use Consistent to set consistent transition from asynchronous to synchronous mode.

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Set Mode to open the Set Mode - SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select SRDF Mode, Adaptive Copy Mode and AC Skew to set the type of SRDF session modes (page 475).

d. Select Use Consistent to set consistent transition from asynchronous to synchronous mode.

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Viewing SRDF volume pairs

This procedure explains how to view and manage the volume pairs in an SRDF group.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection >SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Select a device group from the list and click View Details to open the SRDF Pair List view.

The following properties display: Show Group Details:

Displays the following device group properties:

Group Valid Indicates if device group is valid or invalid for SRDF management.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 439

Application ID Application name managing SRDF actions.

Vendor ID Vendor name.

Group Creation Time Group creation time stamp.

Group Modify Time Group modification time stamp.

Remote Symmetrix Remote storage system ID

Volume Pacing Exempt State Indicates if volume pacing exempt is enabled.

Write Pacing Exempt State Indicates if write pacing exempt is enabled.

Effective Write Pacing Exempt State Indicates if effective write pacing exempt is

enabled.

Local tab:

Displays the following local SRDF link properties:

Source Volume Source volume ID.

Source LDev Source logical volume ID

Group SRDF group ID.

Remote Symmetrix Remote storage system ID.

Target Volume Target volume ID.

State State of the RDF volume pairs.

Volume State State of the source volume.

Remote Volume State State of the remote volume.

SRDF Mode SRDF copy type.

Local R1 Invalid Number of invalid R1 tracks on the source volume.

Local R2 Invalid Number of invalid R2 tracks on the source volume.

Remote R1 Invalid Number of invalid R1 tracks on the target volume.

Remote R2 Invalid Number of invalid R2 tracks on the target volume.

Hop2 tab:

Displays the following remote SRDF link properties:

Source LDev Source logical volume ID

Concurrent Volume Concurrent volume ID.

SRDF Group SRDF group ID.

Remote Symmetrix Remote storage system ID.

Target Volume Target volume ID.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

440 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

State State of the RDF volume pairs.

Volume State State of the source volume.

Remote Volume State State of the remote volume.

The following controls are available:

Establish See Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453.

Split See Splitting SRDF pairs on page 469.

Suspend Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470

Restore See Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466.

View Details See Viewing SRDF volume pairs on page 439.

Resume Resuming SRDF links (page 462)

Failover Failing over (page 454)

Failback Failing back (page 455)

Activate SRDF/A See Controls on page 449.

Deactivate SRDF/A See Deactivating SRDF/A controls on page 450.

Invalidate See Invalidating R1/R2 volumes on page 457.

Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes ready on page 458.

Not Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes not ready on page 459.

R1 Update See Updating R1 volumes on page 471.

RW Enable See Read/write enabling R1/R2 volumes on page 461.

Write Disable See Write disabling R1/R2 volumes on page 462.

RW Disable R2 See Read/write disabling R2 volumes on page 460.

Refresh See Refreshing R1 or R2 volumes on page 463.

Set Mode See Setting SRDF mode on page 438.

Viewing SRDF volume pair details

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Select a device group from the list and click View Details to open the SRDF Pair List view.

4. On the Local tab, select the pair and click View Details to open its details view.

5. Use the details view and manage the SRDF group volume pair and session status.

This view contains two panels, Properties and Related Objects.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 441

Properties panel

The following properties display:

Device Group Device group ID.

Source Volume Source volume ID.

Source LDev Source logical device ID.

SRDF Group SRDF Group ID.

Remote Symmetrix Remote storage system ID.

Remote SRDF Group Remote SRDF Group ID.

Target Volume Target volume ID.

Pair State Indicates volume pair state.

SRDF mode SRDF copy type.

Adaptive Copy Mode Indicates if adaptive copy mode is enabled.

Consistency State Indicates consistency state.

Consistency Exempt Indicates if consistency is exempt.

Link Status Indicates link state.

SRDF Domino Indicates SRDF Domino state.

SRDF Hop2 Group SRDF Hop2 Group ID.

Source Volume Invalid R1 Track Count Number of invalid R1 tracks on source volume.

Source Volume Invalid R2 Track Count Number of invalid R2 tracks on source volume.

Source Volume SRDF State Indicates source volume SRDF state.

Source Volume SRDF Type Indicates source volume SRDF type.

Source Volume Track Size Source volume track size.

Target Volume Invalid R1 Track Count Number of invalid R1 tracks on target volume.

Target Volume Invalid R2 Track Count Number of invalid R2 tracks on target volume.

Target Volume SRDF State Indicates target volume SRDF state.

Target Volume Track Size Target volume track size.

SRDF/A Pacing Capable Indicates if the SRDF pair allows write pacing capability.

Configured Group-level Exempt State Indicates if group-level write pacing exemption

capability is enabled or disabled.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

442 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Effective Group-level Exempt State Indicates if effective group-level write pacing exemption

capability is enabled or disabled.

Group Level Pacing State Indicates if group level write pacing is enabled or disabled.

Volume Level Pacing State Indicates if volume level write pacing is enabled or disabled.

SRDF/A Consistency Protection Indicates SRDF/A consistency protection state.

SRDF/A Average Cycle Time Average cycle time (seconds) configured for this session.

SRDF/A Minimum Cycle Time Minimum cycle time (seconds) configured for this session.

SRDF/A Cycle Number Indicates target volume SRDF state.

SRDF/A DSE Autostart Indicates DSE autostart state.

SRDF/A Session Number SRDF/A session number.

SRDF/A Session Priority Priority used to determine which SRDF/A sessions to drop if cache

becomes full. Values range from 1 to 64, with 1 being the highest priority (last to be dropped).

SRDF/A Duration Of Last Cycle The cycle time (in secs) of the most recently completed

cycle. It should be noted that in a regular case the cycles switch every ~30 sec, however, in most cases the collection interval is in minutes, which means some cycle times will be skipped. This an important counter to look at to figure out if SRDF/A is working as expected.

SRDF/A Flags RDFA Flags:

    (C)onsistency: X = Enabled, . = Disabled, - = N/A     (S)tatus : A = Active, I = Inactive, - = N/A     (R)DFA Mode : S = Single-session, M = MSC, - = N/A     (M)sc Cleanup: C = MSC Cleanup required, - = N/A     (T)ransmit Idle: X = Enabled, . = Disabled, - = N/A     (D)SE Status: A = Active, I = Inactive, - = N/A     DSE (A)utostart: X = Enabled, . = Disabled, - = N/A

SRDF/A Uncommitted Track Counts Number of uncommitted tracks.

SRDF/A Number of Volumes in Session Number of volumes in session.

SRDF/A Session Uncommitted Track Counts Number of uncommitted session tracks.

SRDF/A R1 DSE Used Track Count Number of tracks used for R1 DSE.

SRDF/A R1 Cache In Use Percent Percent of R1 cache used.

SRDF/A R1 Shared Track Count Number of R1 shared tracks.

SRDF/A R1 to R2 Lag Time Time that R2 is behind R1 (RPO). This is calculated as the last

cycle time plus the time since last switch. In a regular case, the cycles switch every ~30 sec and the samples are taken every few minutes, therefore this counter may not show very significant data, however, when cycles elongate beyond the sample time, this counter can help indicate an estimate of the RPO.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 443

SRDF/A R2 DSE Used Track Count Number of tracks used for R2 DSE.

SRDF/A R2 Cache In Use Percent Percent of R2 cache used.

SRDF/A Session Minimum Cycle Time Minimum cycle time (seconds) configured for this

session.

SRDF/A Transmit Idle State Indicates SRDF/A transmit idle state.

SRDF/A Transmit Idle Time Time the transmit cycle has been idle.

Suspended State Suspended state.

Sqar Mode Indicates if SRDF pair is in a SQAR configuration.

The following controls are available:

Establish See Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453.

Split See Splitting SRDF pairs on page 469.

Suspend Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470

Restore See Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466.

Resume Resuming SRDF links (page 462)

Failover Failing over (page 454)

Failback Failing back (page 455)

Activate SRDF/A See Controls on page 449.

Deactivate SRDF/A See Deactivating SRDF/A controls on page 450.

Invalidate See Invalidating R1/R2 volumes on page 457.

Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes ready on page 458.

Not Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes not ready on page 459.

R1 Update See Updating R1 volumes on page 471.

RW Enable See Read/write enabling R1/R2 volumes on page 461.

Write Disable See Write disabling R1/R2 volumes on page 462.

RW Disable R2 See Read/write disabling R2 volumes on page 460.

Refresh See Refreshing R1 or R2 volumes on page 463.

Set Mode See Setting SRDF mode on page 438.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

444 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Related Object panel

The Related Objects panel provides links to views for objects contained in and associated with the SRDF group. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking SRDF Group will open a view listing the two volumes contained in the SRDF group.

Viewing SRDF protected storage group pairs

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF.

3. Click Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

4. Select a storage group instance and click View Details to open the Storage Group pair list view.

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Source Type The source type of the source volume.

SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Remote Symmetrix The storage system serial number ID of the remote storage system.

Target Volume The target volume ID.

State The state of the storage group pair. Possible values are:

Consistent

Failed Over

Invalid

Partitioned

R1 Updated

R1 Update in progress

Suspended

Synchronization in progress

Synchronized

Transmit Idle

If Unisphere detects an asynchronous state change event for a SRDF group from Solutions Enabler, it updates the Unisphere state for the SRDF group and its related SRDF device groups and SRDF storage groups. The Storage Group list view must be refreshed so that the latest state is reflected.

Volume State The state of the source volume.

Remote Volume State The state of the remote volume.

SRDF Mode The SRDF copy mode.

Local R1 Invalid The number of invalid R1 tracks on the source volume.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 445

Local R2 Invalid The number of invalid R2 tracks on the source volume.

Remote R1 Invalid The number of invalid R1 tracks on the target volume.

Remote R2 Invalid The number of invalid R2 tracks on the target volume.

The following controls are available, depending on the operating environment:

Establish See Establishing SRDF pairs on page 453.

Split See Splitting SRDF pairs on page 469.

Suspend See Suspending SRDF pairs on page 470.

Restore See Restoring SRDF pairs on page 466.

View Details See Related Object panel on the facing page.

Resume See Resuming SRDF links on page 462.

Activate SRDF/A See Controls on page 449.

Deactivate SRDF/A See Deactivating SRDF/A controls on page 450.

Invalidate See Invalidating R1/R2 volumes on page 457.

Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes ready on page 458.

Not Ready See Making R1/R2 volumes not ready on page 459.

R1 Update See Updating R1 volumes on page 471.

RW Enable See Read/write enabling R1/R2 volumes on page 461.

Write Disable Write disabling R1/R2 volumes on page 462

RW Disable R2s Read/write disabling R2 volumes on page 460

Refresh Refreshing R1 or R2 volumes on page 463

Set Mode Setting SRDF mode on page 438

Viewing SRDF protected storage group pair properties

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF.

3. Click Storage Groups to open the Storage Group list view.

4. Select a storage group instance and click View Details to open the Storage Group pair list view.

5. Select a storage group pair instance and click View Details to open the Storage Group pair list properties view.

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Storage Group The name of the storage group.

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

446 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Remote Symmetrix The storage system serial number ID of the remote storage system.

Remote SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Target Volume The target volume ID.

Pair State The state of the storage group pair.

Link Status Indicates link state.

SRDF Domino Indicates SRDF Domino state.

Source Volume SRDF State Indicates SRDF state of source volume.

Source Volume SRDF TypeIndicates SRDF type of source volume.

Source Volume Track SizeIndicates track size of source volume.

Target Volume SRDF State Indicates SRDF state of target volume.

Target Volume Track Size Indicates track size of target volume.

Related Object panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the storage group. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view. For example, clicking Masking Views - 2 will open a view listing the two masking views associated with the storage group.

Viewing SRDF/Metro protected storage group pairs

Unisphere for VMAX provides SRDF monitoring and management for SRDF/Metro protected storage groups on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. Only single hop SRDF is supported for SRDF/Metro, that is, current or cascaded setups are not supported.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF.

3. Click SRDF/Metro to open the SRDF/Metro storage group list view.

4. Select a storage group instance and click View Details to open SRDF/Metro storage group pair list view

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

Source Type The source type of the source volume.

SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Remote Symmetrix The storage system serial number ID of the remote storage system.

Target Volume The target volume ID.

State The state of the storage group pair. Possible values are:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 447

ActiveActive

ActiveBias

Consistent

Failed Over

Invalid

Partitioned

R1 Updated

R1 Update in progress

Suspended

Synchronization in progress

Synchronized

Transmit Idle

Volume State The state of the source volume.

Remote Volume State The state of the remote volume.

SRDF Mode The SRDF copy type.

The following controls are available, depending on the operating environment:

Delete Pair See Deleting SRDF pairs on page 451.

View Details See "Related Object panel" on page 449

Viewing SRDF Metro protected storage group pair properties

Unisphere for VMAX provides SRDF monitoring and management for SRDF/Metro protected storage groups on storage systems running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher. Only single hop SRDF is supported for SRDF/Metro, that is, current or cascaded setups are not supported.

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF.

3. Click SRDF/Metro to open the SRDF/Metro storage group list view.

4. Select a storage group instance and click View Details to open SRDF/Metro storage group pair list view

5. Select a storage group pair instance and click View Details to open the SRDF/Metro storage group pair list properties view.

The following properties display, depending on the operating environment:

Storage Group The name of the storage group..

Source Volume The name of the source volume.

SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Remote Symmetrix The storage system serial number ID of the remote storage system.

Remote SRDF Group The RDF group number.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

448 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Target Volume The target volume ID.

Pair State The state of the storage group pair.

SRDF Mode The SRDF copy type.

Related Object panel

The Related Objects panel links you to views displaying objects contained in and associated with the storage group. Each link is followed by a number, indicating the number of objects in the corresponding view.

Controls

Activating SRDF/A controls

This procedure explains how to activate SRDF/A control actions (page 505) that detect cache overflow conditions and take corrective action to offload cache or slow down the host I/O rates to match the SRDF/A service rates.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To activate SRDF/A controls:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Activate SRDF/A to open the Activate SRDF/A - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Activate Type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 449

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Activate SRDF/A to open the Activate SRDF/A SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select Activate Type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Deactivating SRDF/A controls

This procedure explains how to deactivate SRDF/A control actions (page 505) that detect cache overflow conditions and take corrective action.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To deactivate SRDF/A controls:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Deactivate SRDF/A to open the Deactivate SRDF/A - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Deactivate Type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

450 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Deactivate SRDF/A to open the Deactivate SRDF/A SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select Deactivate Type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

.

Deleting SRDF pairs

Deleting SRDF pairs cancels the dynamic SRDF pairing by removing the pairing information from the storage system and converting the volumes from SRDF to regular volumes. This operation can be performed on a storage group, a SRDF/Metro, or a device group.

Half deleting SRDF pairs cancels the dynamic SRDF pairing information for one side (R1s or R2s) of the specified volume pairs and converts the volumes from RDF to regular volumes. This operation can only be performed on a device group.

If you select all pairs for a delete pair action, then the option to remove the devices from the device group, or the local or remote Storage Group is not displayed, as it will not render the device group, storage group, or SRDF/Metro unmanageable.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To delete SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups, Device Groups or SRDF/Metro.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Delete Pair to open the Delete Pair dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select the Half Delete option if deleting one side of the volume pair.

d. Optional: Select Remove from local Storage Groups, Remove from remote Storage Groups, and Remove from local Storage Groups if the pair deletion results in devices that are no longer SRDF protected, and results in the related device groups becoming invalid.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 451

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run

the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select

the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Delete Pair to open the Delete Pair dialog box.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

d. Select the Half Delete option if deleting one side of the volume pair.

e. Optional: Deselect the selected (by default) Remove from Local Storage Groups, Remove from Remote Storage Groups, and Remove from Device Groups check boxes. If you deselect the selected defaults, you will be warned if the pair deletion results in devices that are no longer SRDF protected, and results in the related device groups becoming invalid. This option is not displayed if all pairs are selected.

f. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run

the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select

the advanced options and click OK.

Deleting SRDF pairs from the SRDF List Volumes View

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To delete SRDF pairs from the SRDF List Volumes View

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > Replication Groups and Pools to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click SRDF Groups.

4. Select a group and click View Details.

5. Click the Volumes related object.

6. Select a volume and click and select Delete Pairs to open the Delete Pair dialog box.

7. Select the Half Delete option if deleting one side of the volume pair.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

452 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

8. Optional: Deselect the selected (by default) Remove from Local Storage Groups, Remove from Remote Storage Groups, and Remove from Device Groupscheck boxes. If you deselect the selected defaults, you will be warned if the pair deletion results in devices that are no longer SRDF protected, and results in the related device groups becoming invalid. This option is not displayed if all pairs are selected.

9. Optional: Select Use Force.

10. Click OK.

Establishing SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to start SRDF pair mirroring.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

You can run an establish operation on a cascaded R1 -> R21 -> R2 configuration if any of the storage systems in the cascaded configuration is running HYPERMAX OS Q1 2015 SR or later.

To establish SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups, Device Groups or SRDF/Metro.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group and click Establish to open the Establish - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select Full or Incremental session type.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups) .

d. Select Witness or Bias (only applicable for SRDF/Metro). Witness, if available, is the default option. If Witness is not available, Bias is set by the system and the radio buttons are disabled.

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Establish to open the Establish Sessions dialog box.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 453

c. Select Full or Incremental establish type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

Failing over

In a period of scheduled downtime for maintenance, or after a serious system problem which has rendered either the host or storage system containing the source (R1) volumes unreachable, no read/write operations can occur on the source (R1) volumes. In this situation, the fail over operation should be initiated to make the target (R2) volumes read/write enabled to their local hosts.

Before you begin:

If the target (R2) volume is on a storage system running HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher, and the mode of the source (R1) volume is Adaptive Copy Write Pending, SRDF will set the mode to Adaptive Copy Disk.

As a result of a failover (with establish or restore) operation, a cascaded R1 -> R21 -> R2 configuration can be created if any of the storage systems in the cascaded configuration is running HYPERMAX OS Q1 2015 SR or later.

To initiate a failover:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more and select Failover to open the Failover dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select the fail over SRDF session options (page 472).

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Chapter 6: Data Protection

454 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more and select Failover to open the Failback dialog box.

c. Select the fail over SRDF session options (page 472).

d. Do one of the following::

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Failing back

A fail back operation is performed when you are ready to resume normal SRDF operations by initiating read/write operations on the source (R1) volumes, and stopping read/write operations on the target (R2) volumes. The target (R2) volumes become read-only to their local hosts while the source (R1) volumes are read/write enabled to their local hosts.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To initiate a failback:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Failback to open the Failback dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select any of the available session options, as described in SRDF session options on page 472.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 455

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Failback to open the Failback dialog box.

c. Select any of the available session options, as described in SRDF session options on page 472.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Half-swapping SRDF/Metro pairs

When the SRDF device pairs of an SRDF/Metro configuration are Not Ready (NR) on the link, and the SRDF pair state is Partitioned, a half swap operation is allowed. If the half swap is issued to the R2, the SRDF link to the R1 must be unavailable.

If the half swap is issued to the R1, the SRDF link to the other side must be available and the SRDF pair must be seen as R1 R1 (duplicate pair).

Before you begin:

SRDF requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To half swap SRDF/Metro pair:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click SRDF/Metro.

4. Select a group, click more , and select Half Swap to open the Half Swap dialog box.

5. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

456 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Invalidating R1/R2 volumes

This procedure explains how to run internal checks to see if a volume swap is valid. To invoke this operation, the RDF pairs at the source must already be Suspended and Write Disabled or Not Ready.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To invalidate R1/R2 volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Invalidate to open the Invalidate - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select R1or R2 volume type.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Invalidate to open the Invalidate SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select side R1or R2.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 457

advanced options and click OK.

Making R1/R2 volumes ready

This procedure explains how to set the R1 (source) or R2 (target) volumes ready to their local hosts.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To make R1/R2 volumes ready:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Ready to open the Ready - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select side R1 or R2.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Ready to open the Ready SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select R1 or R2 volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

458 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Making R1/R2 volumes not ready

This procedure explains how to set the source (R1) or the target (R2) volumes not ready to the local host.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To make R1/R2 volumes not ready:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Not Ready to open the Not Ready - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select side R1 or R2.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Not Ready to open the Not Ready SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select R1 or R2 volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472).

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 459

Select the advanced options and click OK.

Read/write disabling R2 volumes

This procedure explains how to read/write disable target (R2) volumes to their local hosts.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To read/write disable R2 volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select RW Disable R2 to open the RW Disable R2 - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select RW Disable R2 to open the RW Disable R2 SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

460 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Read/write enabling R1/R2 volumes

This procedure explains how to write enable the R1 (source) or R2 (target) volumes ready to their local hosts.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To read/write enable R1/R2 volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select RW Enable to open the RW Enable - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select RW Enable R1s or RW Enable R2s volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select RW Enable to open the RW Enable - SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select R1 or R2 volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 461

Resuming SRDF links

This procedure explains how to resume I/O traffic on the SRDF links for all remotely mirrored RDF pairs in the group.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To resume SRDF links:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Resume to open the Resume dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Resume to open the Resume dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Write disabling R1/R2 volumes

This procedure explains how to write disable source (R1) volumes/target (R2) volumes to their local hosts.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

462 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To write disable R1/R2 volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Write Disable to open the dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Write Disable R1s or Write Disable R2s volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Do Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or

run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Write Disable to open the Write Disable SRDF pair dialog box.

c. Select R1 or R2 volume type.

d. Do one of the following:

Do Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or

run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Refreshing R1 or R2 volumes

The refresh R1 action marks any changed tracks on the source (R1) volume to be refreshed from the target (R2) side. The Refresh R2 action marks any changed tracks on the target (R2) volume to be refreshed from the source (R1) side.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 463

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To invoke this operation, the SRDF pair(s) must be in one of the following states:

Suspended and Write Disabled at the source

Suspended and Not Ready at the source

Failed Over with the -force option specified

This operation is rejected if the target has invalid local (R2) tracks.

To refresh volumes:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group, click more , and select Refresh to open the Refresh - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select R1or R2 volume type.

c. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration.

d. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs, click more , and select Refresh to open the Refresh SRDF Pair dialog box.

c. Select R1or R2 volume type.

d. Click one of the following:

OK to start the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

This action can also be run from pair level details view. Select a pair and click View Details.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

464 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Resetting original device identity

After deleting a SRDF/Metro pair, the unbiased devices keep the new identity. This procedure explains how to reset the original device identity.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To establish SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. From the Data Protection dashboard:

Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection

dashboard.

Click Total to view the list of all storage groups on the storage system.

Select a former unbiased SRDF/Metro storage group and click Reset SRDF/Metro

Identity to open the Reset Original Identity dialog box.

b. From the Storage dashboard:

Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups

dashboard.

Click Total to view the list of all storage groups on the storage system.

Select a former unbiased SRDF/Metro storage group and click Reset SRDF/Metro

Identity to open the Reset Original Identity dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select Storage > Volumes to open the Storage Volumes view.

b. Filter the view to display volume(s) that were formally part of a SRDF/Metro pair.

c. Do one of the following:

Select a volume and click Reset SRDF/Metro Identity to open the Reset Original

Identity dialog box.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 465

Select a volume, click View Details to view the volume details, and then click

Reset SRDF/Metro Identity to open the Reset Original Identity dialog box.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced options as described in SRDF session

options on page 472. Select the advanced options and click OK.

Restoring SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to restore data from the target (R2) volumes to the source (R1) volumes. When you fully restore SRDF pairs, the entire contents of the R2 volume is copied to the R1 volume. When you incrementally restore the R1 volume, only the new data that was changed on the R2 volume while the RDF group pair was split is copied to the R1 volume.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To restore SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups, Device Groups or SRDF/Metro.

4. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group and click Restore to open the Restore - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Full or Incremental restore type.

d. Select Witness or Bias (only applicable for SRDF/Metro). Witness, if available, is the default option. If Witness is not available, Bias is set by the system and the radio buttons are disabled.

e. Do one of the following:

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Restore to open the Restore Sessions dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Chapter 6: Data Protection

466 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Setting bias location

This procedure explains how to set bias. If bias is chosen to be set as part of the Suspend operation, the side with the bias is the side that the host can see after the Suspend operation completes.

To set bias:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Select SRDF/Metro.

4. Select a group, click more , and select Set Bias Location to open the dialog box.

5. View the Move Bias setting that moves the bias from one side to the other (only applicable for SRDF/Metro). This will take effect after this operation is executed.The bias indicates the side that remains visible to the host.

6. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule or run the

task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Click Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Setting the SRDF GCM flag

This procedure supports the setting of the SRDF GCM flag both from storage Group perspective and at individual device level.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To establish SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. From the Data Protection dashboard:

Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 467

dashboard.

Click Total to view the list of all storage groups on the storage system.

Select a storage group and click Set SRDF GCM to open the Set GCM dialog box.

Click OK.

b. From the Storage Volumes View:

Select Storage > Storage Volumes to open the Storage Volumes view.

Select a storage group and click Set SRDF GCM to open the Set GCM dialog box.

Click OK.

c. From the Storage Volumes Details View:

Select Storage > Storage Volumes to open the Storage Volumes view.

Select a storage group and click View Details to open theStorage Volumes view.

Click Set SRDF GCM to open the Set GCM dialog box.

Click OK.

Setting volume status

After deleting an SRDF/Metro pair, the volumes can be in a Not Ready state. This dialog allows you to set the volume state.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To set the volume state:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. From the Data Protection dashboard:

Select Data Protection > Protection Dashboard to open the Protection

dashboard.

Click Total to view the list of all storage groups on the storage system.

Select a former unbiased SRDF/Metro storage group and click Set Volume Status

to open the Set Volume Status dialog box.

b. From the Storage dashboard:

Select Storage > Storage Groups Dashboard to open the Storage Groups

dashboard.

Click Total to view the list of all storage groups on the storage system.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

468 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Select a former unbiased SRDF/Metro storage group and click Set Volume Status

to open the Set Volume Status dialog box.

c. Click OK.

Splitting SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to stop SRDF pair mirroring.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To split SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups or Device Groups.

Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group and click Split to open the Split - Device Group dialog box.

b. Select the Use 2nd Hop option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Use Immediate for immediate split on asynchronous devices.

d. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Split to open the Split dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

Remote Replication 469

Suspending SRDF pairs

This procedure explains how to stop data transfer between SRDF pairs.

Before you begin:

SRDF requires Enginuity version 5773 - 5876, or HYPERMAX OS 5977 or higher.

To suspend SRDF pairs:

1. Select the storage system.

2. Select Data Protection > SRDF to open the SRDF dashboard.

3. Click Storage Groups, Device Groups or SRDF/Metro.

Do the following, depending on whether you want to perform the operation at the group level or pair level: Group level:

a. Select a group and click Suspend to open the Suspend dialog box.

b. Select the Hop2 option if including the second hop of a cascaded SRDF configuration (only applicable for device groups).

c. Select Use Immediateor Use Consistency Exempt SRDF session options (page 472).

d. Click Move Bias to move the bias from one side to the other (only applicable for SRDF/Metro). The side with the bias set is the side that the host can see after the suspend action completes.

e. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Pair level:

a. Select a storage or device group and click View Details to open the SRDF pair list view.

b. Select one or more pairs and click Suspend to open the Suspend Sessions dialog box.

c. Do one of the following:

Click Add to Job List to add this task to the job list, from which you can schedule

or run the task at your convenience. For more information, refer to Scheduling jobs on page 843 and Previewing on page 842.

Expand Add to Job List, and click Run Now to perform the operation now.

Show Advanced to set the advanced SRDF session options (page 472). Select the

advanced options and click OK.

Chapter 6: Data Protection

470 Unisphere for VMAX Online Help

Swapping SRDF personalities

This procedure explains how to swap the SRDF volume designations for a specified device group. It changes source (R1) volumes to target (R2) volumes